(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "ibm :: 360 :: bibliography :: A22-6822-12 360 Bibliography Dec68"

File No. S360-00 
Form A22-6822-12 




IBM 



Systems Reference Library 




IBM System/360 Bibliography 



All available reference literature applicable to the installation and 
6peration of any bbm System/360, except the Model 20, is in this 
Pibliography. Part 1 is a publications selector, arranged by model 
and machine number. Part 2 provides abstracts of all publications 
in form-number sequence. 

Publications relating to the Model 20 are in the IBM System/ 
360 Model 20 Bibliography, Form A26-3565. Another publication 
of interest to the user of System/360 is the IBM Teleprocessing 
Bibliography, Form A24-3089. 

Additional copies of most publications with form numbers can 
be ordered through local ibm representatives. Special ordering 
procedures are given in the abstracts. 










Systems Reference Library 



For each major ibm data processing system, a Systems 
Reference Library (srl) contains all basic reference 
literature needed to plan, program, install, and operate 
the system. An srl Bibliography Supplement, Form 
A24-3089, covers publications for ibm teleprocessing 
and data collection equipment. The Bibliography of 
Data Processing Techniques, Form F20-8172, lists se- 
lected ibm technique-oriented publications that are 
applicable to many types of systems. 

Bibliography 

The bibliography is always associated with the Sys- 
tem/360 SRL Newsletter, Form N20-0360. When you 
order the bibliography, you automatically receive the 
sbl Newsletter. The bibliography provides a publica- 
tion selector to aid in quickly finding publications re- 
lated to a specific model or device, and contains the 
abstracts (in form number sequence) for all current 
System/360 srl publications except those pertaining 
to the Model 20. 

By reviewing the contents of this bibliography, you 
may select items of interest for your installation and 
be aware of other materials that may be useful in the 
future. 

File Numbers, Subject Codes 

The cover page of each srl manual shows the title, 
abstract, form number, and file number. The file num- 
ber identifies the system or component discussed and 
the general subject area. 

For publications associated with one or two Li- 
braries, the prefix of the file number is the system type 
(e.g., 1401/1460-, 7080- ). When the publication is in- 
cluded in more than two Libraries, the component 
type (e.g., 1311-, 7330- ) is used, if applicable. In other 
cases "genl" (general) is used. 

The suffix of the file number is the subject code 
which designates a general subject area and the sug- 
gested filing sequence. Code 15, for example, is used 
for all publications related to physical planning specifi- 
cations; code 33 appears on all publications related to 
ibm sort and merge programs for the system. Applica- 
tion program documentation appears under-subject 
code 60. 

In the bibliography, the subject code for any pub- 
lication appears to the upper right of its abstract. 

Thirteenth Edition (December, 1968) 

This. is a major revision of, and obsoletes, A22-6822-11 and all associated 
srl Newsletters. The entire section headed "Library Subject Code Listing" 
has been removed; however, the contents of that section continue to appear 
in the current issue of the System/360 SRL Newsletter, Form N20-0360. 
Always use the bibliography with the current shl Newsletter. 

Requests for copies of ibm publications should be made to your ibm 
representative or to the ibm branch office serving your locality. 

This manual has been prepared by the ibm Systems Development Division, 
Product Publications, Dept. B98, PO Box 390, Poughkeepsie, N.Y. 12602. 
Send comments concerning the contents of this publication to the above 
address. 



A complete list of publications appears as an accumu- 
lative index in subject-code sequence in the System/ 
360 SRL Newsletter, Form N20-0360. 

Technical Newsletters 

To keep publications current, additions and other 
modifications are distributed as Technical Newsletters 
(tnls). The tnl masthead carries the file number and 
form number of the publication to which it applies. 
Also, all previously issued tnls are listed so that you 
may verify receipt of all changes. 

SRL Newsletter 

The System/360 SRL Newsletter, Form N20-0360, is 
issued every four weeks (if changes have occurred 
during that period) to update the System/360 Bibliog- 
raphy. All current publications are listed in subject 
code sequence. Each entry shows the form number 
and title of the publication as well as the form num- 
bers of applicable tnls. Obsolete publications are listed 
separately, with replacement form numbers (if any) 
indicated. Abstracts of new publications are also 
included. 

The srl Newsletter gives the form number suffix so 
that you may verify your publications as current. 
Some publications have more than one current edi- 
tion, since a reprint that incorporates previously dis- 
tributed replacement pages is given a new suffix. All 
current editions and applicable tnls are listed in die 
srl Newsletter. 



SRL Subscription Service 

A direct-mail service is available to ibm system users 
to supply new publications, major revisions, and Tech- 
nical Newsletters for a library that is formed and 
maintained according to a profile of the user's inter- 
ests. To subscribe, see your local ibm representative. 

IBM Programming Systems 

SRL Newsletters also show the current status of pro- 
gramming systems available for a system. Additional 
data, including ordering instructions, for these and 
application programs are in the Catalog of Programs 
for IBM System/360, Form C20-1619. 



Part 1 — Publications Selector 



The publications selector is an aid for quickly finding 
publications about a specific model or specific i/o 
control unit or device of the System/ 360, except for 
publications about the Model 20. It is arranged ac- 
cording to the numbers of the models and the i/o 
units. To determine the models of the System/ 360 to 
which an i/o unit currently may attach, refer to the 
IBM System 1 360 Input J Output Configurator, Form 
A22-6823. 

Aids for finding specific Programming Systems pub- 
lications are given in the: 

IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support Pro- 
gramming Index, Form C24-5067 

IBM System/360 Basic Operating System Program- 
ming Index, Form C24-5041 



IBM System/360 Tape Operating System Program- 
ming Index, Form C24-5064 

IBM System/360 Disk Operating System Program- 
ming Index, Form C24-5063 

IBM System/360 Operating System Master Index, 
Form C28-6644 

IBM System/360 Model 44 Programming System — 
Concepts and Facilities, Form C28-6810 

IBM System/360 Time Sharing System Concepts 
and Facilities, Form C28-2003 

Refer to the IBM System/360 Model 20 Bibliogra- 
phy, Form A26-3565, for information regarding the 
Model 20. 



Publication 
Description 


Publication Form Number for System/360 


Model 25 


Model 30 


Model 40 


Model 44 


Model 50 


Model 65 


Model 67 


Model 75 


Model 85 


Model 91 


System Summary 




A22-6810 (for all models) 














System Reference 




A22-6821 (for all models) 














System Physical 
Planning Reference 




C22-6820 (for all models) 














Model Reference 


A24-3510 


A24-3231 

(CPU) 
A24-3411 
(Channel) 


A22-6881 


A22-6875 


A22-6898 


A22-6884 


A27-2719 


A22-6889 


A22-6916 


A22-6907 


Model Configurator 


A24-3511 


A24-3232 


A22-6813 


A22-6874 


A22-6814 


A22-6887 


A27-2713 


A22-6888 


A22-6920 


(In 
A22-6907) 


Model Operating 
Procedures 




A24-3373 


A22-691 1 


A22-6910 


A22-6908 


A27-2728 




A22-6909 






Model Physical 
Planning Template 

I/O Reference 


X22-6894 


X22-6894 
See separate 


X22-6894 
I/O chart. 


X22-6914 


X22-6914 


X22-6856 
X22-6924 


X22-6905 


X22-6856 


X22-6923 




I/O Configurator 




A22-6823 (for all models) 














OEMI: Channel- 
to-Control Unit 
Interface 




A22-6843 (for all models) 














OEMI: Power 
Control Interface 




A22-6906 (for all models except 91) 














OEMI: Direct 
Control Feature 




A22-6845 (for all models except 44) 














Channel-to-Channel 
Adapter Feature 




A22-6892 (for all models) 














Other Features 


A24-3512 
A24-3524 
A24-3526 


A24-3255 
A24-3365 
C20-1650 


L22-6902 
L22-6903 
L22-6904 


A22-6900 


A27-2717 


A27-2715 
A27-2716 
A27-2717 











IBM System/360 Bibliography 3 





Publication Form Number 


I/O Device or 
Control Unit 


Reference OEM! 
Manuel Manual 


Physicai 
Planning 
Template 


50 Magnetic Data 
Inscriber Model 1 


A27-2725 




1017 Paper Tape Reader 
Models 1,2 


A 33-4500 


X22-6834 


1018 Paper Tape Punch 
ModeM 


A33-4500 


X22-6834 


1051 Control Unit 
Models 1.N1 


* * 


X22-6894 
X24-3381 


1052 Printer-Keyboard 
Models 3. 5, 8 


* * 




1052 Printer-Keyboard 
Model7 


A22-6B77 




1053 Printer 
Models 1,4 


* * 


X22-6894 


1231 Optical Mark 
Page Reader 
Model N1 


A21-9031 
(A21-9012) 


X22-6860 


1258 Magnetic 
Character Reader 
Model 2 


A24-3500 


X22-6860 


1286 Optical Reader 
Model 1 


A24-32S6 


X22-6860 


1287 Optical Reader 
Models 1-4 


A21-9064 


X22-6860 


1288 Optical Page 
Reader Model 1 


A21-9081 


X22-6860 


1403 Printer 
Models 2, 3, 7, N1 


A24-3073 A24-1431 
(A24-3488) 


X22-6834 


1404 Printer 
Model 2 


A24-1446 A24-3356 


X22-6834 


1412 Magnetic 
Character Reader 
Model 1 


A24-1421 


X22-6860 


1418 Optical 
Character Reader 
Models 1,2 


A24-1473 

(A24-1452) 

(A24-3081) 


X22-6860 


1418 Optical 
Character Reader 
Model 3 


A24-1473 
A24-3059 
(A24-1462I 
(A24-3081) 


X22-6860 


1419 Magnetic 
Character Reader 
Model 1 


A24-1499 
(A24-3342) 


X22-6860 


1428 Alphameric 
Optical Reader 
Models 1, 2 


A24-1473 

(A24-1452) 

(A24-3081) 


X22-6860 


1428 Alphameric 
Optical Reader 
Model 3 


A24-1473 
A24-3059 
(A24-1452) 
(A24-3081) 


X22-6860 


1442 Card Read 
Punch Model N1 


A21-9025 


X22-6834 


1442 Card Punch 
Model N2 


A21-9025 


X22-6834 


1443 Printer 
Model IM1 


A24-3120 
(A24-3488) 


X 22-6834 


1446 Printer 
Model N1 


A 24-31 20 


X22-6834 


1827 Data Control 
Unit Model 1 


A22-6868 
(A22-6872) 


X2&6508 


2150 Console 
Modell 


A22-6877 


X22-68B9 


2260 Display Unit 
Modell 


A27-2701 


X22-6859 


2260 Display Unit 
Models 


A27-2721 


X22-6858 


2260 Display Station 
Models 1,2 


A27-2700 
(C20-1688) 




2301 Drum Storage 
Modell 


A22-6B96 A26-5661 
(C20-1649) 


X22-6858 





Publication Form Number 


I/O Device or 
Control Unit 


Reference 
Manual 


OEMI 
Manual 


Physical 
Planning 
Template 


2302 Disk Storage 
Models 3, 4 


A 26-5988 
(C20-1649) 




X22-685B 


2303 Drum Storage 
Modell 


A 26-5988 
(C20-1649) 


A 26-5663 


X22-6858 


2311 Disk Storage 

Drive 

Modell 


A 26-5968 
(C20-1649) 


A26-3567 


X22-6858 


2314 Direct Access 
Storage Facility 
Modell 


A26-3599 
(C20-1649) 




X22-6858 


2321 Data Cell Drive 
Modell 


A26-5988 
(A26-3633) 
(C20-1649) 


A26-3574 


X22-6858 


2401 Magnetic Tape 
Unit Models 1-6 


A22-6866 


A22-6862 


X22-6855 


241 5 Magnetic Tape 
Unit and Control 
Models 1-6 


A 22-6866 




X22-6855 


2420 Magnetic Tepe Unit 
Model 7 


A22-6918 




X22-6855 


2495 Tape Cartridge 
Reader Model 1 


A27-2726 




X22-6855 


2501 Card Reader 
Models B1.B2 


A21-9026 




X22-6834 


2520 Card Read Punch 
Model B1 


A21-9027 




X22-6834 


2520 Card Punch 
Models B2.B3 


A21-9027 




X22-6834 


2640 Card Read Punch 
Modell 


A21-9033 




X22-6834 


2660 Multifunction 
Card Machine 
Model A1 


A26-5893 




X22-6894 


2671 Paper Tape Reader 
Modell 


A24-3388 




X22-6834 


2701 Data Adapter Unit 
Modell 


A22-6864 


A22-6844 


X22-6857 


2702 Transmission 
Control Model 1 


A22-6846 




X22-6857 


2703 Transmission 
Control Model 1 


A27-2703 




X22-6857 


2803 Tape Control 
Models 1,2 


A22-6866 




X22-6856 


2804 Tape Control 
Models 1,2 


A22-6866 




X 22-6855 


2816 Switching Unit 
Modell 


A22-6866 




X22-685S 


2820 Storage Control 
Modell 


A 22-6895 




X22-6858 


2821 Control Unit 
Models 1-6 


A24-3312 




X22-6834 


2822 Paper Tape 
Reader Control 
Modell 


A24-3388 




X22-6834 


2826 Paper Tape Control 
Models 1,2 


A33-4600 




X22-6834 


2840 Display Control 
Model 2 


A27-2721 




X 22-6859 


2841 Storage Control 
Modell 


A 26-5988 




X22-6868 


2844 Auxiliary Storage 
Control Model 1 


A 26-3699 




X 22-6858 


2848 Display Control 
Models 1-3, 21, 22 


A27-2700 
(C20-1688I 




X22-6859 


7770 Audio Response 
Unit Model 3 


A27-2712 


A27-2706 


X22-6857 


7772 Audio Response 
Unit Model 3 


A27-2711 
(A27-2710) 


A27-2706 


X22-6857 



Publications shown In parentheses are related out not primary references. 
* See IBM SRL Bibliography Supplement - Teleprocessing, Form 
A24-30B9. 



Part 2 — Abstracts 



The abstracts for all System/360 publications and ma- 
terials, except those pertaining to the Model 20, are 
listed by form number. From the abstract, the Sys- 
tem/360 user can determine if a particular publication 
is applicable. The subject code number is shown at the 
right of the tide. 



320-1621 IBM Marketing Publications 99 

KWIC Index 

Keyword Index of Marketing Publications, based on 
publication titles. Each tide is shifted to the right, one 
keyword at a time, and placed in alphabetic order with 
all other keywords. Type numbers are treated as key- 
words; thus a section of the index contains all publi- 
cations in type number sequence. (176 pages) 



Al 9-0004 IBM 1219 Reader Sorter Model 32 09 

IBM 1419 Magnetic Character Reader 
Model 32; For IBM World Trade Use Only 

This publication contains detailed information about 
the keys, lights, switches, mechanical features, and 
special features of the ibm 1219 Reader Sorter Model 
32 and the ibm 1419 Magnetic Character Reader 
Model 32. 

On-line and off-line data-flow and operating theory 
are fully discussed, with step-by-step procedures for 
each reader operation. Programming notes and error- 
correction routines are also covered in detail. It should 
be noted that, in the areas of on-line operation, error- 
recovery, and programming notes, this manual refers 
to the 1401 attachment only. 

For additional information, readers are referred to 
the following publications: IBM 1401/1460 Miscellane- 
ous Input /Output Instructions, Form A24-3068; and 
IBM 1419 Magnetic Character Reader with IBM 1410 
System, Form A22-0536. For information concerning 
the attachment of the ibm 1219/1419 Model 32 to the 
ibm System/360 Models 30 or 40, readers are referred 
to IBM 1419 Model 32 Attached to IBM System/360 
Model 30 or 40, Form A19-0023. (60 pages) 



Al 9-0010 IBM 3944 Dial Terminal Unit 09 

For World Trade Use Only 

The ibm 3944 Dial Terminal Unit is designed to be 
used as an input device to Audio Response Units 
through a telephone network. 

The ibm 7772 Audio Response Unit is an input/ 
output unit of the ibm System/ 360 Models 30, 40, 50, 
65, and 75, interfacing the computer and a telephone 
network. The Audio Response Unit provides, under 
program control, composed messages of spoken words 
in response to digital inquiries or input messages. Ex- 
cept for the use of digital language from the calling 
to the called line, communication between remote in- 
quiry terminals and the Audio Response Unit is con- 
ducted in the same manner as an ordinary telephone 
call. (4 pages) 



Al 9-001 9 IBM System/360 Model 30, 13 

1401/1440/1460 Compatibility Feature 
Inverted Print Edit and Sterling Sub-Features 

This publication is a supplement to the source manual 
entitled IBM System/360 Model 30, 1401/1440/1460 
Compatibility Feature, Form A24-3255, and should be 
read in conjunction with it. The information contained 
herein is intended primarily for users in World Trade 
sterling countries. 

This publication is limited to a description of (1) the 
use of the Comma and Decimal Point Inversion Sub- 
Feature; and (2) how sterling-currency applications can 
be processed with the Sterling Currency Sub-Feature 
without conversion of existing 1400-series programs. 

The reader is also referred to the IBM System/360 
Model 30, Functional Characteristics, Form A24-3231, 
for a description of the capabilities, functions, and oper- 
ational characteristics of the System/360 Model 30; and 
to Reference Manual, IBM 1401 Data Processing Sys- 
tem Sterling Currency Features, Form UK31401-0. 
(2 pages) 

Al 9-0023 IBM 1419 Model 32 Attached to 03 

IBM System/360 Model 30 or 40; For 
IBM World Trade Use Only 

This publication is a supplement to IBM 1219 Reader 
Sorter Model 32 — IBM 1419 Magnetic Character 
Reader Model 32, Form A19-0004, and should be read 
in conjunction with it. 

This publication is limited to certain additions to 
A19-0004. Additional operating information relating to 
Power On-Power Off, Channel Line Termination, and 
Sort Mode Selection is provided. (12 pages) 

A21-9025 IBM 1442 Nl and N2 Component 03 

Description and Operating Procedures 

This publication describes the operating principles, 
machine features, and operating procedures of the ibm 
1442 Nl Card Read Punch and the ibm 1442 N2 Card 
Punch. Also, it discusses in general the operation of 
these devices with ibm System/360. 

For further information about these machines as 
they are used with System/360, refer to IBM System/ 
360 Principles of Operation, Form A22-6821, and other 
publications listed in IBM System/360 Bibliography, 
Form A22-6822. ( 15 pages ) 

A21-9026 IBM 2501 Models Bl and B2 03 

Component Description and 
Operating Procedures 

This publication describes the operation of the ibm 
2501 Card Reader Models Bl and B2 with ibm System/ 
360 Models 30 and higher. Operating principles, sys- 
tem communication, and operating procedures are 
presented. 

This manual assumes that the reader is familiar with 
the operation of the ibm System/360, as described in 
the srl publication, IBM System/360 Principles of 
Operation, Form A22-6821. ( 16 pages) 

A21-9027 IBM 2520— Bl, B2, and B3 03 

Component Description and 
Operating Procedures 

This publication describes the ibm 2520 Card Read 
Punch Model Bl and the ibm 2520 Card Punch Models 
B2 and B3 with ibm System/ 360 Models 30 and above. 
Included are discussions of machine features and op- 
erating principles and procedures. (32 pages) 



A21-9031 IBM 1231 Nl Component 03 

Description and Operating Procedures 

This publication describes the (functions, principles of 
operation, data flow, operating procedures, and con- 
trols of the 1231 Nl Optical Mark Page Reader. The 
programming section explains 1231 Nl operation with 
System/360. Input document specifications are also 
explained. (28 pages) 



A2 1-9033 IBM System/360 Component 03 

Description and Operating Procedures 
IBM 2540 Card Read Punch 

This publication explains the operating principles, 
procedures, and controls of the ibm 2540 Card Read 
Punch. Special features for the 2540 are also discussed. 

Refer to the IBM 2821 Control Unit, Form A24- 
3312, for information concerning the commands, 
status -and sense indicators, and other prograrnming 
considerations that affect the 2540. For similar infor- 
mation about an ibm 2540 attached to an ibm System/ 
360 through the integrated 2540 attachment feature, 
refer to IBM System/360 Model 25 Functional Char- 
acteristics, Form A24-3510. 

Additional information about the operation of the 
2540 with various models of the System/360 is avail- 
able in the appropriate System/360 operator's guides 
(see the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22- 
6822, for the form numbers of the required manual). 
(16 pages) 



A2 1 -9064 IBM 1 287 Optical Reader 03 

Component Description and 
Operating Procedures 

This publication describes the ibm 1287 Optical 
Reader and its features, operating principles and pro- 
cedures, and operations with ibm System/360. The 
manual also contains detailed specifications for input 
documents and tapes and for input data quality. 

For other publications that describe ibm System/ 
360, see the srl manual IBM System/360 Bibliogra- 
phy, Form A22-6822. 

For more information about proper numeric hand- 
writing for 1287 input, see Handwriting Numbers and 
Symbols for the IBM Optical Reader, Form R29-1280, 
and the handwriting practice sheet, Form R29-1281. 

For more detailed programming information, see one 
or more of these srl manuals as appropriate: 
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, Spe- 
cifications, Assembler with Input/Output Macros 
(8K Tape), Form C24-3355. 
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, Pro- 
grammer's Guide (8K Tape), Form C24-3354. 
IBM System/360 Basic Operating System Specifica- 
tions, Assembler with I/O Macros, Form C24- 
3361. 
IBM System/360 Basic Operating System Program- 
mer's Guide, Form C24-3372. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Extended 
Supervisor and Input/Output Macros, Form C24- 
5037. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Data Man- 
agement Concepts, Form C24-3427. 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, Extended 
Supervisor and Input/Output Macros, Form C24- 
5035. 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, Data Man- 
agement Concepts, Form C24-3430. (60 pages) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 5 



A2 1 -9070 IBM 1 050 Special Features 1 3 

Description — IBM ASCII Data 

Communication System with RPQ 

Features F18589, 82027, 842028 

and 842029 
This publication serves as a reference manual for the 
IBM 1050 Ascn Data Communication System, which 
provides the ibm System/360 Data Processing System 
with remote input and output capabilities using the 
American Standard Code for Information Interchange. 
Detailed information about the dm System/360 and 
the appropriate transmission control unit will be found 
in their respective sbl publications. Site preparation 
information in the publication, IBM 1050 Data Com- 
munication System Installation Manual, Physical Plan- 
ning, Form A24-3022 applies for this system. For titles 
and abstracts of associated publications, see the IBM 
Teleprocessing Bibliography, Form A24-3089 and the 
IBM System/ 360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (52 
pages) 



A21-9081 IBM 1288 Optical Page Reader 03 

Model 1 — Component Description 

This publication describes the ibm 1288 Optical Page 
Reader and its features, operating principles, and op- 
erations with the bbm System/ 360. Detailed informa- 
tion and specifications for input documents and print 
quality are also included. 

For publications describing the ibm System/ 360, 
see the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22- 
6822. See Handwriting Numbers and Symbols for the 
IBM Optical Reader, Form R29-1280, and the hand- 
writing practice sheet, Form R29-1281, for proper 
handwriting for 1288 input. (44 pages) 



A22-6810 IBM System/360 System Summary 00 

This publication provides basic information about the 
ibm System/360, with the objective of helping readers 
to achieve a general understanding of this new data 
processing system and the interrelationships of .its 
models and parts. Broad system concepts, basic and 
optional features, and specific input/output devices are 
briefly discussed. 

It is assumed that the reader has a basic knowledge 
of data processing systems as in Introduction to IBM 
Data Processing Systems, Form C20-1684. 

This publication does not apply to System/360 
Model 20. All Model 20 publications are listed in the 
IBM System/360 Model 20 Bibliography, Form A26- 
3565. 

Detailed information on processing is in IBM 
System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22-6821*. 
Description of programming systems and languages, 
as well as further details on the i/o devices and tele- 
processing capabilities described herein, are in publi- 
cations listed in the IBM System/360 Bibliography, 
Form A22-6822 and IBM Teleprocessing Bibliography, 
Form A24-3089. (120 pages) 



A22-681 3 IBM System/360 Model 40 00 

Configurator 

A schematic drawing shows the complete Model 40 
processor with all standard and optional features. In- 
put/output devices are shown on Form A22-6823 and 
data communications devices on Form A22-6824. (1 
page) 



A22-6814 IBM System/360 Model 50 00 

Configurator 

A schematic drawing shows the complete Model 50 
processor with all standard and optional features. In- 
put/output devices are shown on Form A22-6823 and 
data communications devices on Form A22-6824. (1 
page) 



A22-682 1 IBM System/360 Principles of 01 

Operation 

This publication is the machine reference manual for 
the ibm System/360. It provides a direct, comprehen- 
sive description of the system structure; of the arith- 
metic, logical, branching, status switching, and in- 
put/output operations; and of the interruption system. 

The reader is assumed to have a basic knowledge of 
data processing systems and to have read the IBM 
System/360 System Summary, Form A22-6810, which 
describes the system briefly and discusses the input/ 
output devices available. 

For information about the characteristics, functions, 
and features of a specific System/360 model, use the 
functional characteristics manual for that model in 
conjunction with the IBM System/360 Principles of 
Operation. Descriptions of specific input/output de- 
vices used with the System/360 appear in separate 
publications. Publications that relate to the ibm Sys- 
tem/360 Model 20 are described in the IBM Sys- 
tem/360 Model 20 Bibliography, Form A26-3565. 
(172 pages) 



A22-6823 IBM System/360 Input/Output 00 

Configurator 

This configurator deals with the input/output equip- 
ment available for the ibm System/360 Models 25-91. 

The presentation is arranged in two ways: by type 
of equipment (such as "direct access," "display," and 
"printers") and by machine number (such as 1052, 
1403, and 7770). For each item of equipment, infor- 
mation is given concerning the way in which the item 
attaches to the system and the number of items that 
can be attached. 

Available System Reference Library (sbx) publica- 
tions about individual items of i/o equipment are 
listed and described in the IBM System/360 Bibliog- 
raphy, Form A22-6822. ( 6 pages ) 



A22-6824 IBM System/360 Data 00 

Communications and 
Acquisition Configurator 

This configurator presents the various possible config- 
urations for the ibm 2701 Data Adapter Unit and the 
ibm 2702 Transmission Control. Examples are given of 
the adapters and machine features needed for specific 
configurations. 
Included are the following configurations: 

Page 
Configurator for 2701 Low Speed Communication 

Lines 3 

Configurator for 2701 Synchronous Communica- 
tion Lines 5 

Configurator for Combinations of 2701 Low Speed 

and Synchronous Communication Lines 7 

Configurator for 2701 Data Acquisition 

Configurator for Combinations of 2701 Data Ac- 
quisition and Communication Lines 11 

Configurator for the ibm 2702 13 

Configurator for a 2701/ 1030 System 15 

Configurator for a 2702/1030 System 17 

(19 pages) 



A22-6828 IBM 7340 Hypertape Drive 05 

Model 3 with IBM System/360 

This publication describes the functions, operations, 
controls, and timings of the ibm 7340 Hypertape Drive 
Model 3, including the dynamics of 7340 reading and 
writing and details on the tape, tape cartridge, and 
optional automatic cartridge loader. In addition, all 
necessary details on the function and operation of the 
ibm 2802 Hypertape Control are presented. 

This manual provides information for customer sys- 
tems personnel and is designed as a reference and 
guide in the training of operators, system engineers, 
programmers, managers, and others who need a gen- 
eral idea of how Hypertape operates within the 
System/360. It is an i/o adjunct to IBM System/360 
Principles of Operation, Form A22-6821. (28 pages) 



A22-6843 IBM System/360 I/O Interface- 19 

Channel to Control Unit — Original 
Equipment Manufacturers' Information 

This Original Equipment Manufacturers' Information 
( oemi) manual provides the definitions and functional 
descriptions of the interface lines for the ibm i/o 
Interface-Channel to Control Unit. In addition, it con- 
tains electrical, mechanical, and cabling considerations 
and specifications of this interface. ( 60 pages) 



A22-6844 IBM 2701 Data Adapter Unit 19 

Original Equipment Manufacturers' 
Information 

This publication describes the ibm 2701 Data Adapter 
Unit interfaces. The processor interface description in- 
cludes a description of the operating signals and re- 
sponses. The transmission-adapter interface descrip- 
tions provide device-attachment information. The 
electrical, mechanical, and cabling specifications of 
these interfaces are provided, together with physical- 
planning requirements. ( 144 pages ) 



A22-6845 IBM System/360 Direct Control 19 

and External Interrupt Features — Original 
Equipment Manufacturers' Information 

This manual describes the specifications, timings, cir- 
cuits and characteristics of the ibm System/360 Direct 
Control and External Interrupt features. The External 
Interrupt feature provides the means by which exter- 
nal devices may signal the cpu to gain its attention. 
The Direct Control feature includes the External Inter- 
rupt and provides an interface, exclusive of the chan- 
nel, for the exchange of information between two cen- 
tral processing units, or between a central processing 
unit and external devices. (24 pages) 



A22-6846 IBM System/360 Component 09 

Description — IBM 2702 Transmission Control 

This publication provides information concerning the 
operation of the ibm 2702 Transmission Control. 

The first section contains a general description of 
the 2702, including the data communication terminals 
operable with the 2702, the terminal controls used by 
the 2702 to operate with the various terminals, and the 
data sets and communication facilities used. 

The Operational Functions section discusses com- 
munication line addressing, 2702-multiplexor channel 
operation, and i/o instructions concerning the 2702. 
This section also contains the various commands and 
orders used by the 2702 and the transmit and receive 
operation sequences and, in addition, describes the 
functions of the status and sense bytes and the polling 
and addressing of the terminals. (32 pages) 



6 



A22-6861 IBM 7340 Model 3 Hypertape 1 9 

Drive — Original Equipment 
Manufacturers' Information 

The informatibn in this manual is provided to assist 
designers of accessory equipment for ibm 7340 Model 
3 Hypertape Drives. It includes all specifications, tim- 
ing information, circuit descriptions, and cable infor- 
mation necessary for attaching a 7340-3 to a control 
unit. Additional details about the operation and main- 
tenance of the 7340-3 may be obtained from the Cus- 
tomer Engineer's Manual of Instruction, the ce Refer- 
ence Manual and the ce Maintenance Diagram 
Manual. (31 pages) 

A22-6862 IBM 2400-Series Magnetic Tape 19 

Units — Original Equipment 
Manufacturers' Information 

This manual will assist designers of accessory equip- 
ment for ibm 2401, 2402 Models 1-6 Magnetic Tape 
Units, ibm 2403 Models 1-6 and 2404 Models 1-3 Mag- 
netic Tape Units and Controls and ibm 2803/2804 
Models 1 and 2 Tape Control Units. 

Additional information about the operation and use 
of these tape units in integrated data processing sys- 
tems can be obtained from the IBM 2400 Magnetic 
Tape Units and 2816 Switching Unit Component De- 
scription, Form A22-6866, and from the local ibm Sales 
Office. Information concerning i/o operations is in 
IBM System/360 Channel to Control Unit OEMl, 
Form A22-6843. (46 pages) 

A22-6864 IBM 2701 Data Adapter Unit 09 

Principles of Operation 

This manual provides information concerning the oper- 
ation of the ibm 2701 Data Adapter Unit. The manual 
is divided into three sections. 

The first section gives a general description of the 
2701, including: the terminals operating with the 2701, 
the functional organization of the 2701, the special 
features on the 2701, and various configurations of the 
2701. 

The second section describes the operation of the 
2701 with the System/ 360. Subjects discussed here in- 
clude communication line addressing, multiplexor and 
selector channel operation, and i/o instructions con- 
cerning the 2701. 

The third section covers the 2701's transmission 
adapters. A complete description on the operation of 
each adapter is made here. This description includes 
transmit and receive operation sequences, status and 
sense bytes, and the polling and addressing of the 
terminals. (48 pages) 

A22-6866 IBM System/360 Component 05 

Description — 2400-Series Magnetic Tape 
Units and 2816 Switching Unit 

This manual contains a comprehensive presentation of 
the characteristics, functions, and features of the ibm 
2400-Series Magnetic Tape Units and Controls, and a 
general description of the ibm 2816 Model 1 Switching 
Unit. The 2400-series consists of the 2401 and 2402 
Magnetic Tape Units; the 2403, 2404, and 2415 Mag- 
netic Tape Units and Controls; and the 2803 and 2804 
Tape Control Units. 

In most instances, operational descriptions are 
limited to the channel and command level. Operating 
functions and procedures common and fundamental to 
all i/o operations are described in IBM System/360 
Principles of Operation, Form A22-6821. 

Subjects covered include magnetic tape unit prin- 
ciples; keys and lights; tape load, unload, and clean- 
ing procedures; status and sense information; magnetic 
tape handling; tape block and reel organization; and 
error recovery procedures. (56 pages) 



A22-6868 IBM System/360 Component 03 

Description — IBM 1827 Data Control Unit 

This publication contains the functional characteristics 
and operating information for the ibm 1827 Data Con- 
trol Unit. Operations with the ibm System/360 Models 
30, 40, 44, and 50 are described. The following ibm 
1800 Data Acquisition and Control System Process i/o 
features are described: Digital Input, Digital Output, 
Analog Output, Analog Input, and Comparator. (40 
pages) 



A22-6869 IBM 2361 Core Storage— OEMl 19 

The information in this manual is provided to assist de- 
signers of accessory equipment for ibm 2361 Core Stor- 
age Model 1 and Model 2. It includes all specifications, 
timing information, circuit descriptions, and cable in- 
formation necessary for attaching a 2361 to a system. 
Additional details about the operation and mainte- 
nance of the 2361 may be obtained from the local ibm 
Branch Office. (22 pages) 



A22-6872- 1827 Data Control Unit 00 

Configurator 

A schematic drawing shows the attachment of ibm 
1800 components to an ibm System/360. (1 folded 
page) 



A22-6874 IBM System/360 Model 44 00 

Configurator 

A schematic drawing shows the complete Model 44 
processor with all standard and optional features. 
Input/output devices are shown on Form A22-6823, 
and Data Communications devices on Form A22-6824. 
(lpage) 



A22-6875 IBM System/360 Model 44 01 

Functional Characteristics 

This manual describes the system structure, features, 
instruction timings and formulas, channels, device ad- 
dressing, and operator controls unique to System/360 
Model 44. 

It is assumed the reader has a knowledge of the 
System/360 as defined in the IBM System/ 360 Prin- 
ciples of Operation, Form A22-6821 and the IBM Sys- 
tem/360 System Summary, Form A22-6810. 

For installations using the direct word, direct data 
channel, or priority interrupt features, a companion 
publication is Data Acquisition Special Features for 
the IBM System/360 Model 44, Form A22-6900. Other 
related literature is described in IBM System/360 Bib- 
liography, Form A22-6822. (56 pages) 



A22-6877 IBM System/360 Component 03 

Descriptions and Operating Procedures 
IBM 1052 Printer-Keyboard Model 7 
with IBM 2150 Console 

This publication describes the functional and opera- 
tional characteristics of the ibm 1052 Printer-Keyboard 
Model 7 with the ibm 2150 Console. (20 pages) 



A22-6881 IBM System/360 Model 40 01 

Functional Characteristics 

This manual presents the organization, characteristics, 
functions and features unique to the ibm System/360 
Model 40. Major areas described are system structure, 
generalized information flow, standard and optional 
features, system control panel, instruction timings, and 
channel characteristics and functional evaluation. 



Descriptions of specific input/output devices used 
with the ibm System/360 Model 40 appear in separate 
publications. Configurators for the ibm 2040 Processing 
Unit and i/o devices are available. 

It is assumed that the reader has a knowledge of the 
System/360 as defined in the IBM System/360 Prin- 
ciples of Operation, Form A22-6821 and the IBM 
System/360 System Summary, Form A22-6810. (112 




A22-6884 IBM System/360 Model 65 01 

Functional Characteristics 

This manual presents the organization, characteristics, 
functions and features unique to the ibm System/360 
Model 65. Major areas described are system structure, 
generalized information flow, standard and optional 
features, instruction timings, and the system control 
panel. (29 pages) 



A22-6887 System/360 Model 65 00 

Configurator 

A schematic drawing shows the complete Model 65 
processor with all standard and optional features. 
Input/output devices are shown in Form A22-6823, 
and Data Communications devices on Form A22-6824. 
(lpage) 



A22-6888 IBM System/360 Model 75 00 

Configurator 

A schematic drawing shows the complete Model 75 
processor with all standard and optional features. 
Input/output devices are shown on Form A22-6823 and 
Data Communications devices on Form A22-6824. (2 
pages) 



A22-6889 IBM System/360 Model 75 01 

Functional Characteristics 

This manual presents the organization, characteristics, 
functions and features unique to the ibm System/360 
Model 75. Major areas described are: system structure, 
generalized information flow, standard and optional 
features, instruction timings, and the system control 
panel. 

Descriptions of specific input/output devices used 
with the ibm System/360 Model 75 appear in separate 
publications. 

This manual assumes that the reader has a knowl- 
edge of System/360 as defined in the IBM System/360 
Principles of Operation, Form A22-6821 and the IBM 
System/360 System Summary, Form A22-6810. (36 
pages) 



A22-6892 IBM System/360 Special Feature 13 

Channel-to-Channel Adapter 

This manual describes the functions and operating 
characteristics of the channel-to-channel adapter in 
either multiple-processor or single-processor systems. 

ibm System/360 input/output operations that are 
exclusive of device considerations are described in 
detail in the IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, 
Form A22-6821. ( 16 pages ) 



IBM System/360 Bibliography 7 



A22-6895 IBM System/360 Component 07 

Descriptions — 2301 Drum Storage and 
2820 Storage Control 

This manual describes the operating characteristics of 
the ibm 2301 Drum Storage and the ibm 2820 Storage 
Control and discusses in detail the input/ output opera- 
tions performed by those units. 

Input/ output operations in the ibm System/360 that 
are exclusive of device considerations are described in 
detail in the IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, 
Form A22-6821. (20 pages) 



A22-6898 IBM System/360 Model 50 01 

Functional Characteristics 

This manual presents the organization, characteristics, 
functions and features unique to the ibm System/360 
Model 50. Major areas described are system structure, 
generalized information flow, standard and optional 
features, system control panel, instruction timings, 
channel characteristics, concurrent input/output capa- 
bilities, selector channel loading, multiplexer channel 
loading, and channel interference with the cpu. 

Descriptions of specific input/ output devices used 
with the ibm System/360 Model 50 appear in separate 
publications. 

Configurators for the ibm 2050 Processing Unit and 
i/o devices are available. See IBM System/360 Bibli- 
ography, Form A22-6822. 

It is assumed that the reader has a knowledge of the 
System/360 as defined in the IBM System/360 Prin- 
ciples of Operation, Form A22-6821 and the IBM Sys- 
tem Summary, Form A22-6810. (96 pages) 



A22-6900 Data Acquisition Special Features 13 

for the IBM System/360 Model 44 
This publication provides information about the opera- 
tion, control, and interface of three special features: 

Direct Word 

Direct Data Channel 

Priority Interrupt 
These features are particularly suitable for high- 
speed data acquisition and relatively complex control 
applications in the scientific fields. 

Additional information can be found in IBM Sys- 
tem/360 Model 44 Functional Characteristics, Form 
A22-6875, and IBM System/360 Principles of Opera- 
tion, Form A22-6821. (26 pages) 



A22-6906 IBM System/360 Power Control 19 

Interface — Original Equipment 
Manufacturers' Information 

This Original Equipment Manufacturers' Information 
(oemi) manual provides the definitions and descriptions 
of the power control interface lines. In addition, the 
manual contains the emergency power off operations 
and procedures. (10 pages) 



A22-6907 IBM System/360 Model 91 01 

Functional Characteristics 
This publication describes the organization and the 
functional characteristics of the ibm System/360 Model 
91, an information-processing system designed for 
ultrahigh-speed, large-scale scientific and business ap- 
plications. 

The system components are described, and a de- 
tailed consideration is given to the functions of proc- 
essor storage, the central processing unit, the input/ 



output channels, and the operator-control and opera- 
tor-intervention portions of the system control panel. 
In addition, certain coding and timing considerations 
are discussed. 

The reader is assumed to have a knowledge of infor- 
mation-processing systems and to have read the IBM 
System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22-6821. 
(33 pages) 



A22-6908 IBM System/360 Model 50 01 

Operating Procedures 

This manual describes operator procedures for an ibm 
2050 Processing Unit, operating with or without an 
associated ibm 1052 Printer-Keyboard. The manual 
describes machine functions, machine procedures, 
program-oriented procedures, and operator-interven- 
tion procedures. In addition, an appendix of reference 
material and an index are included. 

The reader is assumed to have a knowledge of the 
following srl publications: 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form 

A22-6821 
IBM System/360 Model 50 Functional Character- 
istics, Form A22-6898 
IBM System/ 360 Basic Programming Support Oper- 
ating Guide for Basic Assembler and Utilities, 
Form C28-6557 
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support Oper- 
ating Guide, Form C24-3391 
IBM System/360 Basic Operating System Operating 

Guide, Form C24-3450 
IBM System/360 Operating System Operator's 

Guide, Form C28-6540 
For information pertaining to the operation of units 
attachable to the System/360 Model 50, refer to the 
appropriate srl publication, sbjl publications that per- 
tain to ibm System/ 360 and attachable units are ab- 
stracted and referenced by form number in IBM 
System/ 360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (56 pages) 



A22-6909 IBM System/360 Model 75 01 

Operating Procedures 

This manual describes operator procedures for an ibm 
2075 Processing Unit, operating with or without an 
associated ibm 1052 Printer-Keyboard. The manual 
describes system control panel machine functions, ma- 
chine procedures, program-oriented procedures, and 
operator-intervention procedures. An appendix of ref- 
erence material and an index are included. 

The reader is assumed to have a knowledge of the 
following srl publications: 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form 
A22-6821 (sections on "System Structure" and 
"System Control Panel") 
IBM System/360 Model 75 Functional Character- 
istics, Form A22-6889 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System Operating 

Guide, Form C24-5021 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System Operating 

Guide, Form C24-5022 
IBM System/360 Operating System Operators 

Guide, Form C28-6540 
For information pertaining to the operation of i/o 
units that are attachable to the System/360 Model 75, 
refer to the appropriate srl publication. All System/ 
360 srl publications that pertain to ibm System/360 
and attachable units are abstracted and referenced by 
form number in IBM System/ 360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. (39 pages) 



A22-6910 IBM System/360 Model 44 01 

Operating Procedures 

This manual describes operator procedures for an ibm 
2044 Processing Unit, operating with its associated 
Console Printer-Keyboard. The manual has sections 
devoted to system control panel machine functions, 
machine procedures, program-oriented procedures, 
operator-intervention procedures, and command ex- 
amples, plus an appendix of reference material, and a 
complete index. 

The reader should also refer to the following srl 
publications: 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form 
A22-6821 (sections on System Structure and Sys- 
tem Control Panel) 
IBM System/360 Model 44 Functional Character- 
istics, Form A22-6875 
IBM System/ 360 Model 44 Programming System, 

Guide to System Use, Form C28-6812 
IBM System/360 Model 44 Programming System 

Operators Guide, Form C28-6815 
For information pertaining to the special features 
for this model, refer to Data Acquisition Special Fea- 
tures for the IBM System/360 Model 44, Form A22- 
6900. For information pertaining to operation of the 
i/o units attachable to System/360 Model 44, refer to 
the appropriate srl publication. All System/360 srl 
publications are abstracted and listed by form number 
in IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. 
(68 pages) 



A22-691 1 IBM System/360 Model 40 01 

Operating Procedures 

This manual describes operator procedures for an ibm 
2040 Processing Unit, operating with, or without an 
associated ibm 1052 Printer-Keyboard. The manual 
has sections devoted to system control panel functions, 
system procedures, program-oriented procedures, oper- 
ator-intervention procedures, and command examples, 
plus an appendix of reference material, and a complete 
index. 

The reader is assumed to have a knowledge of the 
following srl publications: 

IBM System/ 360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 
6821 (sections on "System Structure" and "System 
Control Panel") 

IBM System/ 360 Model 40 Functional Character- 
istics, Form A22-6881 

IBM System/360 Tape Operating System Operating 
Guide, Form C24-5021 

IBM System/360 Disk Operating System Operating 
Guide, Form C24-5022 

IBM System/360 Operating System Operator's 
Guide, FormC28-6540 
(Of the three operating system publications listed 
above, at least one applicable to the system in use 
should be read by the operator.) 

For information pertaining to operation of the i/o 
units that are attachable to the System/360 Model 40, 
refer to the appropriate srl publication. All System/ 
360 srl publications, are abstracted and listed by form 
number in IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22- 
6822. (84 pages) 



A22-6916 IBM System/360 Model 85 01 

Functional Characteristics 

This publication describes the organization and the 
functional characteristics of the ibm System/360 Model 
85, an information-processihg system designed for 
very high-speed, large-scale scientific and business 
applications. 



8 



The system components are described, and a de- 
tailed consideration is given to the functions of proces- 
sor storage, the central processing unit, the input/ 
output channels, and the operator-control and oper- 
ator-intervention portions of the system control panel. 
In addition, certain coding and timing considerations 
are described. 

The reader is assumed to have a knowledge of in- 
formation-processing systems and to have read the 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 
6821. OuVr related literature is referenced by form 
number and briefly described in IBM System/360 
Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (40 pages) 



A22-6918 Component Description Bulletin 05 

IBM 2420 Model 7 Magnetic Tape Unit 

This bulletin describes the characteristics, functions, 
and features of the ibm Model 7 Magnetic Tape Unit. 
This bulletin will be incorporated in the IBM System/ 
360 Component Description, 2400-Series Magnetic 
Tape Units and 2816 Switching Unit, Form A22-6866. 
(8 pages) 



A22-6920 IBM System/360 Model 85 00 

Configurator 

A schematic drawing showing the complete Model 85 
processor with all standard and optional features. In- 
put/output control units and devices are shown on the 
IBM System/360 I/O Configurator, Form A22-6823. 
(2 pages) 



A24-1421 1412 Magnetic Character 03 

Reader Model 1 

Describes the features and functions of the ibm 1412 
Magnetic Character Reader Model 1. Explains in detail 
its operating principles, including document feeding, 
reading, and distribution, as well as control of both 
on-line and off-line operations. A section on operating 
procedures is included. 

Programming notes and an explanation of 1401 
stored program instructions used to control 1412 oper- 
ations are presented. 

Explains the use and operation of four special 
features: Multiple Columns Select — Sort Suppress 
Feature, Auxiliary Document Counter, Self-Checking 
Number Verification, and Electronic-Accumulator and 
Sequence-Checking Feature. (56 pages) 



A24-1431 IBM 1403 Printer— OEMI 19 

This manual contains information that will assist non- 
ibm engineers to attach the ibm 1403 Printer to their 
equipment. It includes a general description of ma- 
chine functions and a reference listing of publica-- 
tions and engineering documents. It also contains in- 
formation concerning machine interface not readily 
available in other publications. Charts of signal con- 
nectors and power plug pin assignments are included. 
(16 pages) 



A24-1446 IBM 1404 Printer 03 

The ibm 1404 Printer, an output unit for the ibm 1401 
Data Processing System and the ibm System/360, 
Models 30, 40, and 50, is capable of printing either 
cut-card forms or continuous forms. This reference 
publication presents the functional and operational 
characteristics of the 1404, including the settings of 
the feed mechanism and the print unit. It also describes 
the read-compare special feature. Information" on tim- 
ing and on certain normal operating procedures is 
presented. (24 pages) 



A24-1452 Print Quality Considerations 03 

IBM 1418 and IBM 1428 

This publication contains a detailed description of the 
print quality requirements of printing to be read by 
the ibm 1418 Optical Character Reader and the ibm 
1428 Alphameric Optical Reader and to be used as 
input to an ibM 1401 Data Processing System, ibm 
1460 Data Processing System, and ibm System/360 
Model 30. The use of print-quality measuring devices 
is fully explained with examples of the range of ac- 
ceptable printing produced by the ibm 407 Accounting 
Machine, ibm 1403 Printer, ibm Selectric® Typewritei 
and ibm Electric Typewriter. 

Refer to IBM 1401/1460 Bibliography, Form 
A24-1495, for other publications. (44 pages ) 



A24-1473 IBM 1418 Optical Character 03 

Reader — IBM 1428 Alphameric 
Optical Reader 

This publication describes the operation of the ibm 
1418 Optical Character Reader and the ibm 1428 
Alphameric Optical Reader used as input devices to an 
ibm 1401 Data Processing System. 

Included are a description of character and mark- 
reading capabilities, off-line sorting, document-design 
requirements, and examples of the range of acceptable 
print quality of the documents to be scanned by both 
machines. The use of the ibm 1418/1428 Document 
Design and pds Timing Chart and the formulas for 
calculating document output and maximum character 
reading per document are also fully discussed as an 
aid in optimizing the design of documents to be read 
by both machines. (44 pages) 



A24-1499 IBM 1219 Reader Sorter, 03 

IBM 1419 Magnetic Character Reader 

This publication describes the operating characteris- 
tics, controls, indicators, and features of the ibm 1219 
Reader Sorter and the ibm 1419 Magnetic Character 
Reader. Operating theory and procedures are given for 
off-line operation of both machines and on-line opera- 
tion of the ibm 1419 within the 1400 series and System/ 
360 systems. 

Document handling and data flow are discussed 
fully, and step-by-step procedures and practical exam- 
ples are given for each machine. Programming notes 
and error recovery procedures are also given. 

For additional publication information, refer to the 
Bibliography for the system to which the ibm 1419 is 
attached. (96 pages) 



A24-3073 IBM 1403 Printer Component 03 

Description 

This reference publication describes the various models 
of the ibm 1403 Printer used with ibm 1401, 1410, 1440, 
1460, 7010, 7040, 7044, and System/360 Models 20, 25, 
30, 40, 50, 65, and 75 Data Processing Systems. 

The functional and operating characteristics of the 
printer are presented. 

The special features available for the 1403 are in- 
cluded, and timing information is given for printing and 
paper movement. (56 pages) 



A24-3081 Mark Read Station (Slanted Mark) 13 

for IBM 1418 and IBM 1428 

This publication describes the Mark Read Station 
(Slanted Mark) special feature. This feature is avail- 
able for the ibm 1418 Optical Character Reader Mod- 
els 1 and 2; and for the ibm 1428 Alphameric Optical 
Reader Models 1 and 2. A description of these func- 
tional specifications is included: 



Document Specifications 
Mark Reading 
Document Format 
Document Corner Cuts 
Document Feeding 
The Slanted Mark Reading Gage is also fully de- 
scribed. 

This publication is for those familiar with program- 
ming and operating the ibm 1418 and 1428 Models 1 
and 2, as described in these Systems Reference Library 
publications: 
Programming for the IBM 1418 and IBM 1428 Opti- 
cal Readers, Form C24-1091 
IBM 1418 Optical Character Reader and IBM 1428 
Alphameric Optical Reader, Form A24-1473. 

(16 pages) 



A24-3089 IBM SRL Bibliography 00 

Supplement — Teleprocessing 

This bibliography lists the available reference litera- 
ture for installing, programming, and operating ibm 
teleprocessing equipment, used independently or with 
several data processing systems. For publications on 
data communications equipment and programs associ- 
ated with a single data processing system, see the bibli- 
ography for that system. 

Part 1 lists publications by major subjects. This se- 
quence (subject code) may be used in building a 
library. 

Part 2 is a cross-index of tele-processing equipment 
with the associated data processing system. 

Part 3 contains abstracts of tele-processing publica- 
tions in form-number sequence. Copies of most form- 
numbered publications may be ordered through the 
local ibm Sales Representative. (20 pages) 



A24-3120 IBM 1443 Printer Models 1 to 4 03 

and Nl— IBM 1445 Printer Models 1 
and Nl 

This reference publication describes the operation of 
the ibm 1443 and 1445 Printers with the ibm 1240, 1401, 
1440, 1450, 1460, 1800, and certain models of the ibm 
System/360 Data Processing System. 

It also discusses timing information for the printer 
and the tape-controlled carriage as well as their func- 
tional and operating characteristics. The speed of the 
printer using the various character sets is also de- 
scribed. 

Included is command, status, and sense information 
pertaining to the printers used with ibm System/360 
Data Processing Systems. 

For a list of other publications and abstracts, see the 
ibm bibliography for the associated data processing 
system. (32 pages) 

A24-3231 IBM System/360 Model 30 01 

Functional Characteristics 

This reference publication describes the relationship 
of the ibm System/360 Model 30 to the entire System/ 
360. The system's capabilities, features, i/o channels, 
and operations are also discussed. 

The reader can find a more detailed description of 
the System/360 operations in IBM System/360 Prin- 
ciples of Operation, Form A22-6821. The interrelation- 
ships of the models and units available with System/ 
360 are broadly described in IBM/360 System Sum- 
mary, Form A22-6810. Other related literature is listed 
by form number and briefly described in IBM System/ 
360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. 

Information on channel load limits for ibm System/ 
360 Model 30 is given in IBM System/360 Model 30 
Channel Characteristics and Functional Evaluation, 
Form A24-3411. (72 pages) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 9 



A24-3232 IBM System/360 Model 30 00 

Configurator 

A schematic drawing shows the complete Model 30 
processor with all standard and optional features. In- 
put/output devices are shown on Form A22-6823 and 
data communications devices on Form A22-6824. (1 
page) 



A24-3255 IBM System/360 Model 30 13 

1401/1440/1460 Compatibility Feature 

This publication describes the 1401/1440/1460 Basic 
Compatibility feature and associated subfeatures for 
the System/360 Model 30. These special features en- 
able a rapid and simplified transfer from 1401-, 1440-, 
or 1460-oriented applications to the ibm System/ 360 
Model 30. 

Refer to the IBM System/360 Model 30 Functional 
Characteristics, Form A24-3231, for description of the 
capabilities, functions, and operational characteristics 
of the System/360 Model 30. 

The IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822, 
lists the associated reference publications. (124 pages) 



A24-3256 IBM 1285 Optical Reader 03 

Component Description and Operating 
Procedures 

This publication describes the ibm 1285 Optical 
Reader. The major topics include operating principles, 
controls and operating procedures, programming for 
the ibm System/ 360, and input tape and printing speci- 
fications. For more information about the operation of 
the 1285 with a particular system, see the appropriate 
sbx bibliography: 
IBM System/ 360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. 
IBM 1401/1460 Data Processing Systems Bibliogra- 
phy, Form A24-1495. 
IBM 1440 Data Processing System Bibliography, 
Form A24-3005. 

(36 pages) 



A24-3356 IBM 1404 Printer Model 2— OEMI 19 

This reference manual contains information that will 
assist non-IBM engineers to attach their equipment to 
the ibm 1404 Printer Model 2. It contains a general 
description of machine functions, a reference listing of 
publications and engineering documents, and informa- 
tion concerning machine interface not readily available 
in other publications. For titles and abstracts of asso- 
ciated publications, see the IBM 1401 and 1460 Bibli- 
ography, Form A24-1495. (20 pages) 



A24-3365 IBM System/360 Model 30 13 

1620 Compatibility Feature 

This publication describes the ibm 1620 Compatibility 
Feature for the ibm System/360 Model 30. This spe- 
cial feature provides a means of rapid and simplified 
transfer of 1620-oriented applications to the ibm Sys- 
tem/360 Model 30. 

Refer to IBM System/360 Model 30 Functional 
Characteristics, Form A24-3231, for a description of 
the capabilities, functions, and operating characteris- 
tics of the System/ 360 Model 30. 

The IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822, 
lists associated reference publications. (76 pages) 



A24-3373 IBM System/360 Model 30 01 

Operator's Guide 

This reference publication describes operator pro- 
cedures for the ibm 2030 Processing Unit and for the 
ibm 1050 Documentary Console (attached to the ibm 
System/360 Model 30). For additional information 
pertaining to operation of the i/o units attachable to 
System/360 Model 30, refer to the appropriate Systems 
Reference Library publication. Systems Reference Li- 
brary publications that pertain to ibm System/360 and 
attachable i/o units are abstracted and referenced by 
form number in IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. (39 pages) 



Calculations for a System/360 Model 30 with a 
1.5-microsecond Read/Write (bw) cycle and with a 
2-microsecond bw cycle are discussed separately. 

The user of this publication should be thoroughly 
familiar with i/o programming considerations as de- 
scribed in ibm System/360 Principles of Operation, 
Form A22-6821. Information related to specific i/o 
devices is contained in separate , Systems Reference 
Library publications. These publications are listed by 
form number and briefly described in ibm System/360 
Bibliography, Form A22-6822. 

When you are performing loading calculations re- 
lated to the multiplexor channel operating in multiplex 
mode, use the ibm System/360 Model 30 Multiplexor 
Channel Worksheet, Form X24-3407. K the ibm 2702 
Communications Control is used in your configuration, 
use the ibm System/360 Model 30 2702 Worksheet, 
Form X24-3406. (75 pages) 



A24-3423 2740 Communications Terminal, 15 

Physical Planning 

This publication contains physical planning informa- 
tion for the ibm 2740 Communications Terminal. In- 
cluded are physical specifications and electrical and 
environmental requirements. 

Cabling requirements are specified and are included 
in the diagram showing communication facilities that 
can be used. ( 2 pages ) 



A24-3424 IBM 2741 Communications 15 

Terminal Physical Planning 

This publication contains physical planning informa- 
tion for the ibm 2741 Communications Terminal. In- 
cluded are physical specifications and electrical and 
environmental requirements. Cabling requirements are 
specified and include a diagram showing communica- 
tions facilities that can be used. ( 2 pages ) 



A24-3312 IBM 2821 Control Unit 03 

This reference publication presents a description of 
input/ output operations controlled through the ibm 
2821 Control Unit. The ibm 2540 Card Read-Punch 
and the ibm 1403 and 1404 Printers controlled by the 
mj 2821 Control Unit are briefly described. Com- 
mands, status, and sense information pertaining to the 
attached input/ output units is presented. Programming 
timing considerations for control unit, card reader, 
card punch, and printers are also presented. 

For further information about the attached input/ 
output units, refer to IBM 2540 Card Read-Punch, 
Form A21-9033, IBM 1403 Printer, Form A24-3073, 
and IBM 1404 Printer, Form A24-1446. For further in- 
formation about input/ output and channel operations, 
refer to IBM System/ 360 Principles of Operation, 
Form A22-6821. Other related literature is listed in 
IBM System/ 360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (76 
pages) 



A24-3342 Batch Numbering Feature for 13 

IBM 1241 and 1419 Magnetic Ink 
Character Recognition Readers 

This publication describes the functions and features 
of the Batch Numbering special feature when used 
with the ibm 1241 Magnetic Ink Character Recognition 
Reader and the ibm 1419 Magnetic Character Reader. 
The operation of the keys, lights, and switches, as 
well as the programming information needed to oper- 
ate the feature, is covered in detail. (14 pages) 



A24-3388 IBM 2671 Paper Tape Reader 03 

IBM 2822 Paper Tape Reader Control 

This reference publication describes the operation of 
the ibm 2671 Paper Tape Reader and the ibm 2822 
Paper Tape Reader Control when used as input to the 
ibm System/360 Models 30, 40, 44, 50 and 67. The 
System/360 channel commands necessary to control the 
operation of the 2671 Paper Tape Reader are fully 
described. 

Console controls, tape specifications, tape splicing 
procedures, tape loading procedures, and special fea- 
tures available for the 2671 are also described. 

Titles and abstracts of associated publications are 
listed in the ibm System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. (42 pages) 



A24-341 1 IBM System/360 Model 30 01 

Channel Characteristics and 
Functional Evaluation 

This reference publication describes methods used to 
calculate System/360 Model 30 data handling capabili- 
ties that are dependent upon i/o-channel configura- 
tions and operations. Consideration of methods are 
also presented for: 

1. Priority attachment of i/o units for maximum 
throughput, 

2. Addressing i/o units, 

3. Calculating buffer transfer times, 

4. Calculating interference (with the processing 
unit) caused by channel operations. 



A24-3425 IBM 271 2 Remote Multiplexor 1 5 

Physical Planning 

This publication contains physical planning informa- 
tion for the ibm 2712 Remote Multiplexor. Included 
are physical specifications, electrical and environmen- 
tal requirements, and cabling requirements. Communi- 
cation facilities and terminals that can be used with 
the 2712 Models 1 and 2 are also specified. (1 sheet) 



A24-3426 IBM 271 2 Remote Multiplexor 09 

This reference publication describes the ibm 2712 Re- 
mote Multiplexor and its operation. The 2712 is used 
with ibm 1050, 1060, 2740, and 2741 Terminals (134.49 
baud) and with telegraph terminals (74.2 baud) con- 
nected to ibm System/360 through the ibm 2702 and 
2703 Transmission Control Units. Communication fa- 
cilities that can be used with the 2712 are specified. 
(8 pages) 



A24-3488 IBM 1403, 1443 and 2203 Printers 03 

Form-Design Considerations 

This publication contains information that should be 
considered by personnel designing, ordering, or using 
forms for the ibm 1403, the ibm 1443, or the ibm 2203 
Printer. ( 16 pages ) 



10 



A24-3500 IBM 1259 Magnetic Character 03 

Reader — Component Description 

This reference publication contains information about 
all the features and functions of the ibm 1259 Magnetic 
Character reader. On-line and off-line data flow and 
operating theory are discussed, with detailed program- 
ming information and operating instructions for each 
reader function. 

Refer to the following bibliographies for additional 
publications: 
IBM System/360 Model 20 Bibliography, Form A26- 

3565 
IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822 
IBM 1440, 1240, and 1450 Bibliography, Form A24- 
3005 

(40 pages) 



A24-3509 IBM 2944 Data Channel Repeater 15 

Installation Manual — Physical Planning 

This publication provides physical planning informa- 
tion for the ibm 2944 Data Channel Repeater Models 
1 and 2 when used with the ibm System/ 360. Included 
are physical specifications and cable, electrical, and 
environmental requirements. 

For a list of related publications and abstracts, see 
the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. 
(8 pages) 



A24-3510 IBM System/360 Model 25 01 

Functional Characteristics 

This reference publication augments the IBM System/ 
360 Principles of Operation, Form A22-6821. It de- 
scribes the relationship of the Model 25 to other Sys- 
tem/360 models: system capabilities, system control 
panel, input/ output channels and integrated i/o at- 
tachments, operations, instruction timings, and system 
features (including the 1400 Compatibility Feature). 
The reader should have a knowledge of the System/ 
360 as defined in the IBM System/360 Principles of 
Operation. Other literature applicable to the Model 
25 is fisted in the IBM System/ 360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822, and the IBM System Summary, Form A22- 
6810. (168 pages) 



A24-3511 IBM System/360 Model 25 00 

Configurator 

A schematic drawing showing the complete Model 25 
processor with all standard and optional features. 
Input/ output devices are shown on Form A22-6823, 
and data communications devices are shown on Form 
A22-6824. (lpage) 



A24-3512 IBM System/ 360 Model 25 13 

IBM 1401/1460 and 1440 Compatibility 
Features 

This publication describes the 1401/1460 and 1440 
Compatibility features for the System/ 360 Model 25. 
These special features enable a rapid and simplified 
transfer from 1401-, 1460-, or 1440-oriented applica- 
tions to the ibm System/ 360 Model 25. 

Refer to the IBM System/360 Model 25 Functional 
Characteristics, Form A24-3510, for a description of the 
capabilities, functions and operational characteristics 
of the System/ 360 Model 25. 

The IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822, 
lists the associated reference publications. (48 pages) 



A24-3516 IBM 2938 Array Processor Model 1 15 

RPQ W24563, Model 2 RPQ 815188; 
Installation Manual — Physical Planning 

This publication contains physical planning informa- 
tion for installing the ibm 2938 Array Processor Models 
1 and 2 (kpq). Included are dimensions, weights, elec- 
trical requirements, and environmental specifications. 
A cable diagram and a cable requirements chart are 
provided. 

For further system information and for explanation 
of symbols, see IBM System/ 360 Installation Manual — 
Physical Planning, Form C22-6820. ( 6 pages) 



A24-35 19 IBM System/360 Custom Feature 1 3 

Description: 2938 Array Processor Model 1, 
RPQ W24563; Model 2, RPQ 815188 

This bulletin describes the purpose and function of the 
ibm 2938 Array Processor as attached to the ibm Sys- 
tem/360 Models 44, 65, and 75. A description of its 
abilities is presented along with a mathematical de- 
scription of each array operation. This bulletin pro- 
vides an understanding of arithmetic manipulation of 
large arrays in storage by explaining the arithmetic 
and data format conversion operations on one, two, or 
three arrays of input data that produce an array of 
output results. 

A prerequisite for studying this bulletin is a basic 
knowledge of the ibm System/360 as contained in the 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 
6821. (56 pages) 



A24-3523 IBM System/360 Model 25 01 

Operating Procedures 

This reference publication describes the operating fea- 
tures and procedures for units of the ibm System/ 360 
Data Processing System Model 25. Included are proce- 
dures for starting, initializing, storing, altering, display- 
ing, and restarting the: 

2025 Processing Unit 

1052 Printer-Keyboard Model 7 

2540 Card Read Punch 

2311 Disk Storage Drive Model 1 

1403 Printer Model 2 or 7 

For additional information on particular units and 
special features, refer to appropriate publications listed 
in IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (76 
pages) 



A24-3524— IBM System/360 Model 25 1 3 

Model 20 Mode Feature 

This reference publication describes the characteristics, 
implementation, and operating considerations for the 
ibm System/ 360 Model 20 Mode Feature for the Sys- 
tem/360 Model 25. 

Other ibm publications necessary for a complete 
understanding of this feature are: 

IBM System/360 Model 20 Functional Characteris- 
tics, Form A26-5847. 

IBM System/360 Model 25 Functional Characteris- 
tics, Form A24-3510. 

The publications applicable to the System/360 
Model 20 are listed in the IBM System/360 Model 20 
Bibliography, Form A26-3565. 

The publications applicable to the System/360 
Model 25 are listed in the IBM System/360 Bibliogra- 
phy, Form A22-6822. (20 pages) 



A24-3526 IBM System/360 Model 25 13 

Integrated Communications 
Attachment Feature 

This reference publication describes the operation of 
the Integrated Communications Attachment feature 
for the ibm System/360 Model 25. Included is a general 
description of the feature and its common controls. 
Also included are the communications facilities that 
can be used with the Integrated Communications At- 
tachment (ica) and the remote terminals and proces- 
sors that may be serviced by the ica. Configuration 
limitations, overrun considerations, and the effects on 
multiplexer channel data rates are also presented. 

The reader should have a knowledge of System/360 
as defined in the sbl publications : 

IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 
6821. 

IBM System/360 Model 25 Functional Characteris- 
tics, Form A24-3510. 

For a list of other associated System/360 publica- 
tions, see the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. ( 20 pages) 



A26-3567 IBM 2311 Disk Storage Drive 19 

Original Equipment Manufacturers' 
Information 

This manual contains information that will assist non- 
ibm engineers in attaching the ibm 2311 Disk Storage 
Drive to their equipment. It includes a general descrip- 
tion of machine functions, a reference listing of publi- 
cations and engineering documents, and information 
concerning machine interface not readily available in 
other publications. (8 pages) 



A26-3574 IBM 2321 Data Cell Drive— OEMI 19 

This publication contains information for engineers 
who plan to attach the ibm 2321 Data Cell Drive to 
their equipment. 

The information includes a general description of 
machine functions, a reference listing of useful pub- 
lications and engineering documents, and information 
concerning machine interfaces. (22 pages) 



A26-3599 IBM System/360 Component 07 

Descriptions — 2314 Direct Access Storage 
Facility and 2844 Auxiliary Storage 
Control 

This publication describes the ibm 2314 Direct Access 
Storage Facility and the ibm 2844 Auxiliary Storage 
Control, and presents functional and operating charac- 
teristics for these devices. Capacities, timing consider- 
ations, commands, operating procedures, and sense 
and status information are described. The user of this 
publication should be thoroughly familiar with the i/o 
programming considerations described in IBM Sys- 
tem/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22-6821. (62 
pages) 



A26-3633 Data Cell Handling Guide 07 

This manual provides suggested operating and han- 
dling procedures for the ibm Data Cell used with the 
ibm 2321 Data Cell Drive. ( 12 pages ) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 11 



A26-3699 IBM 1971-1980 Custom Terminal 13 

Functional Characteristics, Operating 
Procedures, and Physical Planning 

This manual describes the operations, controls, and 
special features of the ibm 1971 Buffered Terminal 
Control ( Models 30 and 35) and the ibm 1980 Buffered 
Terminal (Models 9 and 12). The communications 
facilities that can be used with this Teleprocessing 
terminal are described. Appendixes, containing the 
physical planning specifications, rpq numbers, a glos- 
sary of terms, and general typewriter maintenance, are 
provided. (48 pages) 



A26-5661 IBM 2301 Drum Storage 19 

Original Equipment Manufacturers' 
information 

This publication provides definitions and functional 
descriptions of the interface lines for the 2301 Drum 
Storage. It also contains specifications, timings, and 
cable information. (10 pages) 



A26-5663 IBM 2303 Drum Storage 19 

Original Equipment Manufacturers' 
Information 

This publication provides definitions and functional 
descriptions of the interface lines for the 2303 Drum 
Storage. It also contains specifications, timings, and 
cable information. (11 pages) 



A26-5714 IBM 2314/2844 Multiplex Storage 13 

Control Feature — Airlines Buffer 

This publication describes the ibm 2314/2844 Multiplex 
Storage Control Feature (rpq number S50001). This 
feature allows the 2314/2844 to operate in its basic 
mode or in multiplex mode. This publication describes 
formed in multiplex mode. For a description of 2314/ 
2844 basic mode operations, refer to the Systems Refer- 
ence Library publication IBM System/360 Component 
Descriptions — 2314 Direct Access Storage Facility and 
2844 Auxiliary Storage Control, Form A26-3599. (60 
pages) 



A26-5756 IBM Disk Pack and Cartridge 07 

Handling Procedures 

This manual is a guide for handling ibm Disk Packs 
and Cartridges. The information contained in this 
manual applies to ibm 1316 and 2316 Disk Packs and 
2315 Disk Cartridges. ( 12 pages) 



A26-5988 IBM System/360 Component 07 

Descriptions — 2841 Storage Control 

2302 Disk Storage, Models 3 and 4 
231 1 Disk Storage Drive, Model 1 
2321 Data Cell Drive 

2303 Drum Storage 

This publication contains reference information for the 
operation and programming of storage devices which 
attach to the ibm 2841 Storage Control. These storage 
devices include the ibm 2311 Disk Storage Drive, 
Model 1; the ibm 2302 Disk Storage, Models 3 and 4; 
the bbm 2321 Data Cell Drive; and the ibm 2303 Drum 
Storage (66 pages) 



A26-5993 IBM System/360 Custom Feature 13 

2972 Line Control Unit Model 1 

This publication presents a description of the opera- 
tion of the ibm 2972 Line Control Unit Model 1. A 
sample configuration and a description of operation 
sequence are included. ( 20 pages ) 



A27-2700 — IBM System/360 Component 03 

Description — IBM 2260 Display Station 
IBM 2848 Display Control 

This manual describes the functional and operating 
characteristics of the dm 2260 Display Station and the 
ibm 2848 Display Control. The two units combine to 
form a display complex that provides visual access to 
data stored in an ibm System/360. A variety of models 
and features permit 2260/2848 configurations that 
range from a 2848 with a single display-only 2260 to a 
multiple-station display complex, each station of which 
can be used as a direct-entry terminal as well as a 
means of rapidly accessing and displaying computer- 
stored data. This manual contains Principles of Opera- 
tion sections for the local and remote applications of 
the display complex, and for the "data entry" 2260/ 
2848 configuration as well. (88 pages) 



A27-2701 IBM System/360 03 

Component Description 
IBM 2250 Display Unit Model 1 

This publication contains detailed information on pro- 
gramming, operation, and special features of the ibm 
2250 Display Unit Model 1. The material is presented 
with the assumption that the reader has read the IBM 
System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22-6821. 
The manual IBM System/360 Component Description: 
IBM 2250 Display Unit Model 3; IBM 2840 Display 
Control Form A27-2702 also may be of interest to the 
reader. (36 pages) 



A27-2702 IBM System/360 Component 03 

Description 

IBM 2250 Display Unit Model 2 
IBM 2840 Display Control Model 1 

This document presents detailed information about 
ibm 2250 Display Unit Model 2/ ibm 2840 Display Con- 
trol Model 1 programming, operation, and special fea- 
tures. The material is presented with the assumption 
that the reader has read the IBM System/360 Princi- 
ples of Operation, Form A22-6821. 

The following publications may also be of interest to 
the reader: 
IBM System/360 Component Description: IBM 

2250 Display Unit Model 1, Form A27-2701. 
IBM System/360 Component Description: IBM 
2280 Film Recorder, IBM 2282 Film Recorder/ 
Scanner, Form A22-6853. 
IBM System/360 Operating System, Graphic Pro- 
gramming Services for IBM 2250 Display Unit, 
Preliminary Specifications, Form C27-6909. 
Each 2250 Model 1 attaches directly to the System/ 
360 channel and is not used with the 2840 Display 
Control. Each film unit attaches to a 2840 Display 
Control Model 1 by means of a 2840 special feature 
and shares common 2840 circuitry with the attached 
2250-2 Display Unit(s). Various film unit/2250-2 con- 
figurations are described in the film unit publication. 
(48 pages) 



A27-2703 IBM 2703 Transmission Control 09 

Component Description 

This publication provides a detailed description of the 
capabilities, features, and communication facilities re- 
quired for the bbm 2703 Transmission Control Unit. 
The capabilities of the unit are grouped by: start-stop 
capabilities; and binary-synchronous capabilities. All 
items of a general nature are discussed in the section, 
"Detailed Description of Operations." 



The operator's controls and a detailed description of 
the communication facilities to which the 2703 can be 
attached are contained in the Appendix. For a com- 
plete listing of all skl publications available in the bbm 
System/360 library, including abstracts, consult the 
IBM System/ 360 Bibliography, Form A2£-6822. (78 
pages) 



A27-2704 IBM System/360 Component 09 

Description — IBM 271 1 
Line Adapter Unit 

This manual describes the operation of the ibm 2711 
Line Adapter Unit. Included is a general description 
of the 2711, the line adapters that can be contained 
in a 2711, the communication facilities that can be 
used with the 2711, and the operational functions of 
the line adapters. ( 6 pages ) 



A27-2706 IBM 7770 Audio Response Unit 19 

Model 3, IBM 7772 Audio Response Unit 
Original Equipment Manufacturers' 
Information 

The purpose of an oemi manual is to provide informa- 
tion to enable another manufacturer to design equip- 
ment that can be used with ibm systems or devices. The 
oemi manual provides supplemental data not found in 
other ibm publications. This manual describes the ibm 
7770 Model 3 and ibm 7772 Audio Response Units. 
These units are capable of connecting an ibm System/ 
360, via the multiplexor channel, to a telephone net- 
work. (32 pages) 



A27-2710 IBM 7772 Audio Response Unit 09 

Vocabulary 

This publication obsoletes the shl Manual IBM 7772 
Audio Response Concepts and Vocabulary, Form A22- 
6847. It contains a complete listing of the 7772 vocabu- 
lary. (6 pages) 



A27-271 1 IBM System/360 Component 09 

Description — IBM 7772 Audio 
Response Unit 

This manual describes the functional and operational 
characteristics of the ibm 7772 Audio Response Unit. 
Topics include vocabulary selection, system attachment 
considerations, communications requirements, and pro- 
gramming considerations. This manual supersedes ibm 
Systems Reference Library publications IBM 7772 
Audio Response Unit with System/360, Form A22- 
6836, and IBM 7770 and 7772 Audio Response Unit 
Common Carrier Information, Form Z22-6831. (29 
pages) 



A27-2713 System/360 Model 67 Configurator 00 

A schematic drawing showing the complete Model 67 
processor with all standard and optional features, i/o 
control units and devices are described in the IBM 
System/ 360 Input/ Output Configurator, Form A22- 
6823, and in the IBM System/360 Data Communica- 
tions Configurator, Form A22-6824. ( 1 page) 



12 



A27-2715 IBM System/360 Special Feature 13 

Description— 709/7040/7044/7090/ 
7094 II Compatibility Feature for 
IBM System/360 Models 65 and 67 

This publication contains information about the ibm 
7090 Compatibility Feature (#7119). The Compatibil- 
ity Feature adds interpretive facilities to System/ 360 
Models 65 and 67 for use by the ibm 7090 Emulator 
Program. The combination of the feature and the pro- 
gram, referred to as the 7090 Emulator, allows execu- 
tion on ibm System/360 Models 65 and 67 of programs 
written for the ibm 709, 7040, 7044, 7090, 7094, and 
7094 n. (58 pages) 



A27-271 6 IBM System/360 Special Feature 1 3 

Description — 7080 Compatibility Feature 
for System/360 Model 65 

This publication presents a detailed description of the 
ibm 7080 Compatibility Feature #7118. The Compati- 
bility Feature adds interpretive facilities to System/ 
360 for use by the ibm 7080 Emulator Program, Pro- 
gram No. 360C-EU-727. This combination of feature 
and program, referred to as the ibm 7080 Emulator, 
permits an ibm System/360 Model 65 to execute pro- 
grams written for an ibm 7080 Data Processing System. 
(38 pages) 



A27-2717 IBM System/360 Special Feature 13 

Description — 7074 Compatibility Feature 
for System/360 Models 50 and 65 

This publication contains information about the ibm 
7070/7074 Compatability Feature. The Compatibility 
Feature adds interpretive facilities to System/360 
Model 50 or 65 for use by the ibm 7074 emulator 
program. The combination of the feature and the pro- 
gram, referred to as the 7074 Emulator, allows execu- 
tion on ibm System/360 Models 50 and 65 of programs 
written for the ibm 7070 and 7074. (34 pages) 



A27-2719 IBM System/360 Model 67 01 

Functional Characteristics 

This publication contains detailed information on the 
organi2ation, characteristics, features, and functions 
unique to the ibm System/360 Model 67 Time Sharing 
System. Major areas described include time-sharing 
philosophy, system structure, new units, generalized 
information flow, standard and special features, in- 
struction timings, and the system control panel. 

Descriptions oi specific input/ output devices used 
with the Model 67 appear in separate publications. See 
the IBM System/ 360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822 for 
a listing and a brief description of these publications. 

The material in this publication is presented with 
the assumption that the reader has knowledge of Sys- 
tem/360 as defined in the IBM System/360 Principles 
of Operation, Form A22-6821 and the IBM System/ 
360 System Summary, Form A22-6810. The IBM Sys- 
tem/360 Model 67 Configurator, Form A27-2713 also 
may be of interest to the reader. (68 pages) 



A27-2721 IBM System/360 Component 03 

Description — IBM 2250 Display Unit Model 
3— IBM 2840 Display Control Model 2 

This document presents detailed information about 
ibm 2250 Display Unit Model 3/ ibm 2840 Display Con- 
trol Model 2 programming, operation, and special fea- 
tures. The material is presented with the assumption 
that the reader has read the IBM System/360 Princi- 
ples of Operation, Form A22-6821. (67 pages) 



A27-2724 IBM System/360 Custom Systems 15 

Unit — 2916 Long Line Adapter, Models 3 
and 4 Installation Bulletin — Physical Planning 

This bulletin contains all the necessary physical plan- 
ning data required for the installation of the unit de- 
scribed. If the unit is to be installed in conjunction 
with a computer system, the specifications of die most 
critical unit must be met. The data follows the same 
format and utilizes the same standardized symbols as 
used in the IBM System/360 Installation Manual — 
Physical Planning, Form C22-6820. (4 pages) 



A27-2725 IBM System/360 Component 10 

Description— IBM 50 Magnetic 
Data Inscriber 

This manual describes the functional and operating 
characteristics of the ibm 50 Magnetic Data Inscriber. 
The ibm 50 Magnetic Data Inscriber is a key-operated 
device that records data on cartridge-contained mag- 
netic tape. Each ibm 50-generated tape can be used as 
a data storage medium or as a vehicle for entering data 
into an ibm System/360, via the ibm 2495 Tape Car- 
tridge Reader. In addition to its data recording capabil- 
ity, the ibm 50 can also be used to verify data stored on 
tapes generated on the same or other ibm 5ffs. (20 
pages) 



A27-2726 IBM System/360 Component 03 

Description — IBM 2495 Tape Cartridge 
Reader 

This manual describes the functional and operating 
characteristics of the ibm 2495 Tape Cartridge Reader 
(tcr). The ibm 2495 tcr is used to transfer data stored 
on cartridge-contained 16mm magnetic tape to an ibm 
System/360. The tcr accepts cartridge tapes contain- 
ing data generated on either the ibm 50 Magnetic Data 
Inscriber or the ibm Magnetic Tape Selectric Type- 
writer System. ( 12 pages) 



A27-2727 IBM System/360 Custom Systems 15 

Unit — 2909 Model 3 Asynchronous Data 
Channel— RPQ F13299/RPQ 882045 
Installation Bulletin — Physical Planning 

This bulletin contains all the necessary physical plan- 
ning data required for the installation of the unit de- 
scribed. If the unit is to be installed in conjunction 
with a computer system, the specifications of the most 
critical unit must be met. This bulletin utilizes the 
same format and standardized symbols contained in 
the IBM System/360 Installation Manual — Physical 
Planning, Form C22-6820. (6 pages) 



A27-2728 IBM System/360 Model 65 01 

Operating Procedures 

This manual describes operator procedures for an ibm 
2065 Processing Unit, operating with or without an 
associated ibm 1052 Printer-Keyboard. Also described 
are, system control panel machine functions, machine 
procedures, program-oriented procedures, and opera- 
tor-intervention procedures. Ah appendix of reference 
material and an index are included 

The reader is assumed to have a knowledge of the 
following sbl publications: 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 
6821 (sections on "System Structure" and "System 
Control Panel") 
IBM System/360 Model 65 Functional Characteris- 
tics, Form A22-6884 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System Operating 

Guide, Form C24-5021 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System Operating 
Guide, Form C24-5022 



IBM System/360 Operating System Operator's 
Guide, Form C28-6540 

For information pertaining to the operation of i/o 
units that are attachable to the System/ 360 Model 65, 
refer to the appropriate sbx publication. All System/ 
360 srl publications that pertain to ibm System/ 360 
and attachable units are abstracted and referenced by 
form number in IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. (46 pages) 



A27-2729 IBM System/360 Custom Systems 15 

Unit — 2972 Model 7 Scientific Interface 
Control Unit, RPQ E46181; Installation 
Bulletin — Physical Planning 

This bulletin contains all the necessary physical plan- 
ning data required for the installation of the unit der 
scribed. If the unit is to be installed in conjunction with 
a computer system, the specifications of the most criti- 
cal unit must be met. This bulletin utilizes the same 
format and standardized symbols contained in the IBM 
System/360 Installation Manual — Physical Planning, 
Form C22-6820. ( 4 pages) 



A27-2731 IBM System/ 360 Component 09 

Description — IBM 2265 Display Station 
IBM 2845 Display Control 

This manual describes the functional and operating 
characteristics of the ibm 2265 Display Station and the 
ibm 2845 Display Control. The two units combine to 
form a display system that provides visual access to 
data stored in an ibm System/ 360. This manual also 
contains a Principles of Operation section for remote 
applications of the display system. (48 pages) 



A27-30O2 2740/2741 Communication 19 

Terminal — Original Equipment 
Manufacturers' Information 

To assist non-mM engineers in attaching the ibm 2740 
or 2741 Communication Terminal to their equipment, 
this manual describes in detail important interface con- 
siderations such as physical connections, line adapting 
equipment, signals and data flow, codes, power re- 
quirements, power supply, configurations, timing con- 
siderations, and line control, as well as descriptions of 
the terminals themselves. To provide information on 
the ibm Line Adapters appropriate for use with 2740/ 
2741 Communication Terminals, this manual refers to 
Planning and Installation of a Data Communications 
System Using IBM Line Adapters, Form A24-3435. (46 



A27-3005 IBM 2780 Data Transmission 09 

Terminal — Component Description 

This Component Description manual describes the 
principles of operation of the ibm 2780 Data Trans- 
mission Terminal. The data-link control characters, 
code structures, timeouts, and throughput rates associ- 
ated with the Binary Synchronous method of transmis- 
sion are described. 

The communications facilities, data sets, and special 
features available for this teleprocessing terminal are 
also discussed. As an introduction to the Binary Syn- 
chronous method of transmission, refer to the manual, 
General Information — Binary Synchronous Communi- 
cations, Form A27-3004. 

Additional information on the Binary Synchronous 
method of transmission when using an dm 2701 or ibm 
2703 can be found in the following publications: 

IBM 2701 Data Adapter Unit — Component Descrip- 
tion, Form A22-6864 

IBM 2703 Transmission Control — Component De- 
scription, Form A27-2703 (80 pages) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 13 



A27-3007 IBM 2780 Data Transmission 15 

Terminal — Installation Manual — Physical 
Planning 

This publication contains physical-planning information 
for the ibm 2780 Data Transmission Terminal, Models 
1, 2, 3, and 4. Included are physical specifications and 
electrical and environmental requirements. 

Refer to the Installation Manual — Physical Planning, 
Unit Record Data Processing Equipment, Form C24- 
1037, for additional information. 

For titles and abstracts of associated publications, 
see the IBM Teleprocessing Bibliography, Form A24- 
3089. (10 pages) 



A27-3012 IBM 2702/2703 Transmission 19 

Controls — Original Equipment 
Manufacturers' Information 

This publication describes the ibm 2702/2703 Trans- 
mission Control interfaces. The processor interface de- 
scription includes a description of the operating signals 
and responses. The interface descriptions provide de- 
vice attachment information. The electrical, mechani- 
cal, and cabling specifications of these interfaces are 
provided, together with physical planning require- 
ments. ( 110 pages ) 



A33-4500 IBM System/360 Component 03 

Descriptions— 2826 Paper Tape Control . 

Unit, 1017 Paper Tape Reader, 
1018 Paper Tape Punch 

This publication describes the above named paper tape 
input/output components for the reading and punch- 
ing of paper or Mylar* tape. Attachment is to die 
multiplexer channel of the ibm System/360 Models' 25, 
30, 40, and 50. The channel commands necessary to 
control the operation of the above units, and the status 
and sense bytes provided by the control unit, are fully 
described. 

Controls, tape specifications, tape-splicing proce- 
dures, tape-loading procedures, and special features 
are also described. 

Detailed information about System/360 channel 
operations is included in the Systems Reference Li- 
brary IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form 
A22-6821. (48 pages) 

"Trademark of E. I. du Pont de Nemours & Co. (Inc.) 



C19-00O1 IBM System/360 Installation 15 

Manual— IBM World Trade 50-Cycle 
Physical Planning Requirements (for World 
Trade Use Only) 

This publication is a version of bjm System/360 Instal- 
lation Manual— Physical Planning, Form C22-6820; it 
is limited to ibm World Trade requirements. 

This manual contains preliminary physical informa- 
tion for installing the ibm System/ 360. ( 164 pages) 



C20-1618 IBM System/360 Number Systems 95 

This ibm student text on number systems presents a 
brief review of the principles of positional notation, as 
applied to the binary and hexadecimal systems of 
notation. The publication covers the operations of 
binary and hexadecimal arithmetic, decimal-binary- 
hexadecimal base conversion, and the principles of base 
and base-minus-one complementation. (18 pages) 



C20-1619 Catalog of Programs for IBM 20 

System/360 — June 1968 

This Catalog contains a complete listing of all pro- 
grams for the bbm System/360 available from the Pro- 
gram Information Department, 40 Saw Mill River 
Road, Hawthorne, New York 10532. 

Instructions for Ordering programs are contained in 
the section of the Introduction entitled, "How to Order 
Programs." (144 pages) 



C20-1637 PL/I Guide for FORTRAN Users 29 

This text is an introductory guide to pl/i, written 
especially for those who have a working knowledge of 
fobtran n or rv. It does not attempt to cover all the 
features of the language. It should prepare the student 
to write a straightforward pl/i program. (40 pages) 



C20-1646 A Programmer's Introduction to 95 

the IBM System/360 Architecture, 
Instructions, and Assembly Language 

This text is intended to introduce the student to the 
characteristics of the System/360 and to its instruction 
set. Many sample programs are used throughout to 
illustrate specific instructions and prograniming tech- 
niques. It is expected that the student has some knowl- 
edge of computing systems. 

This publication incorporates but does not obsolete 
the following bbm System/360 Student Texts: 

Fixed-Point Operations, C20-1613; Programming 
with Base Registers and the USING Instruction; 
C20-1614; Introduction to Assembler Language Pro- 
gramming, C20-1615; Decimal Operations, C20-1616; 
Number Systems, C20-1618; Logical Operations on 
Character and Bits, C20-I623; Edit, Translate, and 
Execute Instructions, C20-1624; Subroutines and Sub- 
programs, C20-1625. 

The new material in this text includes the chapters 
on "Architecture," "Automatic Interrupts," and "Float- 
ing Point and Advanced Loops in Scientific Applica- 
tions." 

No attempt at completeness is made, and therefore 
it is expected that the student will refer to the appro- 
priate shx. publications for additional detail. (218 
pages) 



C20-1649 Introduction to IBM System/360 95 

Direct Access Storage Devices and 
Organization Methods 

This student text discusses the physical characteristics 
and capacities of the following System/360 Direct 
Access Storage Devices: 2301 Drum Storage, 2302 
Disk Storage, 2303 Drum Storage, 2311 Disk Storage 
Drive, 2314 Direct Access Storage Facility, and 2321 
Data Cell Drive. 

The file organization methods and access methods 
provided for these devices by the ibm System/360 
Basic Operating System, the ibm System/360 Disk 
Operating System, and the ibm System/ 360 Operating 
System are also discussed. The uses of direct access 
storage basic terminology, and the establishment of 
controls for a direct access system are other topics 
addressed by this text. Most of the chapters end with 
student exercises, the answers to which may be found 
at the end of the manual. 

No attempt at completeness is made. Refer to the 
publications listed in the Bibliography for additional 
details. (76 pages) 



C20-1650 IBM System/360 Model 30 13 

1401 Compatibility Mode 
Operator's Manual 

This manual has been prepared to aid the 1401 oper- 
ator in transferring to Compatibility Mode Operation 
on a System/360 Model 30. Only those procedures that 
differ from their counterparts on the 1401 are dis- 
cussed. Detailed run book entries are presented for 
each functional operator action. Procedures can be 
incorporated into the installation's 1401 run book(s) to 
provide a single source of operator reference. (56 
pages) 



C20-1651 A Guide to PL/I for Commercial 95 

Programmers 

This publication presents those features of pl/i that 
apply to commercial data processing. It does not re- 
strict itself to a particular aspect of commercial data 
processing but attempts to discuss all features of pl/i 
that may be used in the full spectrum of commercial 
applications. 

Because of the many similarities between pl/i and 
cobol (Common Business Oriented Language), each 
chapter in this publication concludes with a section 
showing comparisons of two languages. The material 
in this publication is quite comprehensive, but by no 
means is it a complete description of pl/i nor does it 
represent the definitive treatment of any one language 
feature. (69 pages) 



C20-1667 Introduction to IBM System/360 95 

Architecture 

This text is intended to introduce the student to the 
characteristics of System/360. It is expected that the 
student has some knowledge of computing systems. 

This publication contains the same information as 
Chapter 1 of A Programmer's Introduction to the IBM 
System/360 Architecture, Instructions, and Assembly 
Language, Form C20-1646 and obsoletes IBM System/ 
360 Introductory Notes, Form C20-1608. 

No attempt at completeness has been made and 
therefore, it is expected that the student will refer to 
the appropriate Systems Reference Library (sbx) pub- 
lications for additional detail. (32 pages) 



C20-1 676 IBM System/360 Model 30— IBM 95 

System/360 Disk Operating System 
System Operation Training 

This publication must be used together with the pub- 
lication IBM System/360 Model 30— IBM System/ 360 
Disk Operating System: System Operation Training 
Manual Book of Illustrations, Form C20-1677. They 
are intended to introduce the student to many of the 
procedures to be followed when operating the ibm 
System/360 Model 30. This publication describes the 
system, various input and output devices, and, through 
the explanation of sample jobs, illustrates how person- 
nel operate the system in an ibm System/360 Disk 
Operating System (dos) stacked-job processing envi- 
ronment. 

A student with no prior experience in the data proc- 
essing field can use this text. In most cases, however, 
it is expected that the text will be used after the com- 
pletion of units 1, 4, 5, and 6 of the programmed in- 
struction course Computing System Fundamentals, 
Course Y9897 88. The materials for these units include 
the following booklets: R29-0241, R29-0242, R29-0244, 
R29-0245, R29-0246, R29-0247, R29-0248. 

This text makes no attempt at completeness. The 
student should refer to the most recent editions of the 
publications 'listed in Appendix D for complete infor- 



14 



mation about the ibm System/ 360 Model 30 and the 
various input/ output devices discussed in this text 
(1052 Printer-Keyboard, 1403 Printer Model Nl, 2311 
Disk Storage Drive, and 2401 Magnetic Tape Unit). 
The student should refer to the publications listed in 
the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822 for 
information about operating procedures for input/ 
output devices not discussed in this text. This text's 
discussion of dos is based on release 10 of dos and 
concentrates on a stacked-job processing environment 
rather than on a multiprogramming environment. The 
student should refer to the latest edition of IBM Sys- 
tem/360 Disk Operating System Operating Guide, 
Form C20-5022 for the most complete, up-to-date in- 
formation about operating procedures in both environ- 
ments. (56 pages) 



C20-T677 IBM System/360 Model 30— IBM 95 

System/360 Disk Operating System 
System Operation Training — Book 
of Illustrations 

This publication contains the illustrations for IBM Sys- 
tem/360 Model 30— IBM System/360 Disk Operating 
System: System Operation Training Manual, Form 
C20-1676.( 88 pages) 



C20-1678 IBM System/360 Model 40— IBM 95 

System/360 Disk Operating System 
System Operation Training 

This publication must be used together with IBM 
System/360 Model 40— IBM System/360 Disk Oper- 
ating System: System Operation Training Manual 
Book of Illustrations, Form C20-1679. They are in- 
tended to introduce the student to many of the pro- 
cedures to be followed when operating the bm Sys- 
tem/360 Model 30. This publication describes the sys- 
tem, various input and output devices, and, through 
the explanation of sample jobs, illustrates how person- 
nel operate the system in an ibm System/360 Disk 
Operating System (dos) stacked-job processing envi- 
ronment. 

A student with no prior experience in the data proc- 
essing field can use this text. In most cases, however, 
it is expected that the text will be used after the com- 
pletion of units 1, 4, 5, and 6 of the programmed in- 
struction course Computing System Fundamentals, 
Course Y9897 88. The materials for these units include 
the following booklets: R29-0241, R29-0242, R29-0244, 
R29-0245, R29-0246, R29-0247, and R29-0248. 

After reading this text, the student may wish to per- 
form a System Exercise (Card Deck R20-4074) on a 
System/ 360 Model 40 to gain actual experience in 
operating input/ output devices, interpreting operator 
messages, and issuing commands. 

This text makes no attempt at completeness. The 
student should refer to the most recent editions of the 
publications listed in Appendix D for complete infor- 
mation about the bm System/ 360 Model 40 and the 
various input/ output devices discussed in this text 
(1052 Printer-Keyboard, 1403 Printer Model Nl, 2311 
Disk Storage Drive, 2401 Magnetic Tape Unit). The 
student should refer to the publications listed in the 
IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822 for in- 
formation about operating procedures for input/ output 
devices not discussed in this text. This text's discussion 
of dos is based on release 10 of dos and concentrates 
on a stacked-job processing environment rather than 
on a multiprogramming environment. The student 
should refer to the latest edition of IBM System/360 
Disk Operating System Operating Guide, Form C24- 
5022 for the most complete, up-to-date information 
about operating procedures in both environments. (60 



C20-1679 IBM System/360 Model 40 95 

System/ 360 Disk Operating System 
System Operation Training Manual, 
Book of Illustrations 

This publication contains the illustrations for the pub- 
lication IBM System/360 Model 40— System/360 Disk 
Operating System — System Operation Training Man- 
ual, Form C20-1678. ( 88 pages ) 



C20-1680 IBM System/360 Operating System 95 

System Operation Training Manual 

This publication must be used together with the publi- 
cation IBM System/360 Operating System: System 
Operation Training Manual, Book of Illustrations, 
Form C20-1681. These two publications introduce the 
student to many of the procedures to be followed when 
operating an ibm System/ 360 under control of the ibm 
System/360 Operating System. These publications de- 
scribe the Operating System and various input/ output 
devices and illustrate how personnel operate the Sys- 
tem/360 under control of the Operating System. 

A student with no prior experience in the data proc- 
essing field can use this text after completion of units 
1, 4, 5, and 6 of the programmed instruction course 
Computing Systems Fundamentals, Course Y9897-88. 
The materials for these units include the following 
booklets: R29-0241, R29-0242, and R29-0244 through 
R29-0248. (40 pages) 



C20-1681 IBM System/360 Operating System 95 
System Operation Training Manual — Book 
of Illustrations 

This publication contains the illustrations for IBM 
System/360 Operating System — System Operation 
Training Manual, Form C20-1680. (96 pages) 



C20-1682 IBM System/360 Model 30— IBM 95 

System/360 Tape Operating System 
System Operation Training Manual 

This publication must be used together with IBM Sys- 
tem/360 Model 30— IBM System/360 Tape Operating 
System — System Operation Training Manual, Book of 
Illustrations, Form C20-1683. They are intended to in- 
troduce the student to many of the procedures to be 
followed when operating the D3M System/360 Model 
30. This publication describes the system, various input 
and output devices, and, through the explanation of 
sample jobs, illustrates how personnel operate the sys- 
tem in an D3M System/360 Tape Operating System 
(tos) stacked-job processing environment. 

A student with no prior experience in the data proc- 
essing field can use this text. In most cases, however, it 
is expected that the text will be used after the com- 
pletion of units 1, 4, 5, and 6 of the programmed in- 
struction course Computing System Fundamentals, 
Course Y9897-88. The materials for these units include 
the following booklets: R29-0241, R29-0242, R29-0245 
through R29-0248. ( 56 pages ) 



C20-1683 IBM System/360 Model 30— IBM 95 

System/360 Tape Operating System 
System Operation Training Manual, 
Book of Illustrations 

This publication contains the illustrations for IBM Sys- 
tem/360 Model 30— IBM System/360 Tape Operating 
System — System Operation Training Manual, Form 
C20-1682. ( 80 pages) 



C20-1685 System/360 Disk Operating System 50 
User's Guide: Control Statement Techniques 

This publication provides guidance in the use of con- 
trol statements as related to compilations, linkage edit- 
ing, utilities, sorts, and user programs. It presents 
tested examples with supporting explanations as an aid 
to understanding the input stream requirements for 
processing in the System/360 Disk Operating System 
environment. The control statements discussed are job 
control statements, linkage editor control statements, 
and operator commands. 
A list of related publications appears in the Preface. 



C20-1688 IBM 2260 Display Station— IBM 03 

2848 Display Control — IBM 1 053 Printer 
Operator's Manual 

This manual describes the operating characteristics of 
the ibm 2260 Display Station and the ibm 2848 Display 
Control. The two units combine to provide visual ac- 
cess to data stored in an ibm System/ 360. 

This manual also contains a section on operating the 
D3M 1053 Printer that can be attached to this system 
for printing the messages displayed on the screen. 

All functions described in this manual refer to the 
Models 1 and 2 of the 2260, Models 1, 2, and 3 of the 
2848, and Model 4 of the 1053. (20 pages) 



C20-1689 Introduction to the Compile-Time 95 

Facilities of PL/I 

The compile-time facilities of pl/i provide a conven- 
ient way of modifying and completing a pl/i program 
before it is finally translated into a set of machine- 
language instructions, pl/i supplies these faculties 
through a special set of source statements, called the 
preprocessor (or compile-time) statements which spec- 
ify operations to be performed at compile time upon 
the text of a source program. The features, the for- 
mats, and the restrictions of preprocessor statements 
are discussed in this student text. Illustrative applica- 
tions accompanied by actual compilation listings ap- 
pear with the discussions. ( 44 pages ) 



C20-801 1 Random Number Generation 99 

and Testing 

Random sampling — simulation studies — Monte Carlo 
methods — have been in use for many years. Papers de- 
scribing various aspects of these topics have appeared 
in technical journals and textbooks available to a rela- 
tively small percentage of computer users. Meanwhile, 
applications requiring random numbers are becoming 
more important and more common in business and in- 
dustry as well as purely scientific areas. This manual 
gives the mathematical development of the power 
residue method, outlines computer techniques for im- 
plementing it, and also offers brief comments on other 
methods. An appendix provides programming illustra- 
tions for binary and decimal computers. (12 pages) 



C20-8078 Form and Card Design 99 

The first section discusses the steps to take and factors 
to consider in designing a form. The second section 
describes the various types of cards and the major 
phases of card design, illustrates and explains design 
aids, and presents operating and processing factors 
that affect card design. 

This publication can be used as a guide for individ- 
ual study or a text for class study. It presupposes a 
knowledge of ibm Data Processing equipment. (15 
pages) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 15 



C20-8152 Flowcharting Techniques 99 

Adherence to standard techniques for the preparation 
of flowcharts of data processing systems and proced- 
ures greatly increases effectiveness of communication 
between the programmer analyst and the many groups 
with whom he deals. The manual describes in detail 
the preparation of system and program flowcharts. The 
symbols used are those provided by the new IBM 
Flowcharting Template, Form X20-8020, which con- 
tains cutouts for all flowchart symbols. The template 
envelope gives uses for the symbols. The Flowchart 
Worksheet, Form X20-8021 is a means of standardizing 
documentation. It provides space for drawing program 
flowcharts and contains an area for identification of the 
job, including application, procedure, date and pagina- 
tion. (34 pages) 



C2 1-5000 IBM System/360 Basic Programming 25 
Support Programmer's Guide 
FORTRAN IV, (16K Card) 

This publication provides the information necessary 
for: 

1. Translating Card Fortran rv source programs into 
System/360 coding. 

2. Executing the resulting System/360 coding. 
Included also are techniques and considerations for 

improving Card Fortran rv programs. These are sup- 
plementary to the information provided in the lan- 
guage publication, IBM System/360 Basic Program- 
ming Support Specifications, FORTRAN W (16K 
Card), Form C21-9040. The user should read that pub- 
lication before reading this one. (88 pages) 



C21-5001 IBM System/360 Basic 32 

Programming Support Distribution 
Program, Specifications and Operating 
Guide 

Program Number: 360-UT-208 

The distribution program is used for maintenance and 
distribution of the Disk Operating System. This refer- 
ence publication contains the specifications and operat- 
ing guide for the distribution program and describes 
the functions of the program, program deck, control 
cards, system and deck preparation, error messages 
and options, and operating instructions. 

The reader should be familiar with the information 
presented in the publications: IBM System/ 360 Basic 
Operating System, Programmers Guide (Form C24- 
3372) and IBM System/360 Principles of Operation 
(Form A22-6821). For a list of related publications, 
refer to the IBM System/ 360 Bibliography ( Form A22- 
6822). (36 pages) 



C2 1-9040 IBM System/360 Basic 25 

Programming Support Specifications 
FORTRAN IV, (16K Card) 

This publication describes and illustrates the use of 
the Basic Programming Support Card Fortran rv lan- 
guage for the ibm System/360. The reader is presumed 
to have some knowledge of an existing Fortran lan- 
guage. 

The Basic Programming Support Fortran rv lan- 
guage is a symbolic programming language. It parallels 
the symbolism and format of mathematical notation. 
In addition, many programming features and facilities 
are available for expressing the method of solution of 
a mathematical problem as a meaningful Fortran 
program. (52 pages) 



C22-6820 IBM System/360 Installation 15 

Manual — Physical Planning 

This manual contains preliminary physical inf ormatiori 
for installing ibm System/ 360, including floor planning 
and electrical, environmental, and structural require- 
ments. It discusses the physical characteristics of each 
unit and their effect on installation requirements. De- 
tailed cable and location charts are included, together 
with illustrations and dimensions, on all cable con- 
nectors used in the system. ( 169 pages ) 



C22-6922 IBM 291 1 Models 1, 2, and 5 and 15 

IBM 2989 Model 8 Installation 
Manual — Physical Planning 

This bulletin contains all physical planning data neces- 
sary to install the ibm 2911 Manual Switching Unit 
Models 1, 2, and 5 and the ibm 2989 Remote Switching 
Console Model 8. If a unit is to be installed in conjunc- 
tion with a computer system, specifications for the most 
critical unit must be met. 

Data follows the same format and uses the same 
standardized symbols as IBM System/360 Installation 
Manual— Physical Planning, Form C22-6820. (8 pages) 



C24-3320 IBM System/360 Basic 33 

Programming Support Specifications 
Sort/Merge Programs (8K Tape) 

This publication describes the ibm System/360 Basic 
Programming Support 8K Tape Sort/Merge Programs 
(one channel and two channel). It contains the fol- 
lowing information: 1. Minimum machine require- 
ments for sorting or merging records with this pro- 
gram. 2. Program capabilities. 3. A description of the 
control statements required to define specific sort or 
merge operations. 4. A description of the facilities pro- 
vided for inserting user-written routines into the pro- 
gram. (72 pages) 



C24-3321 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 33 

System — Sort/Merge Program 

This publication describes the ibm Basic Operating 
System/360 8K Disk Sort/Merge Program. It contains 
the following information: 

1. Minimum machine requirements for sorting or 
merging records with this program. 

2. Program capabilities. 

3. A description of the control statements required 
to define specific sort or merge operations. 

4. A description of the facilities provided for insert- 
ing user-written routines into the program (43 pages) 



C24-3337 IBM System/360 Operating System 28 

Report Program Generator Language 

This reference publication contains fundamentals of 
rpg programming and language specifications for the 
ibm System/360 Operating System, Report Program 
Generator. 

Also included is the job setup information for ex- 
ecuting rpg. (145 pages) 



C24-3343 IBM System/360 Basic 37 

Programming Support — Autotest 
Specifications (8K Tape) 

This reference publication describes in detail the test- 
ing services provided by the Basic Programming Sup- 
port bps Tape Autotest (8K Tape) program and the 
control cards necessary to use the services. Although 
one of the 8K Tape bps programs, Autotest requires at 
least 16K positions of main storage for execution. The 
following features are described: Autopatch, display, 



panel, card list, Autotest Output Tape, the Autotest 
Card-to-Tape utility, the Autotest Tape-to-Printer 
utility, normal and abnormal dumps, and disaster con- 
tinue. Special Autotest requirements of Job Control are 
also presented. 

The reader should be familiar with IBM System/360 
Principles of Operation, Form A22-6821 and IBM 
System/360 Basic Programming Support Programmer's 
Guide <8K Tape), Form C24-3354. (54 pages) 



C24-3345 IBM 1401/1460 Timing Programs 33 

for IBM System/360 Basic Programming 
Support Sort/Merge Programs (8K Tape) 

Program Numbers: 

1401-LM-078, Version 2 (2401-2404) 

1401-LM-080, Version 1 (2415) 
This publication contains the specifications and oper- 
ating procedures for the ibm 1401 and 1460 timing pro- 
grams used to estimate the amount of time required to 
sort records with an ibm System/360 Basic Program- 
ming Support 1-channel or 2-channel Sort/ Merge Pro- 
gram (8K Tape). 

The following information is included in this publi- 
cation: 

1. Minimum machine requirements for estimating 
times with these programs. 

2. A description of the user-prepared information 
cards required to define the proposed sort operation. 

3. The procedure to follow for executing the timing 
programs. 

The user of this publication should be familiar with 
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support Sort/ 
Merge Programs (8K Tape), Form C24-3320. For a 
list of associated 1401/1460 publications, see the IBM 
1401/1460 Bibliography, Form A24-1495. For a list of 
associated System/360 publications, see the IBM Sys- 
tem/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. ( 16 pages) 



C24-3354 IBM System/360 Basic 20 

Programming Support — Basic Tape 
System Programmer's Guide 

This reference publication describes the Basic Tape 
System and its use. The reader should have a basic 
knowledge of System/360. The major topics explained 
are: 

Operation with the Control Programs: Supervisor 
interruption handling, operator communication, the 
Channel Scheduler, and the communication region; 
Job Control card formats and symbolic i/o assignment; 
rpx and the Program Loader. 

Input/Output Control System (IOCS): Labels, file 
and record processing. 

Basic Tape System: Job Control with the System 
Tape, assembly of a Supervisor, Linkage Editor, and 
System Tape building, maintenance, and service. 

Titles and abstracts of related publications are listed 
in the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. 
(168 pages) 

C24-3355 IBM System/360 Basic 21 

Programming Support — Assembler with 
Input/Output Macros (Tape) Specifications 

This reference publication describes the basic pro- 
gramming support tape assembler language and the 
input/output (i/o) macros supplied by ibm for use in 
programs written in the assembler language. The gen- 
eral features of the assembler language are described 
first, followed by a description of each of the three 
types of assembler language statements: machine- 
instruction, assembler-instruction, and macro-instruc- 
tion statements. The description of macro instructions 
consists of a description of each of the rBM-supplied 
i/o macros. 



16 



The reader should be familiar with the information 
presented in the publications: IBM System/ 360 Prin- 
ciples of Operation, Form A22-6821; IBM System/360 
Basic Programming Support, Programmer's Guide, 
Form C24-3354; and IBM System/ 360 Basic Operating 
System and IBM System/ 360 Basic Programming Sup- 
port, Macro Definition Language, Form C24-3364. For 
a list of associated publications see the IBM System/ 
360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (232 pages) 



C24-3361 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 21 

System — Assembler with Input/Output 
Macros Specifications 

This reference publication describes the assembler lan- 
guage and the input/ output (i/o) macros supplied by 
ibm for use in writing programs for 8K disk-oriented 
System/360 installations. The general features of the 
assembler language are described first, followed by a 
description of each of three types of assembler lan- 
guage statements: machine-instruction, assembler- 
instruction, and macro-instruction statements. The de- 
scription of the macro instructions consists of a de- 
scription of each of the mM-supplied i/o macros. 

The reader should be familiar with the information 
presented in the publications: 

IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 
6821 

IBM System/360 Basic Operating System, Program- 
mer's Guide, Form C24-3372 

IBM System/360 Basic Operating System and IBM 
System/360 Basic Programming Support, Macro 
Definition Language, Form C24-3364 

For a list of other associated publications, refer to 
the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. 
(280 pages) 



C24-3363 IBM System/360 Basic 32 

Programming Support — DASD Utility 
Programs Specifications 

This reference publication describes the ibm System/ 
360 Basic Programming Support Direct Access Storage 
Device Utility Programs. The programs described are: 

PROGRAM NAME ORDER NUMBER 

Single-Transfer Utility Programs 
Card to Disk, Version 3 
Disk to Card, Version 3 
Disk to Disk, Version 3 
Disk to Printer, Version 3 
Disk to Tape, Version 3 
Tape to Disk, Version 3 
Special-Purpose Utility Programs 
Alternate Track Assignment (2311), 

Version 3 
16K Alternate Track Assignment 

(2311/2314), Version 1 
Alternate Track Assignment (2321), 

Version 1 360P-UT-212 

Clear Disk, Version 3 360P-UT-068 

Copy Data Cell to Tape, and Restore Tape 

to Data Cell, Version 1 360P-UT-071 

Copy Disk to Card, and Restore Card to 

Disk, Version 1 360P-UT-062 

Copy Disk to Disk, Version 1 360P-UT-072 

Copy Disk to Tape, and Restore Tape to 

Disk, Version 1 360P-UT-061 

Initialize Data Cell, Version 1 360P-UT-204 

Initialize Disk (2311 ), Version 4 360P-UT-069 

16K Initialize Disk (2311/2314), Version 1 360P-UT-206 
Multiple Disk to Printer, Version 2 360P-UT-203 



360P-UT-063 
360P-UT-064 
360P-UT-067 
360P-UT-073 
360P-UT-065 
360P-UT-066 



360P-UT-098 
360P-UT-2O7 



These programs can be received by ordering indi- 
vidually numbered program packages. Each program 
is shipped as a complete entity, in object form, ready 
to perform its function. Other bps Utility Programs 
have been reissued in the publication: IBM System/ 
360 Basic Programming Support, Card and Tape Util- 
ity Programs Specifications, C24-5026. These publica- 
tions support only the latest version of the program. 



The reader should be familiar with the information 
presented in the publications: IBM System/360 Basic 
Operating System, Programmer's Guide, C24-3372 and 
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support DASD 
Utility Program Operating Guide, C24-3392. For a list 
of associated publications, refer to the IBM System/ 
360 Bibliography, A22-6822. ( 80 pages ) 



C24-3364 IBM System/360 Basic 21 

Programming Support, Basic Operating 
System — Macro Definition Language 
(8K Tape) 

This reference publication describes the macro defini- 
tion language for the ibm Basic Operating System/360 
(8K Disk) and the ibm System/360 Basic Programming 
Support (8K Tape). The language described in this 
publication can be used to facilitate the writing of an 
assembler language program. 

The reader should be familiar with the information 
presented in these publications: IBM System/360 
Principles of Operation, Form A22-6821; IBM Basic 
Operating System/360 Assembler with Input/Output 
Macros (8K Disk), Form C24-3361; and IBM System/ 
360 Basic Programming Support Assembler with 
Input/Output Macros (8K Tape), Form C24-3355. (45 
pages) 



C24-3372 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 20 

System — Programmer's Guide 

This reference publication describes the ibm System/ 
360 Basic Operating System. The system is a set of 
control programs and processing programs provided 
for smaller configurations of the ibm System/360. 
Utilizing ibm 2311 Disk Storage for on-line program 
residence, ibm System/360 Basic Operating System 
provides stacked-job processing capability, controls 
all input/output, and provides for continuous opera- 
tion of all programs run in its environment. 

This Programmer's Guide includes descriptions of 
the control programs, service programs, and system 
facilities supported by ibm. A comprehensive intro- 
duction gives an over-all picture of the entire system. 
Detailed information is given on these major topics: 

1. Operation with the System Control Programs 

2. Using the System Service Programs 

3. Data Management 

The prerequisite for a thorough understanding of 
this manual is a basic knowledge of System/360 ma- 
chine concepts and instructions. 

For titles and abstracts of other associated publica- 
tions see the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. (174 pages) 



C24-3374 IBM System/360 Basic Programming 28 

Support Specifications — Report 

Program Generator (Card) 
This reference publication contains complete program- 
ming specifications for the ibm System/360 Report Pro- 
gram Generator (Card). Included are the basic func- 
tions of hpg for readers with unit record experience 
who are not familiar with rpg. (110 pages) 



C24-3377 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 33 

System— IBM 1401/1460 Timing 
Program for Sort/Merge Program 

This publication contains the specifications and operat- 
ing procedures for the ibm 1401 and 1460 timing pro- 
gram used to estimate the amount of time required to 
sort records with the ibm Basic Operating System/360 
8K Disk Sort/Merge program. 



The following information is included in this publi- 
cation: 

1. Minimum machine requirements for estimating 
times with this program. 

2. A description of the user-prepared information 
cards required to define the proposed sort operation. 

3. The procedure to follow for executing the timing 
program. 

The user of this publication should be familiar with 
IBM Basic Operating System/366 Sort/Merge Pro- 
gram (8K Disk), Form C24-3321. For a list of associated 
1401/1460 publications, see IBM 1401/1460 Bibliog- 
raphy, Form A24-1495. (13 pages) 



C24-3378 — IBM System/360 Basic Operating 37 

System Specifications — Autotest 

This reference publication describes in detail the test- 
ing services provided by Disk Autotest in the Basic 
Operating System — 8K Disk and the control cards 
necessary to use the services. The following services are 
discussed: autopatch, display, panel, the autotest card 
to tape (variable) utility, the normal and abnormal 
end of job dumps including the symbolic dump, testing 
immediately following an assembly, and separate as- 
semblies and tests. Special autotest requirements for 
job control are also presented. 

The reader should be familiar with IBM System/360 
Principles of Operation, Form A22-6821; IBM Basic 
Operating System/ 360 Programmer's Guide (8K Disk), 
Form C24-3372; IBM Basic Operating System/360 
Utility Programs (8K Disk), Form C24-3409; and IBM 
Basic Operating System/360 Assembler with Input/ 
Output Macros (8K Disk), Form C24-3361. (110 pages ) 



C24-3387 — IBM System/360 Basic Operating 28 

System Specifications — Report 
Program Generator Language 

This reference publication contains fundamentals of 
bpg programming and language specifications for the 
ibm Basic Operating System/360 Report Program Gen- 
erator. For information on the Basic Operating System 
that is beyond the purpose of this language publica- 
tion, see IBM Basic Operating System/360 Program- 
mer's Guide (8K Disk), Form C24-3372. (153 pages) 



C24-3391 IBM System/360 Basic 20 

Programming Support Basic Tape System 
Operating Guide 

Program Number: 360P-AS-091 
RPG Program Number: 360P-RG-201 
This reference publication discusses briefly the overall 
concepts of using the various programs in the Basic 
Tape System. It describes the function and operation 
of the Control Programs used in conjunction with the 
mM-supplied system tape or user's object program. A 
section listing messages provided by the programs or 
routines is included. System/ operator communication 
is discussed, and a section of reference charts for Sys- 
tem/360 coding is also included. 

Each individual program section gives the specific 
operating procedure for that particular program, sup- 
plying information such as: description of card decks, 
and procedures to be followed. 

Refer to the srl publication IBM System/360 Model 
30 Operator's Guide, Form A24-3373, for information 
about the operation of the System/360. For a list of 
other associated System/360 publications, see the IBM 
System/ 360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. ( 120 pages) 



IBM System/360 Bibliography 17 



C24-3392 IBM System/360 Basic 32 

Programming Support DASD Utility 
Programs Operating Guide 

This publication is intended to be used as a guide in 
operating the following direct access storage device 
(dasd) utility programs: 

PBOCRAM NAME ORDEH NUMBER 

Single-Transfer Utility Programs 

Card to Disk, Version 3 360P-UT-063 

Disk to Card, Version 3 360P-UT-064 

Disk to Disk, Version 3 360P-UT-067 

Disk to Printer, Version 3 360P-UT-073 

Disk to Tape, Version 3 360P-UT-065 

Tape to Disk, Version 3 360P-UT-066 

Special Purpose Utility Programs 
Alternate Track Assignment ( 2311 ) , 

Version 3 360P-UT-098 

16K Alternate Track Assignment 

(2311/2314), Version 1 360P-UT-207 

Alternate Track Assignment (2321), 

Version 1 360P-UT-212 

Clear Disk, Version 3 360P-UT-068 

Copy Data Cell to Tape, and Restore Tape 

to Data Cell, Version 1 360P-UT-071 

Copy Disk to Card, and Restore Card to 

Disk, Version 1 360P-UT-062 

Copy Disk to Disk, Version 1 360P-UT-072 

Copy Disk to Tape, and Restore Tape to 

Disk, Version 1 360P-UT-061 

Initialize Data Cell, Version 1 360P-UT-204 

Initialize Disk (2311), Version 4 360P-UT-069 

16K Initialize Disk (2311/2314), Version 1 360P-UT-206 
Multiple Disk to Printer, Version 2 360P-UT-203 

These programs can be received by ordering indi- 
vidually numbered program packages. Each program 
is shipped as a complete entity, in object form, ready to 
perform its function. Other bps utility programs have 
been reissued in the publication: IBM System/360 
Basic Programming Support, Card and Tape Utility 
Programs Operating Guide, Form C24-5027. These 
publications will support only the latest versions of the 
programs. 

The reader should be familiar with the information 
presented in the publications: IBM System / 360 Basic 
Programming Support, DASD Utility Programs Specifi- 
cations, Form C24-3363; IBM System/360 Basic Oper- 
ating System, Programmer's Guide, Form C24-3372; 
and IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form 
A22-6821. For a list of related publications, refer to the 
IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (70 
pages) 



C24-3396 IBM System/360 Basic 32 

Programming Support Universal 
Character Set Utility Program 
Operating Guide 

Program Number: 360P-UT-048 

This reference publication contains the Operating 
Guide for the Universal Character Set Utility Program 
used to load the read/write storage units in the ibm 
2821 Control Unit. Included in the manual are a 
description of the ucs program deck, control cards, 
system and deck preparation, error waits and options, 
and operating instructions. An Appendix contains re- 
lated information including standard train/ chain ar- 
rangements and the Extended Binary Coded Decimal 
Interchange Code. 

The user of this publication should be familiar with 
IBM 2821 Control Unit, Form A24-3312 and IBM 1403 
Printer, Form A24-3073. For a list of associated Sys- 
tem/360 publications, see the IBM System/360 Bibli- 
ography, Form A22-6822. (24 pages) 



C24-3398 IBM System/360 Basic 30 

Programming Support Input/Output 
1412/1419 Specifications and 
Operating Guide 

Program Number: 360P-IO-058 

This reference publication describes programming 
specifications and operating procedures for the Input/ 
Output control program supplied by ibm for System/ 
360 applications using the ibm 1412 and 1419 Magnetic 
Character Readers. Detailed information is given on 
the programming required for all i/o operations on 
these devices as well as for other services of the con- 
trol program. Also included are operator instructions 
and diagnostic messages. 

The reader should be familiar with the following 
publications: 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 

6821 
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, Basic 

Assembler Language, Form C28-6503 
IBM 1412 Magnetic Character Reader, Form A24- 

1421, or 
IBM 1219 Reader Sorter, IBM 1419 Magnetic Char- 
acter Reader, Form A24-1499. (IBM 1419 Model 
32 Magnetic Character Reader, Forms A19-0004 
and A19-0023.) 
IBM System/360 Model 30 Operators Guide, Form 

A24-3373 
For information pertaining to Job Control cards, 
refer to either: 
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, Basic 
Tape System, Programmers Guide, Form C24- 
3354, or 
IBM System/360 Basic Operating System Program- 
mer's Guide, Form C24-3372. 
Other related ibm publications are referenced by 
form number and briefly described in IBM System/ 360 
Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (56 pages) 



C24-3408 IBM System/360 Basic 30 

Programming Support Input/ Output 1231 
Specifications and Operating Guide 

Program Number: 360P-IO-O60 

This reference publication contains a description of the 
Input/ Output program for the ibm 1231 Optical Mark 
Page Reader, and information concerning the instruc- 
tions required to use the 1231 as an input device to an 
ibm System/360. 

This reference publication also describes operating 
procedures for the Input/ Ouput 1231 program. This 
program is used with the tbm 1231 Optical Mark Page 
Reader attached to an ibm System/360 Model 25, 30, 
40, 50, or 65. 

The reader should be familiar with the information 
presented in these publications: IBM System/ 360 Prin- 
ciples of Operation, Form A22-6821, IBM System/360 
Basic Programming Support, Basic Tape System Pro- 
grammer's Guide, Form C24-3354, and IBM System/ 
36Q Basic Operating System Programmer's Guide, Form 
C24-3372. The publication IBM 1231 Nl Optical Mark 
Page Reader, Form A21-9031, contains information that 
will be helpful to the 1231 programmer. For a com- 
plete list of associated System/360 publications, see the 
IBM System/ 360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (48 
pages) 



C24-3409 IBM System/ 360 Basic Operating 32 

System Utility Programs Specifications 

This reference publication describes the ibm System/ 
360 Basic Operating System Utility Programs. The pro- 
grams described are: 



group 2 
Program Number 

360B-UT-301 
Card-to-Tape Program 
Disk-to-Tape Program 
Tape-to-Card Program 
Tape-to-Disk Program 
Tape-to-Printer Program 
Tape-to-Tape Program 
Tape Compare Program 



group 1 
Program Number 

360B-UT-300 
Card-to-Disk Program 
Card-to-Printer and/or 

Punch Program 
Disk-to-Card Program 
Disk-to-Disk Program 
Disk-to-Printer Program 
Clear Disk Program 
VTOC Display Program 

These programs are ordered by the above group pro- 
gram numbers and are distributed on the disk pack. 

The reader should be familiar with the information 
presented in the publications IBM System/360 Basic 
Operating System, Programmer's Guide, Form C24- 
3372, IBM System/360 Basic Operating System, As- 
sembler with Input/Output Macros, Form C24-3361, 
IBM System/360 Basic Operating System, Operating 
Guide: Control Programs and Assembler, Form C24- 
3450. 

The reader will find error messages for these utility 
programs in IBM System/360 Basic Operating System, 
Operating Guide: Operator Messages, Form C24-5024. 

For a list of related publications refer to the IBM 
System/ 360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (68 pages) 



C24-3413 IBM System/360 Basic 33 

Programming Support Operating 
Guide — Sort/Merge Programs (8K Tape) 

Program Numbers: 

360P-SM-043 (one-channel) 

360-SM-044 (two-channel) 

This reference publication contains the following in- 
formation: 1. The minimum machine requirements for 
sorting or merging records with the 8K Tape Sort/ 
Merge Program, 2. A description of the program 
packages, 3. A description of the procedure to follow 
when modifying the program decks, 4. The instructions 
for running on 8K Tape Sort/Merge Program, 5. The 
programmed messages that can occur while the pro- 
gram is being run. ( 26 pages ) 



C24-3414 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 21 

Operating Systems Assembler Language 

This reference publication contains specifications for 
the ibm System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems 
Assembler Language ( including macro instructions and 
conditional assembly facilities). 

The assembler language is a symbolic programming 
language used to write programs for the ibm System/ 
360. The language provides a convenient means for 
representing the machine instructions and related data 
necessary to program the ibm System/360. The ibm 
System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems Assem- 
bler Programs process the language and provide 
auxiliary functions useful in the preparation and docu- 
mentation of a program, and include facilities for 
processing macro instructions. 

Part 1 of this publication is an introduction to the 
assembler language. 

Part 2 describes the basic functions of the assembler 
language. 

Part 3 describes the conditional assembly and macro 
faculties in the assembler language. (144 pages) 



C24-3417 IBM System/360 Basic 37 

Programming Support Operating 
Guide — Autotest 

This reference publication contains information the 
operator must know to test an object program using the 
8K Tape Autotest Program. Autotest can be executed 
only on a machine with a minimum of 16K positions of 
main storage. 



18 



The reader should be familiar with the ibm Sys- 
tem/360 publications: IBM System/ 360 Basic Pro- 
gramming Support Autotest (8K Tape), Form C24- 
3343; IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support 
Operating Guide: Basic Tape System (8K), Form 
C24-3391; and IBM System/360 Model 30 Operators 
Guide, Form A24-3373. (16 pages) 



C24-3418 IBM System/360 Basic 28 

Programming Support Report Program 
Generator Language Specifications 
(8KTape) 

This reference publication contains complete pro- 
gramming specifications for the ibm System/360 Re- 
port Program Generator (8K Tape). Included are the 
basic functions of bpg for readers with tape experience 
who are not familiar with bpg. For more detailed in- 
formation regarding the generation of system tapes 
and input/output facilities provided, refer to the pub- 
lication IBM System/ 360 Basic Programming Support 
Programmers Guide (8K Tape), Form C24-3354. (137 
pages) 



C24-3420 IBM System/360 Basic 20 

Programming Support, Basic Operating 
System, Tape Operating System, 
and Disk Operating System — Programming 
Systems Summary 
This publication provides a general description of the 
functions, capabilities, and applications of program- 
ming support for ibm System/ 360 with 8K, 16K, 24K, 
and 32K main storage. Basic Programming Support 
consists of programs and programming aids for small 
card and tape configurations. Basic Operating System 
is an 8K disk-resident system that provides greater 
capabilities. Tape Operating System and Disk Oper- 
ating System are, respectively, tape-resident and disk- 
resident systems requiring at least 16K main storage, 
but providing additional facilities beyond those of 
Basic Operating System. With additionaljnain storage, 
these latter systems also provide multiprogramming 
and telecommunications facilities. 

For a list of associated publications and their ab- 
stracts, refer to the IBM System/360 Bibliography, 
Form A22-6822. (52 pages) 



C24-3427 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 30 

System Data Management Concepts 

This reference publication contains a discussion of the 
data management facilities inherent in the Disk Oper- 
ating System. It describes the file formats, labeling 
procedures, and access methods available with the 
system. There is also a general section describing the 
design of the direct-access storage devices supported. 

The following publications are recommended as 
prerequisite readings: IBM System/360 Principles of 
Operation, Form A22-6821, and IBM System/360 Disk 
Operating System, System Control and System Service 
Programs, Form C24-5036. 

Other related publications are: IBM System/360 
Disk Operating System Supervisor and Input /Output 
Macros, Form C24-5037, IBM System/360 Disk and 
Tape Operating Systems Assembler Specifications, 
Form C24-3414, and Glossary for Information Proc- 
essing, Form C20-8089. 

For a List of associated System/360 publications, 
refer to IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22- 
6822. (68 pages) 



C24-3430 IBM System/360 Tape Operating 30 

System — Data Management Concepts 

This reference publication contains a discussion of the 
data management facilities inherent in the Tape Oper- 
ating System. It describes the Input/Output Control 
System (iocs), the file formats, and the labeling pro- 
cedures available with the system. 

The following publications are" recommended as pre- 
requisite readings : 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 

6821 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, System 
Control and System Service Programs, Form C24- 
5034 
Other related publications are: 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, Supervisor 

and Input/Output Macros, Form C24-5035 
IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems, 

Assembler Specifications, Form C24-3414 
Glossary for Information Processing, Form C20-8089 
For a list of associated publications, see the IBM 
System/ 360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (36 pages) 



C24-3433 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 24 

Operating Systems COBOL Language 
Specifications 

Program Numbers: 

360N-CB-452 (COBOL DOS) 

360M-CB-402 (COBOL TOS) 
Cobol (Common Business Oriented Language) is a 
programming language, similar to English, that is used 
for commercial data processing. It was developed by 
the Conference of Data Systems Languages (codasyl). 

This publication provides the programmer with rules 
for writing programs in cobol for ibm System/ 360 Disk 
and Tape Operating Systems. Users unacquainted with 
cobol should read the programmed instruction text- 
book COBOL Program Fundamentals, Form R29-0205, 
with its reference handbook, Form R29-0206. 

The titles and abstracts of related publications are 
listed in the IBM System/ 360 Bibliography, Form A22- 
6822. (140 pages) 



C24-3437 IBM System/360 Basic 30 

Programming Support Input/ Output 1418/ 
1 428 Specifications and Operating Guide 

Program Number: 360P-IO-059 

This publication describes the input/output 1418/1428 
program (i/o 1418/1428 Program) supplied by ibm 
for System/360 applications using the ibm 1418 or 1428 
Optical Character Readers. The i/o 1418/1428 Pro- 
gram provides complete interruption-handling capabil- 
ity, controls all input/output, and controls a document 
buffer for maximum throughput. This reference publi- 
cation also describes operating procedures for the 
Input/ Output 1418/1428 program. 

The reader should be familiar with the information 
presented in the following publications : 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 

6821 
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, Basic 
Assembler and Basic Utility Programs (Card) 
Specifications and Operating Guide, Form C28- 
6503 
IBM 1418 Optical Reader, IBM 1428 Alphameric 

Optical Reader, Form A24-1473 
IBM System/360 Model 30 Operator's Guide, Form 
A24-3373 



For information pertaining to job control cards, refer 
to either publication: 
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, Pro- 
grammers Guide, Form C24-3354, or 
IBM System/360 Basic Operating System, Program- 
mer's Guide, Form C24-3372 
Other related ibm publications are referenced by 
form number and briefly described in IBM System/ 
360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (62 pages) 



C24-3438 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 33 

Operating Systems Tape Sort/Merge 
Program — Specifications 

Program Numbers: 

360M-SM-400 

360N-SM-400 
This publication explains the following: 

1. Minimum machine requirements. 

2. Program capabilities. 

3. Required control statements. 

4. User-written routines. 

The reader should be familiar with these publica- 
tions: 

IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, Data 
Management Concepts, Form C24-3430 

IBM 1401/1460 Timing Programs for IBM System/ 
360 Disk and Tape Operating System, Tape Sort/ 
Merge Program, Form C24-3439 

IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, Perform- 
ance Estimates, Form C24-5020 

IBM System/360 Tape Operating System; System 
Control and System Service Programs, Form C24- 
3431 

(65 pages) 



C24-3439 IBM 1401/1460 Timing Program 33 

for IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 
Operating Systems Tape Sort/Merge 
Program 

Program Numbers: 

1401-LM410 (2401-2404) 

1401-LM-012 (2415) 
This publication contains the specifications and oper- 
ating procedures for the ibm 1401 and 1460 timing 
program used to estimate the amount of time required 
to sort tape records with the ibm System/360 Disk 
Operating System Tape Sort/ Merge program or the 
ibm System/ 360 Tape Operating System Tape Sort/ 
Merge Program. 

The following information is included in this publi- 
cation: 

1. Minimum machine requirements for estimating 
times with these programs. 

2. A description of the user-prepared information 
cards required to define the proposed sort operation. 

3. The procedure to follow for executing the timing 
program. 

The user of this publication should be familiar with 
IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems, 
Tape Sort /Merge Program Specifications, Form C24- 
3438. For a list of associated 1401/1460 publications, 
see the IBM 1401/1460 Bibliography, Form A24-1495. 
For a list of associated System/360 publications, see 
the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. 
(16 pages) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 19 



C24-3441 IBM System/360 Tape Operating 37 

System — Autotest Specifications 

This reference publication describes the testing serv- 
ices provided by the ibm System/360 Tape Operating 
System Autotest program. Programmer-oriented diag- 
nostic messages are included in this publication, as 
well as formats and examples of control cards for both 
job control and Autotest. 

Refer to the following ibm System/ 360 publications 
for related information: 

Principles of Operation, Form A22-6821 

Disk and Tape Operating Systems Assembler Speci- 
fications, Form C24-3414 

Disk and Tape Operating Systems Utility Programs 
Specifications, Form C24-3465 

Tape Operating System, System Control and System 
Service Programs, Form C24-3431 

Tape Operating System Operating Guide, Form 
C24-5021 

These and other bbm publications, along with a brief 
description of the content of each, are listed in the 
IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (52 



C24-3444 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 33 

System Sort/Merge Program Specifications 

Program Number: 360N-SM-450 

This publication describes the ibm System/360 Disk 
Operating System Sort/Merge Program and contains 
the following information: 

1. Minimum machine requirements for sorting or 
merging records with this program. 

2. Program capabilities. * 

3. A description of the control statements required 
to define specific sort or merge operations. 

4. A description of the facilities provided for insert- 
ing user-written routines into the program. 

The following publications are prerequisites: 

IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Data Man- 
agement Concepts, Form C24-3427 

IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, System 
Control and System Service Programs, Form C24- 
5036 

IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Super- 
visor and Input/Output Macros, Form C24-5037. 

IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, System 
Generation and Maintenance, Form C24-5033. 

For a list of associated publications and their ab- 
stracts, see the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. (76 pages) 



C24-3445 IBM 1401/1460 Timing Program for 33 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System 
Sort/Merge Program 

Program Number: Wl-LM-011 
This publication contains the specifications and operat- 
ing procedures for the bbm 1401 and 1460 timing pro- 
gram used to estimate the amount of time required 
to sort records with the bbm System/360 Disk Operat- 
ing System Sort/Merge program. 

The following information is included in this pub- 
lication: ■■"-■'■'■'■"■ 

1. Minimum machine requirements for estimating 
times with this program. 

2. A description of the user-prepared information 
cards required to define the proposed sort operation. 

3. The procedure to follow for executing the timing 
program. 



The user of this publication should be familiar with 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Sort/Merge 
Program Specifications, C24-3444. For a list of asso- 
ciated 1401/1460 publications, see IBM 1401/1460 Bib- 
liography, A24-1495. For a list of associated System/ 
360 publications, see IBM System/360 Bibliography, 
A22-6822. (16 pages) 



C24-3450 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 20 

System Operating Guide 

Program Numbers: 

Basic Control Program 360B-CL-302 

Consecutive Processing Macros 360B-IO-303 
Indexed Sequential File Management 

System (ISFMS) Macros 360B-IO-304 

Direct Access Method (DAM) Macros 360B-IO-305 

Assembler 360B-AS-309 

Autotest 360B-PT-306 

Report Program Generator (KPG) 360B-RG-307 

Sort/Merge 360B-SM-308 

rr ,. t, [360B-UT-3O0 

Uttltty Programs 1360B-UT-301 

This publication is divided into five sections: 

Section 1 presents the operating procedures for the 
ibm System/ 360 Basic Operating System Control Pro- 
grams and Assembler. 

Section 2 presents the operating procedures for test- 
ing an object program using the ibm System/ 360 bos 
Autotest program. 

Section 3 presents the operating procedures for pro- 
grams written in the ibm System/360 bos Report Pro- 
gram Generator (bpg) language. 

Section 4 presents the operating procedures for using 
the ibm System/360 bos Sort/ Merge program and a 
description of the procedure to follow when cataloging 
the bos Sort/Merge program and user routines into the 
disk-resident core-image library. 

Section 5 presents the operating procedures for both 
groups of utility programs in the bbm System/360 Basic 
Operating System. 

For information about the operation of the System/ 
360, see IBM System/360 Model 30 Operator's Guide, 
Form A24-3373. For other related publications, see 
IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (170 



C24-3464 IBM System/360 Basic Programming 28 
Support Operating Guide — Report 
Program Generator (Card) 

This reference publication describes the operating pro- 
cedures for the ebm System/360 Basic Programming 
Support, Report Program Generator (Card). It contains 
this information: 

1. A description of the procedure to follow when 
using the Card bpg program to produce a variety of 
business reports. 

2. The operating considerations for the Card bpg 
program. 

3. The programmed messages that may be printed 
or displayed during generation or execution of the 
object program. 

The publication IBM System/ 360 Model 30 Oper- 
ator's Guide, Form A24-3373, is a prerequisite. (28 
pages) 



C24-3465 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 32 

Operating. Systems Utility Programs 
Specifications 

This reference publication describes the ibm System/ 
360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems Utility Pro- 
grams. The programs described are: 



Disk to Card 
Disk to Disk 
Disk to Printer 
Initialize Disk 
VTOC Display 



Tape Compare 
Tape to Data Cell 
Tape to Disk 
Tape to Printer 
Tape to Tape 

Data Cell to Printer 
Disk to Data Cell 



360N-UT-461 

Assign Alternate Track-Disk 

Card to Printer and/or Punch 

Card to Disk 

Clear Disk 

Copy-Disk to Disk 

Copy and Restore-Disk to Card 

360N-UT-462 
Card to Tape 

Copy and Restore-Disk to Tape 
Data Cell to Tape 
Disk to Tape 
Tape to Card 

360N-VT-463 
Clear Data Cell 
Data Cell to Data Cell 
Data Cell to Disk 

The reader should be familiar with these ibm Sys- 
tem/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems publica- 
tions: IBM System/ 360 Tape Operating System, Su- 
pervisor and Input/Output Macros, Form C24-5035; 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Supervisor 
and Input/Output Macros, Form C24-5037; IBM Sys- 
tem/360 Tape Operating System, Data Management 
Concepts, Form C24-3430-, IBM System/360 Disk Op- 
erating System, Data Management Concepts, Form 
C24-3427; IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, 
System Control and System Service Programs, Form 
C24-5034; IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, 
System Control and System Service Programs, Form 
C24-5036. 

For titles and abstracts of other associated publica- 
tions, see the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. (140 pages) 



C24-5015 IBM System/360 Tape Operating 31 

System — System Generation and 
Maintenance 

This reference publication contains specifications and 
operating procedures used to generate an installation- 
tailored Tape Operating System. Supervisor macro in- 
structions are used to describe facilities that are re- 
quired within the system. This publication also con- 
tains sample problems that can be used to test the 
generated system. 
The following publications are useful references: 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, System 
Control and System Service Programs, Form C24- 
5034. 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, Super- 
visor and Input /Output Macros, Form C24-5035. 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, Perform- 
ance Estimates, Form C24-5020. 
IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems, 

Utility Programs Specifications, Form C24-3465. 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, Operating 

Guide, Form C24-5021. 
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, Card 
and Tape Utility Programs Specifications, Form 
C24-5026. 
For titles and abstracts of other associated publica- 
tions, see the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. ( 116 pages) 



C24-5020 IBM System/360 Tape Operating 20 

System Performance Estimates 

This reference publication contains main storage, ex- 
ternal storage, and timing estimates for the Tape 
Operating System. The storage requirements are not 
sensitive to system configuration, but the timing esti- 
mates are. Therefore, representative system configura- 
tions are used to illustrate timing variances. 



20 



The timing discussion includes estimates for Job 
Control, Linkage Editor, Assembler, cobol, Fortran, 
pl/ i, and bpg. Time requirements for processing attn 
commands, foreground program initiation, and the 
task selection mechanism are included. Examples illus- 
trate the use of the timing data to calculate total 
job time. 

Belated publications are: 

IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, System 
Control and System Service Programs, Form C24- 
5034. 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, Super- 
visor and Input / Output Macros, Form C24-5035. 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, System 

Generation and Maintenance, Form C24-5015. 
For titles and abstracts of other associated publica- 
tions, see the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. (68 pages) 



C24-5021 IBM System/360 Tape Operating 20 

System — Operating Guide 

Program Numbers: 
Assembler 360M-AS-465 

COBOL 360M-CB-402 

System Control and Basic IOCS 360M-CL-405 

FORTRAN TV 360M-FO-409 

PL/I 360M-PL-410 

Consecutive Tape IOCS 360M-IO-404 

Compiler I/O Modules 360M-IO-412 

Optical Character Reader IOCS 360M-IO-417 

Autotest 360M*PT-407 

Report Program Generator ( RPG) 360M-RG-408 
Tape Sort/Merge 360M-SM-400 

Supervisor (6K) 360M-SV-413 

Supervisor (8K) 360M-SV-414 

Utilities 360M-UT-403 

MPS Utility Macros 360M-UT-4U 

This reference publication describes the operating pro- 
cedures to be followed when executing jobs in a multi- 
programming environment using the Tape Operating 
System. Topics discussed in this publication include 
stacked-job processing capability, multiprogramming, 
and related functions the operator must perform fo 
initiate system operation and communicate with the 
system. A quick reference listing of all system-to-oper- 
ator messages is included. 

For a description of the concepts of the Tape Oper- 
ating System, see IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 
Operating Systems Concepts and Facilities, Form C24- 
5030. Information concerning the operation of the 
System/360 can be found in IBM System/360 Model 
30 Operator's Guide, Form A24-3373, or a correspond- 
ing publication. For a list of other associated System/ 
360 publications, see the IBM System/360 Bibliogra- 
phy, Form A22-6822. ( 124 pages) 



C24-5022 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 
System — Operating Guide 

Program Numbers: 



20 



System Control and Basic IOCS 


360N-CL453 


Supervisor (lOK)') 


360N-SV-473 


Supervisor (6K) [2311 


360N-SV-474 


Supervisor (8K) J 


360N-SV-47S 


Supervisor (8K) 1 


360N-SV-486 


Supervisor (10K) \2314 


360N-SV-487 


Supervisor (12K)\ 


360N-SV-488 


Direct Access Method ( DAM ) 




Macros 


360N-IO-454 


Consecutive Disk IOCS 


360N-IO-45S 


Consecutive Tape IOCS 


360N-IO-456 


Indexed Sequential File Management 




System (ISFMS) Macros 


360N-IO-457 



Consecutive Paper Tape IOCS 360N-IO-458 

Compiler I/O Modules 360N-IO-476 

Magnetic Character Reader IOCS 360N-IO-477 
Optical Character Reader IOCS 360N -10-478 

Group 1 Utilities ( Disk and Unit 

Record) 360N-UT-461 

Group 2 Utilities ( Magnetic Tape) 360N-UT-462 
Group 3 Utilities ( Data Cell) 360N-UT-463 

Multiprogramming Support Utility 

Macros 360N-UT-471 

Vocabulary File Utility Program 360N-UT-472 

Tape Sort/Merge 360N-SM-400 

Disk Sort/Merge 360N-SM-450 

Assembler 360N-AS-465 

Report Program Generator 360N-RG-460 

COBOL 360N-CB-452 

COBOL and PL/I DASD Macros 360N-CB-468 
FORTRAN IV 360N-FO-451 

Autotest 360N-PT-459 

PL/I 360N-PL-464 

Basic Telecommunications Access 

Method (BT AM) 360N-CQ-469 

Queued Telecommunications Access 
Method (QTAM) 360N-CQ-470 

This reference publication describes the operating pro- 
cedures to be followed when executing jobs in a multi- 
programming environment using the Disk Operating 
System. Topics discussed in this reference publication 
include: stacked-job processing capability, multipro- 
gramming, both basic and queued telecommunications 
capability, and functions the operator must perform to 
initiate system operation and to communicate with the 
system. A quick reference listing of all system-to- 
operator messages is included. 

Prerequisite publications are: IBM System/360 Disk 
and Tape Operating Systems, Concepts and Facilities, 
Form C24-503O and IBM System/360 Model 30 Oper- 
ator's Guide, Form A24-3373 (or a corresponding 
publication. ( 180 pages ) 

C24-5024 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 20 

System Operator Messages 

Program Numbers: 

Basic Control Program 360B-CL-302 

Consecutive Processing Macros 360B-IO-303 

Indexed Sequential File Management 

System (ISFMS) Macros 360B-IO-304 

STR Macros 360B-IO-310 

BSC Macros 360B-CQ-312 

Utilities— Group I 360B-UT-300 

Utilities-^Group II 360B-UT-301 

Sort/Merge 360B-SM-308 

Assembler 360B-AS-309 

Report Program Generator 360B-RG-307 

Autotest 360B-PT-3O6 

This reference publication lists, in numeric and alpha- 
betic order, all messages issued to the operator by die 
programs of the ibm System/ 360 Basic Operating Sys- 
tem. 

For a list of associated publications and their ab- 
stracts, see IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22- 
6822. (92 pages) 

C24-5025 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 24 

Operating Systems — COBOL 
Programmer's Guide 

This publication is designed to aid the cobol program- 
mer. Its purpose is to provide guidance and examples 
in the techniques of cobol programming in the Disk 
and Tape Operating Systems, and to expose the user 
to the components of the Control Program and facili- 
ties of ibm System/360 Disk and Tape Operating 
Systems. 

The prerequisites for a thorough understanding of 
the cobol language are: 



IBM System/ 360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems 

COBOL Language Specifications, Form C24-3433 
Publications closely related to this one are: 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, System 

Control and System Service Programs, Form C24- 

3428 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, System 

Control and System Service Programs, Form C24- 

3431 
IBM System/ 360 Disk Operating System, Supervisor 

and Input /Output Macros, Form C24-3429 
IBM System/ 360 Disk Operating System, Supervisor 

and Input /Output Macros, Form C24-3432 
IBM System/ 360 Disk Operating System, Data Man- 
agement Concepts, Form C24-3427 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, Data 

Management Concepts, Form C24-3430 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, System 

Generation and Maintenance, Form C24-5033 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, System 

Generation and Maintenance, Form C24-5015 
IBM System/ 360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 

6821 

(160 pages) 



C24-5026 IBM System/360 Basic Programming 32 
Support Specifications — Card and Tape 
Utility Programs 

This reference publication describes the ibm System/ 
360 Basic Programming Support Utility Programs. The 
programs described are: 

Card to Printer and/or Punch 360P-UT-050, Version 2 

Card to Tape 360P-UT-051, Version 2 

Tape to Card 360P-UT-053, Version 2 

Tape to Printer 360P-UT-052, Version 2 

Tape to Tape 360P-UT-O54, Version 2 

The preceding programs can be received by ordering 
individually numbered program packages. Each pro- 
gram is shipped as a complete entity, in object form, 
ready to perform its function. 

The reader should be familiar with the information 
presented in the publications: IBM System/ 360 Basic 
Programming Support, Programmer's Guide (8KTape), 
C24-3354; IBM System/360 Basic Programming Sup- 
port Operating Guide: Card and Utility Programs, 
Form C24-5027. (48 pages) 

C24-5027 IBM System/360 Basic 32 

Programming Support Card and Tape 
Utility Programs Operating Guide 

This reference publication contains the guidelines to 
operate the following Card and Tape utility programs: 



SPECIAL-PURPOSE UnLITT 
PROGRAMS 

Initialize Tape 

360P-UT-057, Version 3 
Multiple Utility 

360P-UT-055, Version 2 
Storage Print 

360P-UT-056, Version 1 
Tape Compare 

360P-UT-202, Version 1 



SINGLE-TRANSFER UTILITY 
PROGRAMS 

Card to Printer and/or Punch 

360P-UT-050, Version 3 
Card to Tape 

360P-UT-051, Version 3 
Tape to Card 

360P-UT-053, Version 3 
Tape to Printer 
360P-UT-052, Version 3 
Tape to Tape 

360P-UT-054, Version 3 

These programs can be received by ordering indi- 
vidually numbered program packages. Each program 
is shipped as a complete entity, in object form, ready 
to perform its function. 

The reader should be familiar with these IBM Sys- 
tem/360 publications: IBM System/360 Basic Pro- 
gramming Support Specifications: Utility Programs, 
Form C24-5026; IBM System/360 Principles of Opera- 
tion, Form A22-6821; and other manuals associated 
with his device configuration. 

For a list of related publications and their abstracts, 
see the IBM System/ 360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. 
(44 pages) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 21 



C24-5029 IBM System/360 Operating System 24 
COBOL (E) Programmer's Guide 

This reference publication describes how to compile, 
linkage edit, and execute a cobol (E-Level Subset) 
program. It also describes the output of compilation 
and execution, how to make optimal use of the com- 
piler and a load module, and compiler and load mod- 
ule restrictions. 

The corequisite to this publication is IBM System/ 
360 Operating System: COBOL Language, Form C28- 
6516. 
Other publications related to this one are: 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 

6821. 
IBM System/360 Operating System: Control Pro- 
gram Services, Form C28-6541. 
IBM System/360 Operating System: Job Control 

Language, Form C28-6539. 
IBM System/360 Operating System: Utilities, Form 

C28-6586. 
IBM System/ 360 Operating System: Linkage Editor, 

Form C28-6538. 
IBM System/ 360 Operating System: Control Pro- 
gram Messages and Completion Codes, Form 
C28-6608. 
For a list of other associated System/360 publica- 
tions, see the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. ( 154 pages) 



C24-5030 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 20 

Operating System — Concepts and Facilities 

This reference publication describes the concepts of 
Disk and Tape Operating Systems and guides the 
planner in the use of their various facilities. It de- 
scribes the components in the Disk and Tape Operat- 
ing Systems and explains the function of each. The 
last section of the publication discusses the design, 
preparation, and execution of programs. 

A suggested prerequisite reading is IBM System/ 360 
Basic Programming Support, Basic Operating System, 
Tape Operating System, and Disk Operating System, 
Programming Systems Summary, Form C24-3420. 

For titles and abstracts of other associated publica- 
tions, see the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. (40 pages) 



C24-5032 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 20 

System — Performance Estimates 

This reference publication contains main storage, ex- 
ternal storage, and timing estimates for the Disk Op- 
erating System. The storage requirements are not 
sensitive to system configuration, but the timing esti- 
mates are. Therefore, representative system configura- 
tions illustrate timing variances. 

The timing discussion includes estimates for Job 
Control, Linkage Editor, Assembler, cobol, pl/i, 
Fortran, and hpg. Time requirements for processing 
attn routines, Single Program Initiation, and the task 
selection mechanism are included. Examples illustrate 
the use of the timing data to calculate total job time. 

Belated publications are: 

IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, System 
Control and System Service Programs, Form 
C24-5036 

IBM System/ 360 Disk Operating System, Supervisor 
and Input/Output Macros, Form C24-5037 

IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, System 
Generation and Maintenance, Form C24-5033 

For titles and abstracts of other associated publica- 
tions see the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. (124 pages) 



C24-5033 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 31 

System — System Generation and 
Maintenance . 

This reference publication contains specifications and 
operating procedures used to generate an installation- 
tailored Disk Operating System. Supervisor macro in- 
structions are used to describe facilities that are re- 
quired within the system. This publication also con- 
tains sample problems that can be used to test the 
generated system. 
The following publications are useful references: 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Operating 

Guide, Form C24-5022 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, System 
Control and System Service Programs, Form C24- 
5036 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Super- 
visor and Input/Output Macros, Form C24-5037 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Perform- 
ance Estimates, Form C24-5032 
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, 
DASD Utility Programs Specifications, Form C24- 
3363 
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, 
DASD Utility Programs Operating Guide, Form 
C24-3392 
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, Dis- 
tribution Program Specifications and Operating 
Guide, Form C21-5001 
IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems, 

Utility Programs Specifications, Form C24-3465 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Vocabu- 
lary File Utility Programs for IBM 7772 Audio 
Response Unit, Form C27-6924 
For titles and abstracts of other associated publica- 
tions, see the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. (268 pages) 



C24-5034 IBM System/360 Tape Operating 36 

System — System Control and System 
Service Programs 

This reference publication describes the ibm System/ 
360 Tape Operating System. The system is a set of con- 
trol programs and processing programs provided for 
the ibm System/360. Using ebm 2400-Series Magnetic 
Tape Units for on-line program residence, ibm System/ 
360 Tape Operating System provides stacked-job proc- 
essing capability, multiprogramming capability, con- 
trols all input/output, and provides for continuous 
operation of all programs run in its environment. De- 
tailed information is given in this publication on these 
major topics. • 

1. Operation with the System Control Program: 

a. System Organization 

b. Supervisor Functions 

c. Job Control Program. 

2. Using the System Service Programs: 

a. Linkage Editor 

b. Librarian. 

The prerequisite for a thorough understanding of 
this publication is a basic knowledge of System/360 
machine concepts. The publications most closely re- 
lated to this one are: 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 

6821 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System: Data 

Management Concepts, Form C24-3430 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System: Supervisor 

and Input/Output Macros, Form C24-5035 
IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems: 
Assembler Specifications, Form C24-3414 

(124 pages) 



C24-5035 IBM System/360 Tape Operating 30 

System — Supervisor and Input/Output 
Macros 

This reference publication contains planning informa- 
tion about the Input/Output Control System macro 
instructions and the Supervisor macro instructions for 
use with ibm System/360 Tape Operating System 
(tos). ibm publications that provide related informa- 
tion are: , 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 

6821 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, Data 

Management Concepts, Form C24-3430 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, System 
Control and System Service Programs, Form C24- 
5034 
IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems, 

Assembler Specifications, Form C24-3414 
For titles and abstracts of other associated publica- 
tions see IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22- 
6822. (140 pages) 



C24-5036 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 36 

System — System Control and System 
Service Programs 

This reference publication describes the ibm System/ 
360 Disk Operating System. The system is a set of 
control programs and processing programs provided 
for ibm System/ 360. Using ibm 2311 Disk Storage or 
ibm 2314 Direct Access Storage for on-line program 
residence, the ibm System/360 Disk Operating System 
provides stacked-job processing capability, multipro- 
gramming and telecommunications capability, con- 
trols all input/ output, and provides for continuous 
operation of all programs run in its environment. De- 
tailed information is given in this publication on these 
major topics. 

1. Operation with the System Control Program: 

a. System Organization 

b. Supervisor Functions 

c. Job Control Program. 

2. Using the System Service Programs: 

a. Linkage Editor 

b. Librarian. 

The prerequisite for a thorough understanding of 
this publication is a basic knowledge of System/360 
machine concepts. The publications most closely re- 
lated to this one are: 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form 

A22-6821 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Data 

Management Concepts, Form C24-3427 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System Supervisor 

and Input/Output Macros, Form C24-5037 
IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems, 
Assembler Specifications, Form C24-3414. 

(168 pages) 



C24-5037 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 30 

System — Supervisor and Input/Output 
Macros 

This reference publication contains information about 
the Input/Output Control System macro instructions 
and the Supervisor macro instructions for use with the 
ibm System/360 Disk Operating System (dos). ibm 
publications that provide related information are: 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 

6821 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Data 

Management Concepts, Form C24-3427 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, System 
Control and System Service Programs, Form C24- 
5036 



22 



IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems, 

Assembler Specifications, Form C24-3414 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, System 

Generation and Maintenance, Form C24-5033 
For titles and abstracts of other associated publica- 
tions, see the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. (232 pages) 



C24-5038 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 25 

Operating Systems — Basic FORTRAN IV 
Programmer's Guide 

Program Numbers: 

360N-FO-451 

360M-FO-409 
This publication describes the procedures for com- 
piling and executing Fortran rv programs under con- 
trol of the Disk Operating System or Tape Operating 
System. Its purpose is to guide the programmer with 
examples and techniques of the Basic Fortran rv lan- 
guage. It also exposes the user to the components of 
the control program and facilities of the ihm System/ 
360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems. (98 pages) 



C24-5039 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 24 

System — COBOL DASD Macros 

This publication provides the programmer with rules 
for using dasd macros to handle input/output opera- 
tions for direct access or indexed sequential files. The 
programmer should be familiar with: 
COBOL: General Information Manual, Form F28- 

8053 
IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating System, 
COBOL Language Specifications, Form C24-3433 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Data 

Management Concepts, Form C24-3427 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Supervisor 
and Input /Output Macros, Form C24-3429 

(24 pages) 



C24-5041 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 20 

System Master Index 

This index is a consolidation of the indexes of all pro- 
gramming publications for the em Basic Operating 
System (bos). Each index entry is accompanied by the 
abbreviated publication title, the subject code of the 
publication within the ibm System Reference Library, 
and the publication form number. Appendix A contains 
a list of the bos publications, by title and form number, 
used to compile this consolidated index. Appendix B 
contains the publication plan for the Basic Operating 
System. 

For a complete list of all ibm System/360 publica- 
tions (machine manuals, all programming support, 
etc.) by form number and subject code, and with the 
abstract of each publication, see the IBM System/360 
Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (52 pages) 



C24-5042 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 32 

Operating Systems — Utility Macros 
Specifications 

This reference publication describes Multiprogram- 
ming Support (mps) Utility Macro Instructions for 
use with the Disk and Tape Operating Systems. The 
reader should be familiar with the following publica- 
tions: 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, System 

Control and System Service Programs, Form 

C24-5036 



IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, System 
Control and System Service Programs, Form C24- 
5034 

IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Super- 
visor and Input/Output Macros, Form C24-5037 

IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, Super- 
visor and Input/Output Macros, Form C24-5035 

IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems 
Assembler Specifications, Form C24-3414. 

(148 pages) 



C24-5059 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 29 

System PL/I DASD Macros 

This publication provides the programmer with rules 

for using dasd macros with the ibm 2311 Disk Storage 

Drive to handle input/ output operations for indexed 

sequential files. The programmer should be familiar 

with these publications: 

IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems, 

PL / 1 Subset, Language Specifications, Form C28- 

6809 

IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems, 

PL/I Programmers Guide, Form C24-9005 
IBM System/ 360 Disk Operating System, Data Man- 
agement Concepts, Form C24-3427 
IBM System/360 Disk, Operating System, Super- 
visor and Input/ Output Macros, Form C24-5037 

(15 pages) 



C24-5060 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 31 

System — System Generation and 
Maintenance 

This reference publication contains specifications and 
operating procedures used to generate an installation- 
tailored Basic Operating System. Supervisor macro- 
instructions are used to define the facilities that are 
required within the system. 
The following publications are useful references: 
IBM System/360 Basic Operating System, Utility 

Programs Specifications, Form C24-3409 
IBM System/360 Basic Operating System, Program- 
mer's Guide, Form C24-3372 
IBM System/360 Basic Operating System, Assem- 
bler with I/O Macros Specifications, Form C24- 
3361 
IBM System/360 Basic Operating System Operating 
Guide, Control Programs and Assembler, Form 
C24-3450 
For titles and abstracts of other associated publica- 
tions, see the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. (80 pages) 



C24-5061 IBM System/360 Basic 31 

Programming Support, Basic Tape System, 
System Generation and Maintenance 

This reference publication contains specifications and 
operating procedures for generating and maintaining a 
system tape for Basic Programming Support. 

For additional information, refer to the following 

publications: 

IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, Basic 

Tape System, Programmers Guide, Form C24- 

3354 

IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, Basic 

Tape System Operating Guide, Form C24-3391 
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, As- 
sembler with Input/ Output Macros (Tape) Speci- 
fications, Form C24-3355 
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, Spec- 
ifications: Card and Tape Utility Programs, Form 
C24-5026 



IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, Oper- 
ating Guide Card and Tape Utility Programs, 
FormC24-5027 
IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, Re- 
port Program Generator (Tape) Specifications, 
Form C24-3418 
For titles and abstracts of other associated publica- 
tions, see the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. (52 pages) 

C24-5062 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 37 

System — Autotest Specifications 

This reference publication describes the testing serv- 
ices provided by the Disk Operating System Autotest. 
The following features are described: Autopatch, Test 
Request Options, normal and abnormal End of Job 
Dumps, Disaster Continue and the Autotest Card-to- 
Tape Variable program. Programmer-oriented diagnos- 
tic messages are also included. Control card formats 
and examples are given for Job Control as well as for 
Autotest. 

The reader should be familiar with the following 
related publications: 
IBM System/ 360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 

6821 
IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems 

Assembler Specifications, Form C24-3414 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System System 
Control and System Service Programs, Form C24- 
5036 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System Operating 

Guide, Form C24-5022 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System System 

Generation and Maintenance, Form C24-5033 
IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating System 

Utility Programs Specifications, Form C24-3465 
For information regarding other related publications, 
see IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. 

(50 pages) 

C24-5063 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 20 

System — Master Index 

This index is a consolidation of the indexes of all pro- 
gramming publications for the rBM Disk Operating 
System (dos). Each index entry is accompanied by the 
abbreviated publication title, the subject code of the 
publication within the ibm System Reference Library, 
and the publication form number. Appendix A con- 
tains a list of the dos publications, by title and form 
number, used to compile this consolidated index. 
Appendix B contains the publication plan for the Disk 
Operating System. 

For a complete list of all ibm System/ 360 publica- 
tions (machine manuals, all programming support, 
etc. ) by form number and subject code, and with the 
abstract of each publication, see the IBM System/360 
Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (132 pages) 

C24-5064 IBM System/360 Tape Operating 20 

System Programming Index 

This index is a consolidation of the indexes of all pro- 
gramming publications for the ibm Tape Operating 
System (tos). Each index entry is accompanied by the 
abbreviated publication title, and subject code of the 
publication within the ibm System Reference Library, 
and the publication form number. Appendix A contains 
a list of the tos publications, by title and form number, 
used to compile this consolidated index. Appendix B 
contains the publication plan for the Tape Operating 
System. 

For a complete list of all ibm System/ 360 publica- 
tions (machine manuals, all programming support, etc.) 
by form number and subject code, and with the ab- 
stract of each publication, see the IBM System/360 
Bibliography, Form A22-6822. (75 pages) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 23 



C24-5066 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 37 

Operating Systems — On-Line Test Executive 
Program — Specifications and Operating 
Guide 

Program Numbers: 

DOS 360N-DN-481 

TOS 360M-DN-418 
This reference publication describes the On Line Test 
Executive Program that controls on line testing of i/o 
units under the Disk and Tape Operating Systems 
supervisors. It explains the functions of the program 
and gives procedures for running the test programs. 
The test programs are not described in this publica- 
tion. Information about the test programs can be ob- 
tained from an ibm Field Engineering representative. 

For titles and abstracts of associated publications 
see the IBM System/ 360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. 
(24 pages) 

C24-5067 IBM System/360 Basic 20 

Programming Support — Programming 
Index 

This index is a consolidation of the indexes of all pro- 
gramming publications for ibm System/360 Basic Pro- 
gramming Support (bps). Each index entry is accom- 
panied by the abbreviated publication title, the subject 
code of the publication within the ibm Systems Refer- 
ence Library, and the publication form number. Ap- 
pendix A contains a list of the bps publications, by tide 
and form number, used to compile this consolidated 
index. Appendix B contains the publication plan for 
Basic Programming Support. 

For a complete list of all ibm System/360 publica- 
tions (machine manuals, all programming support, 
etc.) by form number and subject code, and with the 
abstract of each publication, see the IBM System/360 
Bibliography, Form A22-6822. ( 72 pages ) 

024-5068 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 31 

System, Single Disk Only System 
Generation 

This reference publication contains specifications and 
operating procedures for generating an installation- 
tailored Disk Operating System with the use of only 
one disk drive and no tape drives. 

This publication must be used with IBM System/360 
Disk Operating System, System Generation and Main- 
tenance, Form C24-5033, when performing system gen- 
eration with a single disk only system. ( 20 pages ) 

C24-5069 IBM System/360 Basic Programming 32 
Support Modular File Maintenance Program 
Specifications and Operating Guide 

Program Number: 360P-UT-219 
This reference publication describes the specifications 
and operating procedures for the ibm System/ 360 
Basic Programming Support Modular File Mainte- 
nance Program. This program builds and maintains a 
file of one or more modules, primarily source and/or 
object decks of programs, which may be revised 
whenever necessary. 

Programmer-oriented diagnostic messages, as well 
as formats and examples of control statements for job 
control and the Modular File Maintenance Program, 
are included in this publication. An understanding of 
the ibm System/360 programming concepts is a pre- 
requisite. 

System/360 programming concepts are discussed in 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 
6821. 

Titles and abstracts of other related publications are 
listed in the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22- 
6822. (40 pages) 



C24-5070 IBM System/360 Basic 30 

Programming Support, Basic Operating 
System, Tape Operating System, and 
Disk Operating System — Tape labels 

The types of labels that may be written on magnetic 
tape by the System/360 are defined and described in 
this reference manual. The processing performed by 
the programming systems, and the specifications that 
the user must supply to the systems, are discussed in 
two major sections: one section for bps and bos proc- 
essing, and another section for tos and dos processing. 
Each section discusses the processing of standard, 
user-standard, and nonstandard labels, and unlabeled 
files. The discussion deals primarily with the functions 
performed for volume, header, and trailer labels when 
the user gives specifications directly to iocs through 
dtf entries. In addition, a portion of each label proc- 
essing section deals with the label processing specifi- 
cations required by components of the system (such 
as Sort/ Merge, Utilities, cobol, etc). 

Illustrations of volume layouts depict the various 
arrangements of labels and data records that can be 
handled by the four programming systems. Flowcharts 
show the sequence of events that occur when files with 
standard, nonstandard, or no labels are opened and 
closed. 

For a thorough understanding of this manual, the 
reader should have a basic knowledge of the Input/ 
Output Control System (iocs). The manuals that pro- 
vide this information for each system are: 

IBM System/360 Basic Programming Support, As- 
sembler with Input/ Output Macros (Tape) Speci- 
fications, Form C24-3355. 

IBM System/360 Basic Operating System, Assem- 
bler with Input / Output Macros Specifications, 
Form C24-3361. 

IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, Super- 
visor and Input/ Output Macros, Form C24-5035. 

IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Supervisor 
and Input/Output Macros, Form C24-5037. 

(144 pages) 



C24-9005 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 29 

Operating Systems PL/I 
Programmer's Guide 

This publication complements the Systems Reference 
Library publication IBM System/360, PL/I Subset 
Reference Manual, Form C28-8202. Its purpose is to 
aid the programmer and to familiarize him with the 
techniques of pl/i programming. This publication 
therefore provides all information that is not part of 
the pl/i Subset language specifications but required 
by the programmer to write programs in the pl/i Sub- 
set language and to have them compiled and executed 
in the dos/tos environment. 

The main topics covered in this publication are: 

1. The dos/tos environment 

2. pl/i data file organization 

3. Storage requirements of pl/i programs and pro- 
gram elements 

4. The overlay facility 

5. Listings produced for pl/i programs 

6. Restrictions to the pl/i Subset language 

In some instances, the programmer may desire de- 
tailed additional information on topics not directly 
connected with pl/i. A list of all pertinent Systems 
Reference Library publications is provided in the 
Introduction section of this publication. ( 112 pages ) 



C26-3564 IBM System/360 Model 30 35 

Specifications and Operating Guide 
Tape Overlap Emulator 

This publication provides specifications for the ibm 
System/360 Model 30 Tape Overlap Emulator. A 
description of the functions of this program and the 
general requirements for its use are included. This 
program operates as an extension of the capabilities 
described in the publication, IBM System/360 Model 
30 1401/1440/1460 Basic Compatibility Feature and 
Sub-Features, Form A24-3255. ( 10 pages ) 



C26-3570 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 28 

Operating Systems Report Program 
Generator Specifications 

This publication contains fundamentals of bpg pro- 
gramming and language specifications for the ibm 
System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems, Report 
Program Generator. This program can be used for 
System/360 Models 30, 40, 50, 65, and 75. 

Also included is the job setup information for exe- 
cuting bpg. (220 pages) 



C26-3627 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 36 

System Operating Guide — IBM 1070 
Process Communication Supervisor 

This publication describes operating procedures for the 
ibm 1070 Process Communication Supervisor. It in- 
cludes instructions for loading the 1070 routines into 
the bos libraries and describes methods of assembling, 
loading, and executing the pes and problem programs. 
A description of error messages and halts is also in- 
cluded. (20 pages) 



C26-3756 IBM System/360 Operating System 21 
Assembler [FJ Programmer's Guide 

Program Number: 360-AS-037 

This publication complements the ibm System/360 
Operating System Assembler Language publication. It 
provides a guide to program assembling, linkage edit- 
ing, executing, interpreting listings, assembler pro- 
gramming considerations, diagnostic messages, and 
object output cards. (48 pages) 



C26-5996 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 36 

System— IBM 1070 Process 
Communication Supervisor 

This publication provides specifications for the ibm 
1070 Process Communication Supervisor. This super- 
visor works in conjunction with the ibm Basic Operat- 
ing System/360 (8K Disk) to handle telecommunica- 
tions between a System/360 host computer and a net- 
work Of remotely-located 1070 terminals. 

Included in this publication are detailed descriptions 
of the routines that make up the supervisor package, 
the macro-instructions used to call the routines, and 
performance data to help plan for use of the system. 
Also included is a glossary of process communication 
terms and a sample program illustrating the use of the 
supervisor in a typical application. (34 pages) 



24 



C26-5999 IBM System/360 RPG Translator 28 

This manual provides programming specifications for 
the IBM System/360 rpg Translator. It describes the 
operations necessary for converting a 1400 bpg source 
program to a System/360 rpg source program. 

The information contained in this publication will 
enable a 1400 bpg programmer to determine and to 
formulate preliminary plans for its use. 

This manual lists the machine features required and 
supported, describes the functional characteristics of 
the program, and provides a section on data checking 
and operating characteristics. Restrictions to the pro- 
gram are defined, and suggested solutions are provided. 
A program example is also included. 

Related System/360 rpg literature is contained in the 
following publications: IBM System/ 360 Model 20 
Report Program Generator, Form C26-3600; IBM Sys- 
tem/360 Basic Programming Support RPG (Card), 
Form C24-3374; IBM Basic Operating System/360 
RPG Language Specifications (8K Disk), Form C24- 
3387; and IBM Operating System/360 Report Program 
Generator Language, Form C24-3337. (20 pages) 

C27-6908 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 35 

The 7074 Emulator Program for 
IBM System/360 Models 50 and 65 

Program Number: 360C-EU-725 
This publication provides information on the ibm 7074 
Emulator Program (360C-EU-725), and is directed to 
the user who is supplementing or replacing his ibm 
7070/7074 Data Processing System with an ibm Sys- 
tem/360 Model 50 or 65. Emulation is a technique that 
utilizes both equipment (Compatibility Feature) and 
programming to execute object programs written for 
other data processing systems. (50 pages) 

C27-6909 IBM System/360 Operating 30 

System — Graphic Programming 
Services for IBM 2250 Display Unit 

Program Number: 360S-IO-523 

This publication describes macro-instructions and rou- 
tines provided under the ibm System/360 Operating 
System for use with the ibm 2250 Display Unit. 

These programming services are designed to facili- 
tate the assembler-language coding of programs for 
displaying data in alphameric or graphic form on the 
2250 screen and for controlling man-machine com- 
munication using the 2250. Included are facilities for 
creating the image-defining orders and data, for con- 
trolling input/ output functions of the graphic device, 
and for handling communications from a 2250 opera- 
tor. Both basic and express attention handling are 
described. 

Although intended primarily for the programmer 
coding in System/ 360 assembler language, portions of 
this publication are also of interest to installation man- 
agers, system engineers, system programmers, and 
others seeking general information about programming 
the ibm 2250 Display Unit. ( 136 pages) 

C27-691 1 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 35 

The 7080 Emulator Program for 
IBM System/360 Model 65 

Program Number: 360C-EU-727 
Special machine and programming features expand the 
capabilities of ibm System/360 Model 65 to include an 
alternate mode of operation: operation as the ibm 7080 
Emulator. The Emulator is the effective equivalent of 
the ibm 7080 Data Processing System, and is capable 
of executing programs written for the 7080. This pub- 
lication describes how to prepare and use a suitably 
configured System/ 360 for the execution of 7080 pro- 
grams. 



General information is provided on Emulator char- 
acteristics, programming considerations, and operating 
considerations. Complete instructions for system gen- 
eration and program use are provided, together with 
detailed information on error messages and corrective 
actions. (54 pages) 



C27-6912 IBM System/360 Operating 30 

System — Graphic Programming Services 
for IBM 2260 Display Station (Local 
Attachment) 

Program Number: 360S-IO-523 

This publication describes programming services for 
using the ibm 2260 Display Station with the System/ 
360 Operating System. Included are descriptions of 
macro-instructions for input/ output control and for 
basic and express attention handling, along with some 
general requirements for using the display station 
effectively. 

Although intended primarily for the programmer 
coding in System/360 assembler language, portions of 
this publication are also of interest to installation man- 
agers, system engineers, system programmers, and 
others seeking general information about program- 
ming the ibm 2260 Display Station. (48 pages) 



C27-6918 IBM System/360 Operating System 31 
Maintenance Program 360S-UT-506 

This publication describes the procedure for applying 
IBM-distributed maintenance material, or user-provided 
material in a prespecified form, to operating-system 
libraries. The major portion of this information con- 
cerns the Update Analysis Program — a program that 
determines the applicability of maintenance material 
for the individual system libraries, and accordingly 
constructs a job stream that effects the library updat- 
ing- (37 pages) 



C27-6924 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 32 

System Vocabulary File Utility Program 
for the IBM 7772 Audio Response Unit 

Program Number: 360N-UT-472 

This document provides information on the Vocabu- 
lary File Utility Program for the ibm 7772 Audio Re- 
sponse Unit, that enables the user to create, organize, 
and update the file of word representations from which 
the audible responses of the ibm 7772 Audio Response 
Unit are formed. (44 pages) 



C27-6927 IBM System/360 Operating System 30 

Graphic Programming Services for 
IBM 2280 and 2282 Film Units 

Program Number: 360S-IO-523 

This publication contains information for writing pro- 
grams using the ibm 2280 Film Recorder or the ibm 
2282 Film Recorder/ Scanner. 

For complete coverage of available 2280/82 graphic 
programming services, this publication must be used 
with IBM System/360 Operating System; Graphic 
Programming Services for IBM 2250 Display Unit, 
Form C27-6909. 

The information consists primarily of formats and 
descriptions of macro-instructions that generate orders 
and data that control the graphic devices. Considera- 
tions for user's error handling routines are also in- 
cluded. (56 pages) 



C27-6929 IBM System/360 Conversion 35 

Aids: Sample Problems for 
IBM System/360 Emulator Programs 

Program Numbers: 

360C-EU-074 

360C-EU-097 

360C-EU-725 

360C-EU-726 

360C-EU-727 

360C-EU-728 

360C-EU-729 

360C-EU-731 

360C-EU-733 
Sample problems are provided as a part of the distri- 
bution material for ibm System/ 360 Emulator Pro- 
grams. They are illustrative examples designed to 
familiarize the user with the techniques required to 
execute object programs written for other ibm data 
processing systems under Emulator control. Sample 
problems are not intended to provide detailed and 
exhaustive tests or demonstrations of Emulator Pro- 
grams. 

Included in this publication are sample problems for 
use with the following Emulators: 1401/1440/1460 
Model 30, 1401/1460 Model 40, 1410/7010 Models 40 
and 50, 1620 Model 30, 7040/7044 Model 65, 7074 
Models 50 and 65, 7080 Model 65, and 709/7090/7094/ 
7094n Model 65. ( 28 pages ) 



C27-6932 IBM System/360 Operating System 25 
Graphic Programming Services for 
FORTRAN IV 

Program Number: 360S-LM-537 
This publication describes how a Fortran programmer 
can write graphic programs for use with the ibm 2250 
Display Unit in association with the ibm System/ 360 
Operating System. It also describes how the same facil- 
ities may be used in a program written in Assembler 
Language. 

The graphic programming services for Fortran rv 
consist of subroutines and functions for displaying 
characters or graphic forms on the 2250 screen and for 
controlling communication between the program and 
the 2250 operator. The subroutines may be called from 
a program written in the E, G, or H level of Fortran 
rv, or from a program written in Assembler Language. 
They are not an extension of the Fortran rv language, 
but may be used in conjunction with it. 

It is assumed that the Fortran user of this publica- 
tion is experienced in the ibm System/360 Operating 
System Fortran rv language. It is assumed that the 
Assembler Language user of this publication is experi- 
enced in both Fortran rv and Assembler Language. 
(120 pages) 



C27-6933 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 
User's Guide for Job Control from the IBM 
2250 Display Unit — Preliminary Specifications 

This publication describes how a person at an tbm 
2250 Display Unit can define and initiate jobs to be 
processed by the ibm System/ 360 Operating System. 
The publication discusses the job control operations 
that are available at the display unit and provides sup- 
plementary information to assist the user. A complete 
sample job control session is explained with text and 
illustrations. 

The publication is written for a person who is not 
familiar with the ibm System/ 360 Operating System. 
(48 pages) 



IBM System/360 Bibliography 25 



C27-6935 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 
Planning for Rollout/ Rollin 

This publication describes the features and capabilities 
provided by the rollout/ rollin feature of the ibm Sys- 
tem/360 Operating System. Rollout/rollin is used in 
conjunction with mvt (multiprogramming with a vari- 
able number of tasks) as an aid to main storage man- 
agement. ( 16 pages) 



C27-6937 IBM System/360 Operating System 25 
and 1 130 Disk Monitor System: FORTRAN IV 
Subroutines for Data Transmission Between 
a System/360 and an 1 130 System 
Preliminary Specifications 
This publication contains preliminary information 
about subroutines that can be called by a System/360 
Operating System Fortran tv program or an 1130 Sys- 
tem Fortran rv program to transmit data from one 
system to the other. The subroutines enable Fortran 
programmers to perform the same land of telecom- 
munications as an Assembler Language programmer 
performs by using the binary synchronous services of 
the Basic Telecommunications Access Method (in the 
System/ 360) and the Synchronous Communications 
Adapter subroutines (in the 1130). No knowledge of 
binary synchronous communications is needed to use 
the subroutines described in this manual. The Fortran 
rv data transmission subroutines can also be used in 
Assembler Language programs if the proper subrou- 
tine linkage is employed. 

This publication contains a general description of 
the data transmission and data conversion subroutines, 
provides detailed information on the formats of the 
subroutine calls, and contains coding examples that 
illustrate use of the subroutines. Detailed information 
on data conversion from 1130 format to System/ 360 
format and vice versa is provided in Appendix A. (48 
pages) 



C27-6938 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 
and 1 130 Disk Monitor System: User's Guide 
for Job Control from an IBM 2250 Display 
Unit Attached to an IBM 1 130 System 
Preliminary Specifications 
This publication describes how a person at an ibm 
2250 Display Unit attached to an ibm 1130 Computing 
System can define and initiate jobs to be processed by 
the ibm System/ 360 Operating System. The job defined 
at the display unit can either be processed independ- 
ently in the System/360 or can be processed in con- 
junction with a related program in the 1130. The pub- 
lication discusses the job control operations that are 
available to the 2250 user and provides supplementary 
information to assist the user at the display unit. A 
complete sample job is included with text and illustra- 
tions. 

The information on job control operations is written 
for a person who is not familiar with the ibm System/ 
360 Operating System, the ibm 1130 Computing Sys- 
tem, or the ibm 2250 Display Unit. ( 64 pages ) 



C27-6939 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 
Planning for Multiprogramming with a 
Fixed Number of Tasks, Version II (MFT II) 

This publication provides information concerning Ver- 
sion n of multiprogramming with a fixed number of 
tasks (mft n) for installation personnel who are re- 
sponsible for selection, evaluation, and implementation 
of System/ 360 Operating System configurations. The 
information is presented in three major categories: con- 
cepts, considerations, and characteristics. These sec- 
tions describe, respectively: 



1. The principles of operation of mft n. 

2. How they influence application and operation of 
the system. 

3. Detailed specifications of storage requirements, 
system generation, and operation of an mft n 
system. 

The descriptive information is supplemented by ex- 
amples and illustrations including a sample job sched- 
uling sequence and sample partition configurations for 
systems with 128K, 256K, and 512K bytes of main 
storage. ( 60 pages ) 



C27-6940 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 35 

System— 1401/1440/1460 Emulator 
Programs for IBM System/360 Models 
30 and 40 — Preliminary Specifications 

This publication contains preliminary information on 
the ibm 1401/1440/1460 Emulator Programs under the 
Disk Operating System for ibm System/ 360 Models 30 
and 40. The Emulator under dos for the Model 30 
comprises the ibm 1401/1440/1460 Model 30 Emu- 
lator Program, the ibm 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility 
Feature (4456), and the Programmed Mode Switch 
Subfeature (5856). The Emulator under dos for the 
Model 40 comprises trie ibm 1401/1440/1460 Model 
40 Emulator Program and the 1401/1440/1460 dos 
Compatibility Feature (4460). 

General information concerning machine require- 
ments, program generation, simulation techniques, 
data formats, control cards, and programming con- 
siderations is included, as are detailed explanations of 
operator service functions, operating procedures, con- 
sole messages, and special instructions added by the 
two compatibility features. 

The 1400 Emulator Programs under dos allow the 
user to run 1401/1440/1460 programs, with little or no 
reprogramming, under the Disk Operating System in 
conjunction with the compatibility features. This al- 
lows 1400 programs to be run in a stacked job environ- 
ment, mixed with System/360 jobs. (128 pages) 



C27-6942 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 

Introduction to Main Storage Hierarchy 
Support for IBM 2361 Models 1 and 2 

This publication contains pre-release information that 
describes the programming requirements and consid- 
erations for the division of main storage into two 
separately addressable blocks called hierarchies. 

Main Storage Hierarchy Support is primarily de- 
signed for use with ibm 2361 Core^ Storage, a stand- 
alone, economical bulk storage unit. The support pro- 
vides a technique by which the 2361 can be directly 
addressed, so that storage can be allocated from it and 
modules can be loaded into it. Main Storage Hierarchy 
Support is effective across all versions of the operating 
system. (24 pages) 



C28-2000 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 21 

System Assembler Language 

This publication describes the ibm System/360 Time 
Sharing System Assembler Language, a symbolic pro- 
gramming language used to write programs for ibm 
System/ 360. The language provides a convenient 
means for representing the machine instructions and 
related data necessary to program the ibm System/360, 
especially as related to Time Sharing System/360 (tss/ 
aw ). The tss/360 Assembler Program processes the lan- 
guage and provides auxiliary functions for preparing 
and documenting a program; the Assembler includes 
facilities for processing the assembler macro language. 
(132 pages) 



C28-2001 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 36 

System Command System User's Guide 

The command system in Time Sharing System/360 
gives to the user the facilities he needs for construct- 
ing, executing, and debugging his programs; also, he 
can create, modify, share, and copy data sets; he can 
move them to or from input/output devices. The user 
can modify and add to the rBM-supplied command sys- 
tem to meet his specific requirements. (232 pages) 



C28-20O2— IBM System/360 Time Sharing 36 

System Command Language for 
Administrators and Operators 

This manual provides detailed information on the com- 
mand language commands available to the system 
manager, system administrator, system operator, and 
subsidiary operator. 

The system manager and system administrator share 
an identical set of commands with which they control 
user access to the time sharing system. The system 
operator has a unique set of commands with which he 
controls and monitors the system configuration and 
handles system requests. The subsidiary operator em- 
ploys a subset of these commands to service requests 
from the system. ( 113 pages ) 



C28-2003 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 20 

System Concepts and Facilities 

This publication explains basic concepts of D3M Sys- 
tem/360 Time Sharing System, or Time Sharing Sys- 
tem/360 (tss/36o), and describes the available fa- 
cilities. 

Time Sharing System/360 is a comprehensive pro- 
grarnming system used in conjunction with ibm Sys- 
tem/360 computers that have time-sharing features. 
tss/360 comprises a supervisory program, a group of 
service programs, and a group of user programs. The 
supervisory program controls operation of the system 
and provides the time-sharing environment. The serv- 
ice programs perform task- and data-management 
functions in response to user or system requests. The 
user programs perform language processing, linkage 
editing, and other work defined by the user s problem 
programs. 

The primary purpose of tss/sbo is to provide many 
users with simultaneous conversational (on-line) ac- 
cess to a computing system that may have a single 
processor, or multiple processors. The combination of 
machine and program features gives each user the 
impression that he has sole possession of the system. 
He uses the system as if it had a directly accessible 
main-storage addressing space equal to the addressing 
capability of the system, rather than its actual main- 
storage capacity. 

While the system is operating conversationally, for 
many simultaneous users, it can also operate non- 
conversationally, with batch-type processing jobs, in 
the background. ( 132 pages ) 



C28-2004 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 36 

System Assembler User Macro Instructions 

IBM System/ 360 Time Sharing System provides com- 
prehensive program and data management services 
which, together with communication, bulk output, and 
interruption handling services, are requested through 
macro instructions. These macro instructions are writ- 
ten in the assembler language as an aid to program- 
ming and processing time-shared tasks. (228 pages) 



26 



C28-2O05 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 31 

System Linkage Editor 

This publication describes and illustrates the linkage 
editor, an optional service program available for the 
ibm System/ 360 Time Sharing System (tss/s6o). The 
linkage editor connects and edits program modules that 
have been assembled or compiled separately to pro- 
duce a single program module that can be efficiently 
loaded by the dynamic loader at execution time. Link- 
age editor facilities are illustrated in conversational 
and nonconversational modes of operation. (56 pages) 



C28-2006 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 48 

System — Time Sharing Support System 

This publication describes the Time Sharing Support 
System and the command language used to operate it. 
This system is used only by system programmers with 
authority code O or P and is not intended to be avail- 
able to any other Time Sharing System/360 users; con- 
sequently, this manual contains no information re- 
quired by users other than properly authorized system 
programmers. 

The Time Sharing Support System is an on-line pro- 
gram error analysis facility that provides the capability 
of collecting data from the Time Sharing System/360 
for analysis and of altering the Time Sharing System/ 
360 storage and machine registers. These functions 
may be performed on command from a terminal or 
dynamically during tss/360 execution; and the pro- 
grams, tables, and control blocks of real, virtual, and 
secondary storage can be referenced. (64 pages) 



System maintenance is the procedure for incor- 
porating changes to tss/sbo. 
This publication presents: 

1. The construction of the basic Tss/seo. 

2. The method of specifying, through sysgen macro 
instructions, such installation-dependent information 
as machine configuration, task-management require- 
ments, and command-language default specifications. 

3. The application of this information to create a 
new Tss/seo. 

4. The maintenance process for Tss/seo. 

5. The method of dynamically modifying tss/sso 
for the duration of a startup-to-shutdown session. 
(96 pages) 



C28-2017 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 36 

System Terminal User's Guide 

This manual gives instructions for operating the ibm 
2741 Communications Terminal and the ibm 1050 Data 
Communications System in the ibm System/ 360 Time 
Sharing System. (32 pages) 



C28-2023 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 20 

System Master Index 

This index has been compiled from the indexes of the 
existing srl publications that describe the ibm System/ 
360 Time Sharing System. It is a subject index that 
refers the reader to the individual publications. Actual 
page references will be found in the individual indexes. 
(92 pages) 



C28-2033 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 36 

System Operator's Guide 

This manual provides detailed information on the 
functions of the system operator for the time sharing 
system, and on the facilities of the command language 
reserved for the operators. The system operator has a 
set of commands with which he controls and monitors 
the system configuration and handles system requests. 
(44 pages) 



C28-2037 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 20 

System — System Messages 

The ibm System/ 360 Time Sharing System provides 
for a dialogue between the user and the system. The 
system participates in this dialogue with a series of 
messages, which provides the recipient with the in- 
formation he requires to fulfill his task. These messages 
may be received at a remote terminal in the conversa- 
tional mode, in the data set created as part of the out- 
put of a nonconversational task, or at the operator s 
terminal in the machine room. 

This publication lists and explains all of the messages 
issued by all IBM-supplied components of the ibm Sys- 
tem/360 Time Sharing System. Furthermore, it con- 
tains additional information with each message, such 
as the identification code of the modules issuing and 
determining the need for the message, the transmittal 
technique, and where appropriate the format of the 
associated dump or the completion date. (496 pages) 



C28-2007 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 25 

System IBM FORTRAN IV 

This publication describes and illustrates the use of the 
ibm Fortran iv language for the ibm System/ 360 Time 
Sharing System (tss/36o). 

The ibm Fortran iv language is a symbolic program- 
ming language that parallels the symbolism and format 
of mathematical notation. It provides many program- 
ming features and facilities that can be used to express 
as a meaningful fotrtan program the method of solu- 
tion of a mathematical problem. ( 120 pages ) 



C28-2008 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 50 

System — System Programmer's Guide 

IBM System/ 360 Time Sharing System (tss/36o) makes 
a distinction between user and system programmers. 
This publication is specifically intended for persons 
responsible for maintaining, modifying, or extending 
the system and discusses: 

Operating environment 

Program structure 

Coding practices and conventions 

Privileged supervisor call instructions 

Serviceability aids 

System macro definitions 

Changing Tss/seo 

Privilege Class E 

(188 pages) 



C28-2010 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 31 

System — System Generation and Maintenance 

This publication explains how an installation generates 
and maintains ibm System/360 Time Sharing System 

(TSS/360). 

System generation is the process of specifying and 
creating an installation adapted Tss/seo. An operable 
time-sharing system is necessary for system generation. 
Initially, a basic system is provided. 



C28-2024 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 36 

System Manager's and Administrator's 
Guide 

This manual provides detailed information on the com- 
mand system as used by system managers and system 
administrators in Time Sharing System/360. They 
share an identical set of commands with which they 
control access to the time-sharing system. (36 pages) 



C28-2025 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 25 

System FORTRAN Programmer's Guide 

This publication describes how to use the ibm System/ 
360 Time Sharing System (Tss/seo) for compiling and 
executing programs written in the Fortran rv lan- 
guage. It also describes how to use the services and 
features of tss/seo that, while not directly related to 
Fortran programming, are frequently of use to the 
Fortran programmer. ( 176 pages ) 



C28-2026 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 25 

System FORTRAN IV — Supplied Subprograms 

This publication describes the Fortran rv-supplied 
subprograms provided with ibm System/ 360 Time 
Sharing System (Tss/seo) and provides the information 
necessary to use the subprograms in either a Fortran 
rv or an assembler language program. (44 pages) 



C28-2032 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 21 

System Assembler Programmer's Guide 

This publication explains the use of Time Sharing Sys- 
tem/360 (tss/360) for assembler language applications 
programmers. It describes how to assemble, store, and 
execute programs in Tss/seo, as well as how to identify 
data sets, process them as input/ output in problem 
programs, and manipulate them in various ways ( such 
as erasing, copying, modifying, and cataloging them). 
(160 pages) 



C28-2038 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 32 

System Independent Utilities 

This publication discusses the use of the independent 
utility programs that support ibm System/ 360 Time 
Sharing System (Tss/seo), their features, functions, ca- 
pabilities, control statements, and record formats. The 
Tss/seo independent utility programs are: direct-access 
storage device initialization (dasdi), direct-access stor- 
age device dump/restore (dasddr), direct-access print 
( dadump ) , and core dump. ( 32 pages ) 



C28-2043 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 20 

System Addendum 

This addendum presents the external and internal 
specifications for program changes that have been 
made recently to the ibm System/360 Time Sharing 
System (tss/s6o). 

The features described herein are different from 
those covered in the previous Addendum, Form C28- 
2043-2, which has been obsoleted by a recent update 
of the Tss/seo publications series. 

This addendum should be regarded as a required 
supplement to the present tss/sbo publications until 
those documents are again updated to reflect these 
improvements. (12 pages) 



C28-6380 IBM System/360 Operating 24 

System COBOL (F) Programmer's Guide 

Program Numbers: 
360S-CB-524 
360S-LM-525 

This publication describes how to compile, linkage 
edit, and execute a cobol (F) program. The text 
also describes the output from each of these steps. In 
addition, it explains options of the compiler and many 
available features of the operating system. ( 150 pages) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 27 



C28-6394 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 24 

System USA Standard COBOL 

Cobol (Common Business Oriented Language) is a 
programming language, similar to English, that is used 
for commercial data processing. It was developed by 
the Conference On Data SYstems Languages (coda- 
syl). The U. S. A. standard of the language is usa 
Standard cobol, X3.23-1968, as specified by the United 
States of America Standards Institute. 

ibm System/360 Disk Operating System usasi cobol 
incorporates the eight processing modules defined in 
the usa standard. These modules include: Nucleus, 
Table Handling, Sequential Access, Random Access, 
Sort, Report Writer, Segmentation, and Library. A sig- 
nificant number of ibm extensions are implemented as 
well. The ibm implementation of usa Standard cobol 
also complies with the first Draft bo Recommendation 
on COBOL. 

This publication gives the programmer the rules for 
writing programs that are to be compiled by the ibm 
usasi cobol compiler under the Disk Operating Sys- 
tem. It is meant to be used as a reference manual in 
the writing of ibm usasi cobol programs. (360 pages) 



C28-6395 IBM System/360 COBOL 24 

Differences USA Standard COBOL 
Conversion 

This publication summarizes the differences between 
the current ibm System/360 cobol languages — cobol 
d. cobol e, and cobol f — and the ibm cobol languages 
conforming' to the full usa Standard cobol — ibm Sys- 
tem/360 Operating System usasi cobol and ibm Sys- 
tem/360 Disk Operating System usasi cobol. It also 
summarizes new features offered in die ibm usasi 
cobol languages. 

This Differences Manual is meant to be a supple- 
mentary reference manual. Therefore, it is advisable 
that it be used only in conjunction with the ibm usasi 
cobol Language Manuals. (52 pages) 



C28-6396 IBM System/360 Operating System 24 

USA Standard COBOL 
COBOL (COmmon Business Oriented Language) is a 
programming language, similar to English, that is used 
for commercial data processing. It was developed by 
me Conference on Data Systems Languages (coda- 
syl). The U. S. A. standard of the language is usa 
Standard cobol X3.23-1968, as specified by the United 
States of America Standards Institute. 

ibm System/360 Operating System usasi cobol in- 
corporates the eight processing modules defined in the 
usa standard These modules include; Nucleus, Table 
Handling, Sequential Access, Random Access, Sort, 
Report Writer, Segmentation, and Library. A signif- 
icant number of ibm extensions are implemented as 
well. The tbm implementation of usa Standard cobol 
also complies with the first Draft iso Recommendation 
on COBOL. 

This publication gives the programmer die rules for 
writing programs that are to be compiled by the ibm 
usasi cobol compiler under the Operating System. It is 
meant to be used as a reference manual in the writing 
of ibm usasi cobol programs. ( 364 pages ) 



C28-6501 IBM 7090/7094 Support Package 35 

ferlBMSysiwn/360 

The ibm 7090/7094 Support Package for the ibm 
System/360 consists of three programs. These pro- 
grams are designed to permit the assembly, testing, 
and execution on an ibm 709, 7090, 7094, or 7094 n 
Data Processing System, of programs written for an 
ibm System/360. The three component programs are 



a 7090 assembly program, a 7090 simulator program, 
and a 1401 input program. 

The support package can process all System/360 as- 
sembler language and machine language programs 
that are not specifically dependent on input/output 
timing considerations. It accepts the machine instruc- 
tion and assembler instruction mnemonic codes of the 
mH System/360 special support basic assembler lan- 
guage and simulates the standard, scientific, com- 
mercial, universal, storage protection, and direct con- 
trol instruction sets of System/360. It simulates most 
input/output operations and most interruption pro- 
cedures of System/360. Simulation of up to 64K bytes 
of System/360 main storage is allowed. With certain 
limitations, the support package simulates the opera- 
tions of the 1052 Printer-Keyboard, 1402 Card Read 
Punch, 1403 Printer, 1442 Card Read Punch, 1443 
Printer, and the 2401, 2402, 2403, and 2404 Magnetic 
Tape Units. In addition, it provides extensive facilities 
for use in detecting and tracing errors in object pro- 
grams. 

Assembly and simulator programs operate under a 
supervisor program called in by the 7090/7094 Opera- 
ting System Monitor, ebsys. 

It is assumed that the user of this publication is fa- 
miliar with the basic assembler language and with the 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 
6821. (73 pages) 



C28-6503 IBM System/360 Basic 20 

Programming Support — Basic Assembler 
(Card) Specifications 

Program Number: 360P-AS-021 
This publication contains information required for 
writing programs in the Basic Assembler language, a 
symbolic programming language for the ibm System/ 
360. The Basic Assembler language permits the use of 
symbolic operation codes and addresses instead of ma- 
chine-language codes and addresses, and provides 
other conveniences for the programmer in using the 
full capabilities of the ibm System/360. Basic Assem- 
bler language source programs are translated into ob- 
ject programs by the Basic Assembler. 

This publication provides a description of the Basic 
Assembler language, a list of symbolic instructions 
with their machine-language equivalents, and explana- 
tions of the instructions available to the programmer 
for controlling the Basic Assembler. A description of 
the Basic Assembler is included, emphasizing those 
features concerned with the planning and writing of 
source programs. (65 pages) 



C28-6514 IBM System/360 Operating 21 

System Assembler Language 

This publication contains specifications for the ibm 
System/360 Operating System Assembler Language 
(Levels E and F). 

The assembler language is a symbolic programming 
language used to write programs for the ibm System/ 
360. The language provides a convenient means for 
representing the machine instructions and related data 
necessary to program the ibm System/360. The ibm 
System/360 Operating System Assembler Program 
processes the language and provides auxiliary func- 
tions useful in the preparation and documentation of 
a program, and includes facilities for processing the 
assembler macro language. 

Part i of this publication describes the assembler 
language. 

Part n of this publication describes an extension of 
the assembler language — the macro language — used 
to define macro-instructions. (148 pages) 



C28-6515 IBM System/360 FORTRAN IV 25 

Language 

This publication describes and illustrates the use of the 
fobtran rv language for the ibm System/360 Operating 
System and the ibm System/360 Model 44 Program- 
ming System. (121 pages) 



C28-6516 IBM System/360 Operating System 24 

COBOL Language 

Program Numbers: 

(COBOL E) 360S-COS03 

(COBOL F) 360S-CB-524 
Cobol (Common Business Oriented Language) is a 
programming language, similar to English, that is 
used for commercial data processing. It was devel- 
oped by the Conference of Data Systems Languages 
(codasyl). 

This publication provides die programmer with 
rules for writing programs that are to be compiled by 
die cobol e and cobol f compilers under System/360 
Operating System. Any violation of the rules for 
System/360 Operating System cobol as defined in this 
publication is considered an error. The features im- 
plemented by the cobol f compiler and not by cobol 
e, and the dm extensions to cobol, are listed in an 
appendix. 

Programmers unacquainted with cobol should read 
the programmed instruction textbook COBOL Pro- 
gram Fundamentals, Form R29-0205, with its reference 
handbook, Form R29-0206. (152 pages) 



C28-6528 IBM System/360 Conversion 35 

Aids: The 1410/7010 Simulator for 
IBM System/360 

Program Number: 360C-SI-754 

This document provides information on the dm Sys- 
tem/360 Simulator for the ibm 1410/7010, and is di- 
rected to the user who is replacing his ibm 1410/7010 
Data Processing System with an ibm System/360 
Model 40, 50, 65, or 75. Simulation is a technique that 
uses System/360 instruction sequences to perform the 
functions of 1410/7010 instructions, thus permitting 
the user to execute object programs written for the 
1410/7010. (58 pages) 



C28-6529 IBM System/360 Simulator for 35 

the IBM 1620 Model 1 and 2 
Preliminary Specifications 

This publication contains information needed in plan- 
ning for use of the Simulator during the conversion of 
a 1620 installation to a System/360 installation. 

In effect, the Simulator will enable' the System/360 
to perform as a 1620. This will permit the running of 
1620 programs that are not rewritten for the System/ 
360. 

The reader should be familiar with the contents of 
the following publications: IBM System/360 System 
Summary, Form A22-6810; IBM System/360 Principles 
of Operation, Form A22-6821; IBM 1620 Central Proc- 
essing Unit Model 1, Form A26-5706 or IBM 1620 
Central Processing Unit Model 2, Form A26-5781. (16 
) 



28 



C28-6530 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 35 

The 7070/7074 Simulator for 
IBM System/360 

Program Number: 360C-SI-753 

This document provides information on die ibm Sys- 
tem/360 Simulator for the ibm 7070/7074, and is di- 
rected to the user who is replacing his ibm 7070/7074 
Data Processing System with an ibm System/360 
Model 40, 50, 65, or 75. Simulation is a technique 
which uses System/360 instruction sequences to per- 
form the functions of 7070/7074 instructions, thus per- 
mitting the user to execute object programs written for 
the 7070/7074. (68 pages) 



C28-6531 IBM System/360 Conversion 35 

Aids: The 7080 Simulator for 
IBM System/360 

Program Number: 360C-SI-7S1 

This document provides information on the ibm Sys- 
tem/360 Simulator for the ibm 7080, and is directed to 
the user who is replacing his ibm 7080 Data Processing 
System with any model ibm System/ 360 with at least 
131,072 bytes of main storage. Simulation is a tech- 
nique that uses System/ 360 instruction sequences to 
perform the functions of 7080 instructions, thus per- 
mitting the user to execute object programs written for 
the 7080. (64 pages) 



C28-6532 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 35 

The 7090/7094 Simulator for 
IBM System/360 

Program Number: 360C-S1-7S0 

This document provides information on the ibm Sys- 
tem/360 Simulator for the ibm 709/7090/7094 i/7094n 
and is directed to the user who is replacing his ibm 
709/7090/7094 1/7094 n Data Processing System with 
an ebm System/360 Model 40, 50, 65, or 75. Simulation 
is a technique which uses System/360 instruction se- 
quences to perform the functions of 709/7090/7094 1/ 
7094 n instructions, thus permitting the user to execute 
object programs written for the 709/7090/7094 1/ 
7094 n.( 64 pages) 



C28-6534 IBM System/360 Operating 20 

System Introduction 

This publication describes the general organization, 
function, and application of ibm System/360 Operat- 
ing System. 

The operating system is designed to extend the per- 
formance and application of Computing System/360 
and to assist the manager, programmer, and operator 
of the system. The operating system consists of a com- 
prehensive set of language translators and service pro- 
grams operating under the supervisory control and 
coordination of an integrated set of control routines. 
It is designed for use with Models 30, 40, 50, 65, and 
75 of Computing System/360. The operating system is 
located in direct-access storage, such as disk or drum, 
and operates on computing systems that have 32,768 
bytes or mor,e of main storage. (24 pages) 



C28-6535 IBM System/360 Operating System 20 

Concepts and Facilities 

This publication describes the basic concepts of the 
ibm System/ 360 Operating System (the operating sys- 
tem) and guides the programmer in the use of its 
facilities. 

The operating system is a comprehensive set of lan- 
guage translators and service programs operating 
under the supervision and coordination of an inte- 
grated control program. It assists the programmer by 
extending the performance and application of the com- 
puting system. (64 pages) 



C28-6538 IBM System/360 Operating 31 

System Linkage Editor 

This publication provides programmers and systems 
analysts with the information necessary to make effec- 
tive use of the linkage editor of ibm System/ 360 Oper- 
ating System. Included are descriptions of the functions 
performed automatically by the linkage editor as well 
as those performed in response to control statements 
prepared by the programmer. 

The linkage editor combines and edits modules to 
produce a single module that can be loaded by the 
control program. The linkage editor operates as a proc- 
essing program rather than as a part of the control 
program. (84 pages) 



C28-6539 IBM System/360 Operating 36 

System Job Control Language 

This publication describes the facilities of the Job Con- 
trol Language, and illustrates how to use these facili- 
ties in various applications. Information coded by pro- 
grammers on job control statements is used by the 
System/360 Operating System to initiate and control 
the processing of jobs. 

Information in this publication is applicable to sys- 
tems with pcp, mft, and mvt. ( 90 pages) 



C28-6540 — IBM System/360 Operating System 20 

Operator's Guide 

This publication tells how to run the ibm System/360 
Operating System. After summarizing how the system 
works, it describes the three major system types: sys- 
tems with the primary control program (pcp); systems 
that provide multiprogramming with a fixed number 
of tasks (mft or Option 2); and systems that provide 
multiprograrmning with a variable number of tasks 
( mvt or Option 4). Instructions are given telling: 

1. How to start, stop, and restart the system. 

2. How to control input and output. 

3. How to control jobs through commands and state- 
ments. 

4. How to understand messages. 

General operating techniques are discussed, as well 
as the meanings of many technical terms. (84 pages) 



C28-6543 IBM System/360 Operating System 33 

Sort/Merge 

Program Number: 360S-SM-023 

This publication contains specifications for the ibm 
System/360 Operating System Sort/Merge program, 
including control statement preparation, program op- 
eration, i/o device assignment, and tuning estimates. 
The program has generalized sorting and merging 
capabilities that can be tailored to the. .needs of par- 
ticular installations and applications. ( 80 pages ) 



C28-6550 IBM System/360 Operating System 20 

System Programmer's Guide 

This publication consists of self-contained chapters, 
each of which provides information on how to modify, 
extend, or implement capabilities of the ibm System/ 
360 Operating System control program. It is designed 
primarily for system programmers responsible for 
maintaining, updating, and extending the operating 
system features. 
Topics: 

Catalog and vtoc Maintenance 

Adding svc Routines 

Adding Accounting Routines 

becdsect, iefjfcbn, and iefucbob Macro-Instruc- 
tions 

The Must Complete Function of enq/deq 

The excp Macro-Instruction 

The xdap Macro-Instruction 

The Tracing Routine 

Implementing Data Set Protection 

presres Volume Characteristic List 

Residency Options and Link Pack Area 

mvt Job Queue Formatting 

System Macro-Instructions 

Adding System Output Writer Routines 

Output Separators 

System Reader, Initiator, and Writer Cataloged 
Procedures 

Writing Rollout/Rollin Installation Appendages 

Adding a Universal Character Set Image to the 
System Library 

The Shared Direct Access Device Option 

The Time Slicing Facility 

Graphic Job Processor Procedures 



C28-6551 IBM System/360 Operating 20 

System Storage Estimates 

This publication contains instructions, formulas, and 
tables to be used in estimating the main and auxiliary 
storage requirements of any configuration of the ibm 
System/360 Operating System. This publication is in- 
tended for three types of users: sales personnel, who 
will use the introduction to evaluate the feasibility of 
using the configurations; systems programmers, who 
will use the publication to plan the storage require- 
ments of a new system and to determine the amount of 
storage available to the problem programmer; the 
problem programmer, who will use the dynamic stor- 
age section to estimate the requirements of his jobs. 
(128 pages) 



C28-6554 IBM System/360 Operating System 31 
System Generation 

System generation is a process that generates an ibm 
System/ 360 Operating System adapted to both the ma- 
chine configuration and the data processing require- 
ments of an installation. The system generation process 
is performed under the control of an existing ebm Sys- 
tem/360 Operating System. This publication provides 
information on the machine and operating system re- 
quirements for system generation, the initialization of 
system volumes and data sets, the macro-instructions 
used in specifying system generation, the methods of 
including user-written programs in the operating sys- 
tem, restart procedures, and the sample programs used 
to test the new system. 

ibm provides a starter operating system that can be 
used for the first system generation. The procedures 
required to initialize the starter system are also de- 
scribed in this publication. ( 216 pages ) 



IBM System/360 Bibliography 29 



C28-6559 IBM System/360 Transition Aids: 24 

COBOL Language Conversion Program 
(1401-CB-701) for the IBM 1401 

This publication contains preliminary information 
about the ibm cobol Language Conversion Program 
(cobol lcp). The cobol lcp facilitates transition to 
ibm System/360 by converting cobol source programs 
written for ibm current-system cobol compilers into 
source programs for a System/360 cobol compiler, 
Design Level E or Design Level F. This publication is 
intended to assist users of current cobol in planning 
for use of the cobol Language Conversion Program. 
(42 pages) 



C28-6560 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 25 

FORTRAN II Language Conversion 
Program for the IBM 1401 

Program Number: 1401-FO-702 

This publication contains information about the ibm 
fortban n Language Conversion Program ( Fortran 
lcp). The Fortran lcp facilitates transition to ibm 
System/360 by detecting statements in Fortran n 
source programs that are incompatible with System/ 
360 Fortran rv, by converting these statements to the 
proper System/360 format when possible, and by pro- 
viding message codes for statements that cannot be 
converted. This publication is intended to assist users 
of current Fortran in the use of the Fortran Lan- 
guage Conversion Program. (71 pages) 



C28-6561 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 35 

The 1401/1460 Emulator Program for 
IBM System/360 Model 40 

Program Number: 360C-EU-C74 
This publication contains the information required to 
use the ibm 1401/1460 Emulator for ibm System/360 
Model 40. The Emulator comprises the ibm 1401/1460 
Emulator Program (360C-EU-074) and dbm 1401/1460 
Compatibility Feature #4457. General information 
concerning machine requirements, data formats, and 
control cards is included, as are detailed explanations 
of operating procedures, user modification of the Emu- 
lator Program, and special instructions added by the 
Compatibility Feature. 

The Emulator allows programs written for ibm 1401/ 
1460 card/tape/disk systems to be executed on Sys- 
tem/360 Model 40, with little or no reprogramming. 
Emulation provides substantial improvement over the 
speeds possible with simulation. (44 pages) 



C28-6563 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 35 

The 1410/7010 Emulator Program for 
IBM System/360 Model 40 

Program Number: 360C-EU-728 
This publication provides information for the user who 
is planning to supplement or replace his mM 1410 or 
7010 card/tape/disk system with an ibm System/360 
Model 40. Emulation is a technique which utilizes both 
equipment capabilities (Compatibility Feature #4478) 
and programming (Emulator Program 360C-EU-728) 
to execute object programs of other data processing 
systems. The 1410/7010 Emulator allows the user to 
run 1410/7010 programs on the System/360 Model 40 
with little or no reprogramming. This technique pro- 
vides substantial improvement over the speeds achiev- 
able with simulators. 

Included in this document are the characteristics, 
functions, requirements, limitations, and operating pro- 
cedures of the Emulator. (50 pages) 



C28-6565 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 35 

The 709/7090/7094/7094 II Emulator 
Program for IBM System/360 Model 65 

Program Number: 360C-EU-729 
This publication describes the characteristics and use 
of the ibm 7090 Emulator Program, a component of the 
mM 7090 Emulator. The Emulator consists of this pro- 
gram, and special machine additions and modifications 
called the ibm 7090 Compatibility Feature (#7119). 
The combination of program and machine feature en- 
ables the user to execute, on his System/360 Model 65, 
programs written for the ibm 709, 7090, 7094, and 
7094 n Data Processing Systems. (68 pages) 



C28-6568 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 35 

The 1410/7010 Emulator Program for 
IBM System/360 Model 50 

Program Number: 360C-EU-726 
This publication provides information for the user who 
is planning to supplement or replace his mM 1410 or 
7010 card/tape/disk system with an mM System/360 
Model 50. Emulation is a technique that utilizes both 
machine adaptations and programming to execute ob- 
ject programs written for other data processing sys- 
tems. The 1410/7010 Emulator (Compatibility Feature 
#4478 and Emulator Program No. 360C-EU-726) al- 
lows the user to run 1410/7010 programs on the Sys- 
tem/360 Model 50, with little or no reprogramming. 
This technique provides substantial improvement over 
the speeds that can be achieved with simulators. 

Included in this document are the characteristics, 
functions, requirements, limitations, and operating pro- 
cedures of the Emulator. (42 pages) 



C28-6570 IBM System/360 Transition Aids 24 

COBOL Language Differences 

This publication summarizes the System/360 and Cur- 
rent Systems specifications for major ibm cobol lan- 
guage elements requiring evaluation, and possible con- 
version, during the transition to mM System/360 cobol. 
System/360 cobol differences from Current Systems 
cobol are also summarized. Where pertinent, the dis- 
tinction is made between Level E and Level F cobol 
for System/360. (79 pages) 



C28-6583 IBM System/360 Basic 25 

Programming Support-FORTRAN IV, 
360P-FO-031 Programmer's Guide 

This publication describes the procedures for com- 
piling and executing programs written in the Basic 
Programming Support Fortran rv language. It also 
includes the procedures for editing and updating the 
Basic Programming Support Fortran iv system and 
for preparing a Basic Programming Support Fortran 
rv job for a machine run. ( 86 pages ) 



C28-6585 IBM System/360 Model 65 35 

Emulation of the IBM 7040/7044 
Data Processing Systems 

This publication provides preliminary information 
about the characteristics, functions, requirements, limi- 
tations, and operating procedures of the mM 7040/7044 
Emulator. This Emulator allows the user who plans to 
supplement or replace his present data processing 
system with the mM System/360 Model 65 to execute 
his current programs on the mM System/360 without 
reprogramming. (28 pages) 



C28-6586 IBM System/360 Operating 32 

System Utilities 

Program Numbers: 

360S-UTS06 

360S-UTS07 
This publication discusses the capabilities of the ibm 
System/360 Operating System utility programs and 
the control statements used with each program. These 
programs are used by programmers responsible for 
organizing and maintaining operating system data. 

Three types of utility programs are discussed: sys- 
tem utilities and data set utilities, which are used 
directly with the System/360 Operating System; and 
independent utilities, which operate outside the oper- 
ating system. System utilities deal with operating sys- 
tem control data. Data set utilities manipulate data 
sets at the record level and above. Independent utili- 
ties initialize, dump, and restore direct-access volumes. 
(352 pages) 

C28-6590 IBM System/360 Operating 29 

System PL/I Subroutine Library 
Computational Subroutines 

Program Number: 360S-LM-512 
This publication gives details of the computational 
subroutines available in the pl/i Library. These sub- 
routines are used by the pl/i (F) compiler in the 
implementation of pl/i built-in functions and of the 
operators used in the evaluation of pl/i expressions. 
Not all pl/i built-in functions and expression operators 
are supported by the pl/i Library; the compiler gen- 
erates in-line code for a small number of them. The 
details provided include timing figures, summaries of 
the mathematical methods used, and (where appropri- 
ate) figures for range and accuracy. This information 
is intended to be of interest chiefly to those program- 
mers concerned with the performance of computational 
subprograms. (84 pages) 

C28-6594 IBM System/360 Operating 29 

System PL/I (F) Programmer's Guide 

Program Number: 360S-NLr511 
The pl/i (f) Compiler translates pl/i source programs 
into object programs in System/360 machine language. 
This publication describes the facilities provided by 
the compiler, and the conventions and restrictions 
which the user must observe. It explains how to com- 
pile, linkage edit, and execute pl/i source programs in 
the environment of System/360 Operating System. Fea- 
tures of pl/i which are not supported by the (f) Com- 
piler are detailed in Appendix H of this publication. 
(212 pages) 

C28-6595 IBM System/360 Operating System 21 
Assembler (E) Programmer's Guide 

This publication complements the mM System/360 
Operating System Assembler Language publication. It 
provides a guide to program assembling, linkage edit- 
ing, executing, interpreting listings, and assembler 
programming considerations. (43 pages) 

C28-6596 IBM System/360 FORTRAN IV 25 

Library Subprograms 

Program Numbers: 
360S-LMS01 
360F-LM-619 

This publication describes the library subprograms 
supplied with Basic Fortran rv (e) and Fortran rv (g, 
h, and model 44) and tells how to use the subprograms 
in either a Fortran or an assembler language program. 
(62 pages) 



30 



C28-6602 IBM System/360 Operating 25 

System FORTRAN IV (H) 
Programmer's Guide 

Program Number: 360S-FOS00 
This publication describes how to compile, link edit, 
and execute a program written in ibm System/ 360 
fobtran rv Language. (114 pages) 



C28-6603 IBM System/360 Operating System 25 
FORTRAN IV (E) Programmer's Guide 

Program Number: 360S-FO-092 

This publication describes how to compile, link edit, 
and execute a Fortran rv (e) program. The text also 
describes the output of compilation and execution and 
how to make optimal use of the compiler and a load 
module. (118 pages) 



C28-6615 IBM System/360 Operating 26 

System ALGOL Language 

This publication provides the programmer with the in- 
formation needed to use the ibm System/360 Operat- 
ing System algol compiler for the solution of scientific 
and technical problems, algol has been introduced in 
a number of universities and technical institutes for 
communication and education purposes. To assist that 
particular area, the os/mo algol Compiler is intended 
to provide a bridge to System/ 360 for existing algol 
users. A basic knowledge of the algol language is 
assumed. 

This publication consists of two main parts. The first 
(section 1 to 5) describes the elements of the algol 
language, the second (section 6) describes the input/ 
output procedures to be called when using algol. (109 
pages) 



C28-6628 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 

System Control Blocks 

This publication shows the formats of the major con- 
trol blocks and tables used by more than one compo- 
nent of the System/360 Operating System control 
program. Descriptions of each field within the control 
blocks or tables follow each format illustration. 

The system control blocks described in this publica- 
tion will be changed by ibm from time to time to 
extend the capabilities of the operating system. Pro- 
grams should refer to these control blocks only through 
the system macro instruction facilities provided in the 
operating system. (For example, a field of the Data 
Control Block should only be referred to by use of die 
dcbd macro instruction.) Programs that refer to the 
control blocks by other means do so at the risk of not 
executing correcdy in the future. (276 pages) 



C28-6629 IBM System/360 Basic 25 

FORTRAN IV Language 

This publication describes and illustrates the use of 
the Basic Fortran rv language for the ibm System/360 
Operating System, the ibm System/360 Disk Operating 
System, the ibm System/ 360 Tape Operating System, 
and the ibm System/ 360 Basic Programming Support 
Tape System. ( 93 pages ) 



C28-6631 IBM System/360 Operating System 20 

Messages and Codes 

This publication lists and explains the messages, com- 
pletion codes, and wait state codes produced by all 
IBM-supplied components of the ibm System/360 Op- 
erating System. The introduction shows the formats of 
the messages and codes, and gives certain information 
not given in the individual message and code descrip- 
tions. The messages and codes are presented in alpha- 
meric order. (408 pages) 



C28-6632 IBM System/360 Operating 36 

System Job Control Language Charts 

This publication presents the Job Control Language in 
a graphic form. Detailed flowcharts describe how to 
code job control statements for a sequential scheduling 
system. (67 pages) 



C28-6639 IBM System/360 Operating 25 

System FORTRAN IV (G) 
Programmer's Guide 

Program Number: 360S-FO-520 

This publication describes how to compile, link edit, 
and execute a program written in ibm System/ 360 
Fortran rv Language. (94 pages) 



C28-6644 IBM System/360 Operating System 20 

Master Index 

This publication consolidates the indexes of publica- 
tions in the ibm Systems Reference Library for the 
System/360 Operating System. It also provides a read- 
ing plan for these publications. 

The master index lists topics alphabetically, and 
refers to publications where these topics are discussed. 
The indexes of these publications list the same topics 
and refer to specific pages. (240 pages) 



C28-6646 — IBM System/360 Operating System 36 

Supervisor and Data Management Services 

This .publication describes the services and facilities 
available in the ibm System/360 Operating System 
when using supervisor and data management macro 
instructions. It also describes the linkage conventions 
established for use in the operating system. Macro in- 
structions used for Graphics or Teleprocessing are in- 
cluded in separate publications. Publications relating 
to Graphics or Teleprocessing are indexed in IBM 
System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. 

This publication covers the three main configurations 
of the operating system: systems with the primary 
control program; systems that provide multiprogram- 
ming with a fixed number of tasks (met or Option 2); 
systems that provide multiprogramming with a vari- 
able number of tasks (mvt or Option 4). (160 pages) 



C28-6647 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 

Supervisor and Data Management 
Macro Instructions 

This publication defines and describes the supervisor 
and data management macro instructions available in 
the ibm System/360 Operating System. The macro 
instruction descriptions and definitions apply to the 
three main configurations of the operating system: 
systems with the primary control program; systems that 
provide multiprogramming with a fixed number of 
tasks (mft or Option 2); and systems that provide 
multiprogramming with a variable number of tasks 
(mvt or Option 4). 



Descriptions and definitions applying to Graphics or 
Teleprocessing are included in separate publications. 
Publications relating to Graphics or Teleprocessing 
are indexed in IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. ( 270 pages) 



C28-6648 IBM System/360 Operating System 37 

TESTRAN 

Testran is a facility for testing programs written in 
the assembler language for execution under the Sys- 
tem/360 Operating System. It is intended for use by 
the individual programmer in testing his own pro- 
grams. 

This publication explains how to use testban for 
typical testing purposes, how to v write essential job 
control statements, and how to interpret printed, test 
results. It formally describes testran statements, cata- 
loged procedures supplied by ibm, and testban diag- 
nostic messages. 

The information in this publication applies to sys- 
tems that include the primary control program (pcp) 
and to systems that provide multiprogramming with a 
fixed number of tasks (mft or Option 2) or multipro- 
gramming with a variable number of tasks (mvt or 
Option 4). (96 pages) 



C28-6650 IBM System/360 Operating System 37 
On-Line Test Executive Program 

Program Number: 360S-DN-533 
This publication describes the On-Line Test Execu- 
tive Program which controls on-line testing of i/o 
units under control of the System/360 Operating Sys- 
tem. It explains the program's functions and gives pro- 
cedures for running the tests. (24 pages) 



C28-6656 IBM System/360 Operating System 31 

Checkpoint/Restart 

This publication describes the checkpoint/ restart fa- 
cility of the ibm System/ 360 Operating System, and 
contains the information necessary for programmers 
and operators to use the facility. 

The checkpoint/restart facility saves job step infor- 
mation at specific checkpoints in a program so that, in 
the event of error, it can restart the job step from one 
of the checkpoints. (17 pages) 



C28-6662 IBM System/360 Operating System 33 
Sort/Merge Timing Estimates 

Program Number: 360S-SM-023 

This publication contains total execution times of the 
Operating System Sort/ Merge program for over 30,000 
sorting applications. These times are for sorting appli- 
cations executed on the System/ 360 Models 30, 40, 50, 
65, and 75 with various amounts of main storage as- 
signed to the program. Typical input data set sizes and 
i/o configurations are shown. (56 pages) 



C28-6666 IBM System/ 360 Operating System 32 
Guide to Model 91 Support 

This publication is a guide to considerations that must 
be understood when programming on the ibm System/ 
360 Model 91. The information in this publication 
applies to the mvt version of the ibm System/ 360 
Operating System. (44 pages) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 31 



C28-6668 IBM System/360 Operating System 33 
Sort/ Merge Timing Estimates for the IBM 
2420 Model 7 Magnetic Tape Unit 
Planning Guide 

This publication is intended for those who require esti- 
mated execution times of the Operating System Sort/ 
Merge program using the ibm 2420 Model 7 Magnetic 
Tape Unit for input, output, and intermediate storage. 
Times are shown for over 2,500 sorting applications 
on the System/ 360 Models 50, 65, and 75. The assump- 
tions under which these estimates were calculated are 
described. (16 pages) 



C28-6670 IBM System/360 Operating System 20 
Programmer's Guide to Debugging 

This publication describes the major debugging f acui- 
ties provided with the dm System/360 Operating Sys- 
tem: 

1. Abnormal Termination and Snapshot Dumps 

2. Indicative Dumps 

3. Stand- Alone Hexadecimal Dumps 

It explains the aspects of system control pertinent to 
debugging, tells what each debugging facility offers, 
and outlines procedures for invoking and interpreting 
dumps issued at the three control program levels — 
pop, mft, and MVT. ( 80 pages ) 



C28-6671 IBM System/360 Operating System 20 
Model 65 Shared Main Storage Multiprocessing 
Preliminary Description 

This document is a preliminary description of ibm 
System/360 Operating System Model 65 Shared Main 
Storage Multiprocessing. Among the features of M65 
multiprocessing are: 

1. Extended cpu power. 

2. Extended emulation capabilities. 

3. Pooling capabilities. 

4. Availability and flexibility. 

(20 pages) 



C28-6680 IBM System/360 Operating 30 pages) 

System Tape Labels 

This publication describes how the ibm System/360 
Operating System processes magnetic tape volumes 
with standard labels, nonstandard labels, or no labels. 
Included for the guidance of programmers and opera- 
tions analysts are discussions of: 

1. Label formats and contents. 

2. Tape volume layouts. 

3. LabeLprocessing for input, output, multi-data set, 
and multi-volume conditions. 

4. Tape characteristics. 

5. Nonstandard label processing routines and vol- 
ume label editor routines. 

6. Component considerations. 

7. Using tape volumes created by other systems. 

8. External labels. 

(100 pages) 



C28-6808 A Programming Language/One 95 

Primer 

The purpose of this publication is to provide tutorial 
material not only for the person with some knowledge 
of computer programming, but also for the novice who 
knows little or nothing about data processing. 

The first chapter is written solely for the novice. A 
reader who is familiar with basic programming tech- 
niques should skip the first chapter, and begin reading 
at Chapter 2, "Basic Elements of pl/i." 



Chapter 1, "Communicating with a Computer," 
touches on machine language and introduces the con- 
cept of symbolic programming. The basic techniques of 
programming are illustrated by using symbolic instruc- 
tions, rather than fl/i, because certain pl/i statements 
can generate so much single-instruction coding that the 
details of some of the techniques are hidden. 

Further information concerning pl/i can be found 
in the following publications: IBM Operating System/ 
360 PL/I Language Specifications, Form C28-6571; A 
Guide to PL/I for FORTRAN Users, Form C20-1637. 
(76 pages) 



C28-6810 IBM System/360 Model 44 20 

Programming System 
Concepts and Facilities 

This publication describes the facilities provided by 
the ibm System/360 Model 44 Programming System. 

The Model 44 Programming System consists of a 
Fortran compiler, an assembler, a supervisor, and sys- 
tem support programs. It provides Fortran and assem- 
bler language processing and program execution in a 
monitored environment, with automatic job-to-job 
transition, interruption handling, and input/ output su- 
pervision. The system has facilities for the creation and 
maintenance of libraries and the manipulation of their 
contents. It also provides extensive job control and 
program segmentation capabilities for flexibility and 
versatility in the preparation of programs for execution. 
(47 pages) 



C28-681 1 IBM System/360 Model 44 21 

Programming System 
Assembler Language 

This publication contains specifications for the ibm 
System/360 Model 44 Programming System Assembler 
Language. 

This assembler language is used to write programs 
for the Model 44. The ibm System/360 Model 44 Pro- 
gramming System Assembler Program processes the 
language and provides auxiliary functions useful in the 
preparation and documentation of a program. (73 



C28-68 12 IBM System/360 Model 44 36 

Programming System Guide to System Use 

This publication contains detailed information for pre- 
paring programs to be executed under the ibm Sys- 
tem/360 Model 44 Programming System. It discusses 
and illustrates the system's requirements, its capabili- 
ties, and the control statements and supervisor calls 
that are used with it 

A prerequisite publication is the IBM System/ 360 
Model 44 Programming System: Concepts and Facili- 
ties, Form C28-6810. 

(37 pages) 



C28-6813— IBM System/360 Model 44 25 

Programming System Guide to System 
Use for FORTRAN Programmers 

This publication describes how to use the Model 44 
Programming System to compile and execute pro- 
grams written in the ibm System/360 Fortran iv lan- 
guage. A discussion of program optimization and of 
the restrictions of the Model 44 Fortran rv compiler is 
also included. 

This publication is directed primarily at program- 
mers who are familiar with the Fortran rv language. 
Previous knowledge of the Model 44 Programming 
System is not required. (Ill pages) 



C28-6814 IBM System/360 Model 44 36 

Programming System — Systems 
Programmer's Guide 

This publication describes how to construct an ibm 
System/360 Model 44 Programming System, and how 
to modify and extend its capabilities. 
Among the subjects discussed in this publication are: 

1. How to construct and edit a Model 44 Program- 
ming System. 

2. How to write an accounting routine and incorpo- 
rate it into the system. 

3. How to define the input/ output configuration at 
rPLtime. 

4. How to write routines at the Execute Channel 
Program (excp) level of the input/ output facilities. 

5. How to expand the user communication region. 

6. How to update the module and phase libraries. 

7. How to print, punch, and update the distributed 
tape reel. ( 86 pages ) 



C28-681 5 IBM System/360 Model 44 36 

Programming System Operator's Guide 

This publication provides operators with detailed in- 
formation required for operating the ibm System/ 360 
Model 44 Programming System and the various stand- 
alone programs associated with it 

Operating instructions are provided for ipl proce- 
dures, general operations, abnormal end procedures, 
operator-to-system communications, and stand-alone 
operations. ( 40 pages ) 



C28-6816 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 35 

1620 Simulator for IBM System/360 Model 44 

Program Number: 360C-SI-755 
This reference publication provides information on the 
1620 simulator for the ibm System/360 Model 44, and 
is directed to the user who is replacing his ibm 1620 
Model 1 or Model 2 Data Processing System with an 
ibm System/360 Model 44. This manual describes the 
installation requirements, and programming and oper- 
ating considerations for the 1620 simulator. 

Simulation is a technique that uses System/360 in- 
struction sequence to perform the functions of 1620 
instructions, thus permitting the user to execute object 
programs written for the 1620. (56 pages) 



C28-8201 IBM System/360 PL/I Reference 29 

Manual 

This publication provides the rules for writing fl/i 
programs that are to be compiled using the fl/i F-level 
compiler under the ibm System/ 360 Operating System. 
It is not a reference to the entire language, but only to 
those features implemented by the tfiud version of the 
F-level compiler. ( 312 pages ) 



C28-8202 IBM System/360 PL/I Subset 29 

Reference Manual 

This publication provides the rules for writing fl/i 
Subset programs that are to be compiled using the 
pl/i D-level compiler under the ibm System/360 Disk 
and Tape Operating Systems. It is not a reference to 
the entire fl/i Subset language, but only to those 
features implemented by the second version of the 
D-level compiler. ( 232 pages ) 



32 



C30-2003 IBM System/360 Operating 30 

System Queued Telecommunications 
Access Method — Message Processing 
Program Services 

This publication provides information on how to use 
the Queued Telecommunications Access Method 
(qtam) within Option 2 (Multiprogramming with a 
Fixed Number of Tasks) of the System/360 Operating 
System, to support a telecommunications application. 
Services provided by qtam in support of a message 
processing program are described in detail, including 
the facilities provided to establish the interface to a 
qtam message control program. 

For detailed information on the qtam facilities pro- 
vided for the construction of a message control pro- 
gram, refer to the publication, IBM System/360 
Operating System, QTAM Message Control Program, 
Form C30-2002. (22 pages) 



C30-2004 IBM System/360 Operating System 30 
Basic Telecommunications Access Method 

This publication describes the Basic Telecommunica- 
tions Access Method (btam) available with the Sys- 
tem/360 Operating System, btam provides read/write 
level macro instructions for the assembler-language 
programmer who is implementing programs for tele- 
communications applications such as data acquisition, 
message switching, and inquiry processing, employing 
start-stop and binary synchronous communications. 

Included are macro instruction formats and descrip- 
tions and specific information on terminal-dependent 
considerations. Descriptions for binary synchronous 
communications are included for planning purposes 
only. A complete sample program illustrates problem 
program design for a simple message switching appli- 
cation. 

For titles and abstracts of associated publications 
see tiie IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22- 
6822. (168 pages) 



C30-2005 IBM System/360 Operating System 30 
Queued Telecommunications Access Method 
Message Control Program 

This publication contains specifications on the use of 
the Queued Telecommunications Access Method 
(qtam) and the ibm System/360 Operating System to 
support telecommunications applications. Information 
in this publication will facilitate the construction of a 
qtam message control program by the problem pro- 
grammer. Complete descriptions of qtam macro in- 
structions are included. 

For detailed information on the services provided by 
qtam to support a message processing program, refer 
to IBM System/360 Operating System: QTAM Mes- 
sage Processing Program Services, Form C30-2003, 
(176 pages) 



C30-2006 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 
Remote Job Entry 

Remote Job Entry (bje) allows users at remote loca- 
tions to submit jobs over communication lines to an 
ibm System/360 using the Operating System that pro- 
vides multiprogramming with a variable number of 
tasks (mvt). bje includes a unique Job Entry Control 
Language which provides the additional flexibility and 
control required for remote entry. 



This publication provides preliminary information 
required by the programmer and the operator concern- 
ing general hje concepts and facilities, and a complete 
discussion of bje capabilities and uses. Job Entry Con- 
trol Language is introduced and explained. Sections 
describing bje system generation at the central instal- 
lation and at a remote computer are included for the 
system programmer. In addition, bje operating pro- 
cedures for both the central and remote operation are 
included. The telecommunications support used by 
bje is discussed, in general terms, only when necessary 
to give a complete picture of the system. (78 pages) 



C30-2007 IBM System/360 Introduction to 30 

Teleprocessing 

This publication provides computer applications ana- 
lysts and programmers with an introduction to Tele- 
processing. Following a historical survey and some 
brief application descriptions is a review of equipment 
characteristics and programming techniques. Introduc- 
tory material on two levels of ibm System/360 Tele- 
processing programming support is then presented. A 
bibliography and a technical glossary conclude the 
publication. (40 pages) 



C30-2008 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 
Planning for Remote Job Entry 
(MFT Version II) 

Remote Job Entry (bje) allows users at remote loca- 
tions to submit jobs over communication lines to an 
ibm System/360 using the Operating System that pro- 
vides multiprogramming, bje includes a unique Job 
Entry Control Language which provides the additional 
flexibility and control required for remote entry. 

This publication provides preliminary information 
required by the programmer and the operator concern- 
ing general bje concepts and facilities, and a complete 
discussion of bje capabilities and uses. Job Entry Con- 
trol Language is introduced and explained. Sections 
describing bje system generation at the central instal- 
lation and at a remote computer are included for the 
system programmer. In addition, bje operating proce- 
dures for both the central and remote operation are 
included. The telecommunications support used by bje 
is discussed, in general terms, only when necessary to 
give a complete picture of the system. (58 pages) 



C30-5001 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 30 

System Basic Telecommunications 
Access Method 

Program Number: 360N-CQ-469 
This publication describes die Basic Telecommunica- 
tions Access Method (btam) used with the System/360 
Disk Operating System (dos) control program, btam 
provides bead/ write level macro instructions for die 
assembler-language programmer who is implementing 
programs for telecommunications applications. 

Included are macro instruction formats and descrip- 
tions and specific information on device-dependent 
considerations. 

For titles and abstracts of associated publications see 
the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. 
(192 pages) 



C30-5003 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 30 

System — QTAM Message Processing 
Program Services 

This reference publication provides information on the 
use of the Queued Telecommunications Access Method 
(qtam) and the System/ 360 Disk Operating System 
for a telecommunications application. Services pro- 
vided by qtam in support of a message processing 
program are described in detail, including the facilities 
provided to establish the interface to a qtam message 
control program. 

The qtam facilities provided for the construction of 
a message control program are presented in the pub- 
lication IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, 
QTAM Message Control Program, Form C30-5004. 

For titles and abstracts of other associated publica- 
tions, see the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. ( 36 pages) 



C30-5004 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 30 

System QTAM Message Control Program 

Program Number: 360N-CQ-470 

This reference publication contains specifications for 
the use of the Queued Telecommunications Access 
Method (qtam) and of the ibm System/ 360 Disk 
Operating System in a telecommunications applica- 
tion. Complete descriptions of qtam macro instructions 
are included along with information to aid the problem 
programmer in constructing a qtam message control 
program. 

For detailed information on the services provided by 
qtam to support a message processing program, refer 
to the publication IBM System/360 Disk Operating 
System, QTAM Message Processing Program Services, 
Form C30-5003. 

For titles and abstracts of other associated publica- 
tions, see IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22- 
6822. (192 pages) 



C33-2003 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 35 

The 1410/7010 Simulator for IBM 
System/360 

Program Number: 360C-SI-754 
This document provides information on the 1410/7010 
Simulator for the ibm System/360, and is directed to 
the user who is replacing his ibm 1410/7010 Data 
Processing System with an ibm System/360 Model 40, 
50, 65, or 75. Simulation is a technique which uses 
System/360 instruction sequences to perform the func- 
tions of 1410/7010 instructions, thus permitting the 
user to execute object programs written for the 1410/ 
7010. (60 pages) 



C33-4000 IBM System/360 Operating System 26 

ALGOL Programmer's Guide 

Program Numbers: 
360S-ALS31— Compiler 
360S-LM-532— Library Routines 

This publication describes how to compile, linkage 
edit and execute a program written in the System/360 
Operating System Algorithmic Language (alcol). It 
includes an introduction to the operating system and a 
description of the information listings that can be pro- 
duced, the job control language, and the subroutine 
library. (63 pages) 



IBM System/360 Bibliography 33 



C50-0001 The IBM 2701 Data Adapter Unit 13 

and ASCII AUTODIN Adapter RPQ F 16124 
Principles of Operations 

This manual provides information concerning the oper- 
ation of the IBM 2701 Data Adapter Unit and the asch 
Adapter bpq F 16124. The manual is divided into five 
sections, a glossary, and six annexes. 

The first section gives a general description of the 
2701 and the autodin Adapter, the functional organi- 
zation of the 2701 and the configuration of the 2701. 

The second section describes the operation of the 
2701 with System/360 Model 20. Subjects discussed 
here include communications line addressing, channel 
operation, and i/o instructions concerning the 2701 for 
the Model 20. 

The third section describes the operation of the 2701 
with System/360 for Models 30 and above. Subjects 
discussed here include communications line address- 
ing, multiplexor and selector channel operation, and 
i/o instructions concerning the 2701 for Models 30 and 
above. 

The fourth section covers the Ascn autodin Adapter. 
A complete description of the operation of the adapter 
is made which includes transmit and receive operation 
sequences, status and sense bytes, line interfaces, and 
the operators panel. 

The fifth section covers the operating procedures of 
the 2701 Data Adapter Unit and the asch autodin 
Adapter. 

The glossary contains definitions of certain terms, 
used in this manual which may not be in common use. 

The annexes include charts on the Ascn code, repre- 
sentation of the asch code to System/ 360 codes, speci- 
fications on the 2701, and two electrical interface draw- 
ings. (48 pages) 



E20-0188 Retail IMPACT— Inventor/ 60 

Management Program and Control 
Techniques— Application Description 

The purpose of this manual is to describe the Retail 
impact System for the retail industry. The Retail 
impact System actually consists of two separate sys- 
tems, one for staple and one for fashion merchandise. 
Either or both of these systems may be implemented. 
Programs for the systems are enumerated in the man- 
ual. 

The manual is divided into chapters which cover 
topics such as: a ^general statement of the problems 
of retail inventory management; simulation, and its 
uses; ordering parameters, methods of forecasting and 
forecasting techniques; record maintenance, purchase 
order generation and operating and management re- 
porting; design considerations; and implementation. 
Where appropriate, these topics are discussed sepa- 
rately for the fashion and staple systems. Also, graphs 
and report examples supplement the text, and a glos- 
sary of terms peculiar 1 to the retail environment is 
included in the manual. ( 104 pages ) 



E20-0196 System/360 Mortgage loan 60 

Program— Application Description 

The program is designed to provide the major process- 
ing for mortgage loan accounting operations at mutual 
savings banks, savings and loan associations, commer- 
cial banks, mortgage servicing companies, and other 
users. These programs will significantly help to mini- 
mize the time, expense, and effort m converting from 
manual systems, unit record equipment, or earlier- 
generation computers to System/360. 



An operation system using these programs will pro- 
vide for servicing investor accounts with the necessary 
related reports and will handle many types of irregular 
transactions. The system enables management to keep 
close surveillance on the bank's entire loan portfolio 
and to meet reporting requirements of the Federal 
Home Loan Bank Board including delinquent account 
and slow loan analyses. Extensive audit control pro- 
cedures are maintained throughout all programs, and 
attention is focused immediately on unusual conditions 
that may arise in individual account or control records. 

This manual describes system design features, pre- 
sents the highlights of the individual programs, and 
discusses reports that the user may wish to develop. 
(18 pages) 



E20-0228 Optimum Bond Bidding 60 

User's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-FI-06X 

This program has been designed to help underwriters 
determine the coupon schedule and associated values 
for a bid on a new bond issue. A mathematical pro- 
cedure is used which develops an optimal set of cou- 
pon rates. The optimization procedure niinimizes the 
net interest cost or effective rate whichever is applica- 
ble, while remaining within the constraints established 
by the issuer and those established by the underwriter. 
A number of options are provided which help the user 
obtain bidding information for issues with various 
characteristics. 

This manual contains a general description of the 
program, including all mathematical formulas, machine 
configuration, general systems chart, input/ output de- 
scription, sample problem, operating instructions, and 
halt and message fist. 

The manual is so structured that the user may con- 
centrate on sections germane to his interest. (119 
pages) 



E20-0246 Demand Deposit Accounting 60 

Application Description 

Program Number: 360A-FB-15X 
This manual describes the scope arid capabilities of 
System/360 Demand Deposit Accounting. It covers 
( 1 ) requirements for a demand deposit application in 
either a single-bank or multi-bank environment, (2) 
results from and advantages of using the application 
programs, (3) accomplishments of each program, (4) 
information on getting started, (5) record layouts and 
reports produced, and (6) machine requirements, 
sample timings, and disk pack requirements. (36 
pages) 



E20-0256 IBM System/360 Text Processor 60 

COMPOSITION/360— Application 
Description 

This manual discusses one component application pro- 
gram, which forms the basis for a comprehensive text 
composition system. 

CoMPOsrnoN/3eo acts in conjunction with user- 
supplied programs and the full facilities of the Disk 
Operating System for System/360. It consists of con- 
trol and functional routines that accept input from a 
user-prepared disk-resident file, produces generalized 
justified output records, and stores them in a specified 
disk area. If word division capabilities are required, 
the hyphenation/380 program is linked with composi- 
tion/ sec (32 pages) 



E20-0257 IBM System/360 Text Processor 60 

HYPHENATION/360— Application 
Description 

Hyphenation/380 provides division of words for text 
processing applications in which the addition of word 
syllables to a line to meet justification requirements is 
preferable to forcing the line to end with a complete 
word. This hyphenation capability' is provided in the 
form of a module that can be linked with a user's 
System/360 text-processing program or the composi- 
tion/360 module of the ibm System/360 Text Proc- 
essor. 

Through program linkage, hyphenation/s60 ac- 
cepts a word from the user's program and determines 
the division points. The word, with the division points 
indicated, is returned to the user's program, where the 
portion to be retained on the line can be selected on 
the basis of the user's graphic requirements. 

This publication contains general descriptions of 
the application and program; a general systems chart; 
and programming system, minimum machine, and 
core and disk 2 requirements. 

For detailed information the reader is referred to 
the Program Description Manual, Form H20-0525. 
(22 pages) 



E20-0306 IBM 1287 Input Conversion 60 

Program — Application Description 

The ibm Input Conversion Program translates cut- 
form document information from the mu 1287 Optical 
Reader into computerrprocessable data. The program 
is designed to enable a user to utilize the ibm 1287 
Optical Reader in implementing input conversion in 
an efficient and economical manner without the need 
of additional programming. The input conversion proc- 
ess is an essential link between the information coming 
from the multitudes of data sources and its utilization 
in an integrated data processing system. 

The ability of the ibm 1287 to accept numerical 
data (plus some special symbols) from documents 
provides an economical system solution for the expe- 
ditious and accurate data collection required by any 
advanced data processing system. (22 pages) 



F20-O009 Summary of System/360 50 

Transition Aids 

This manual describes transition aids provided by ibm 
to assist users in the conversion of programs and data 
files to the System/360. Each transition aid is described 
with respect to general specifications, application, and 
performance to assist in deteinuning the applicability 
of each aid in various transition situations. References 
are provided to other publications containing more de- 
tailed information on each transition aid. (31 pages) 



F20-8172 Bibliography of Data Processing 00 

Techniques 

This bibliography and associated classification system 
provide a means to identify selected ibm publications 
which, either wholly or in part, document data proc- 
essing techniques information. The listing of any given 
publication in this bibliography, however, does not 
preclude its appearance in other reference bibliogra- 
phies such as the Systems Reference Library. 

Part I of this bibliography lists publications within 
major subject classification. Note that a publication 
may appear in more than one classification. Part n 
contains abstracts of the publications in form-number 
sequence. ( 12 pages) 



34 



H20-0126 Advanced Life Information 60 

System — Application Description 

Program Number: 360A-IL-O9X 
This system represents a new insurance information 
systems approach to the maintenance, processing, and 
servicing of individual life insurance contracts. It pro- 
vides for immediate direct access inquiry and a base 
for a teleprocessing communications network. 

The system uses a modular programming technique 
to process all scheduled and nonscheduled transac- 
tions, to provide figures for annual and interim state- 
ment purposes, to update policies with cash values, 
dividends, and other forms of participation, and to 
update policies with renewable term premiums on or 
just before anniversary. Internal and remote interrupt 
capabilities provide policy status on loan, surrenders, 
and mode premium values. 

Basically, the information contained in this manual 
includes a general description of the system, insurance 
statements describing the approach, and a discussion 
of the policy master record. The manual is intended to 
define for the reader the amount of information 
needed to establish the system and to serve as a guide 
for his early planning. (64 pages) 



H20-0136 Mathematical Programming 60 

System/360 — Application Description 

mps/360 is an open-ended mathematical programming 
system. This manual is an overview of the capabilities 

of MPS/360 (380A-CO-14X), MARVEL ( S60A-CO-15X ) , and 

the mps Report Generator (360A-co-20x). marvel and 
the mps Report Generator operate under the control 
of mps/360. The detailed capabilities of each functional 
component are described in the associated User's 
Manual. 

Use of mps/360 might involve building a mathe- 
matical model, finding an optimal solution, determin- 
ing the effect of changing key data on the optimal solu- 
tion, computing alternate solutions by systematically 
varying cost or requirement data, and preparing a 
management report. Application areas include material 
allocation, blending of ingredients, production or re- 
finery scheduling, distribution and shipping, machine 
loading, waste reduction, and many other areas. 
(36 pages) 



that can be combined with a user's input, output, or 
computational routines to meet his needs. The package 
can be applied to the solution of many problems in 
industry, science, and engineering. 

Version 3 of the Scientific Subroutine Package for 
System/360 incorporates and extends the capabilities 
of the original ssp/aeo. This version provides over 40 
new mathematical and statistical subroutines, 24 of 
which are in both single- and double-precision 
Fortran. Typical of the new capabilities is the use of 
the or iteration for obtaining eigenvalues of a matrix, 
and the nonparametric test of Kolmogorov-Smimov. 

The application description presents the purpose and 
objectives of the program, a list of subroutines, ma- 
chine configuration, programming systems, precision, 
and a list of reference material. ( 20 pages ) 



H20-0173 System/360 Wholesale IMPACT 60 

Program Library Version 2 — Application 
Description 

Program Number: 360A-DW-0SX 
This manual describes use of the System/ 360 Whole- 
sale impact Program Library to implement the impact 
system of scientific inventory management. The Whole- 
sale impact system provides the means of deciding 
when to order and how much to order for items in 
inventory so as to minimize the total cost of inventory, 
purchasing and receiving, and lost discounts for any 
specified level of service. This is accomplished by use 
of probability science in combination with an ibm 
System/ 360. ( 16 pages ) 



H20-0181 System/360 APT Numerical Control 60 
Processor Versions 3 and A — Application 
Description 

Program Number: 360A-CN-10X 
The ibm System/360 apt uses a symbolic language to 
simplify the preparation of instructions for numerically 
controlled machine tools. The apt processor prepares 
intermediate data for a user-written postprocessor 
program. (84 pages) 



H20-0197 System/360 Bill of Material 60 

Processor— Application Description 

Program Number: 360-ME-O6X 
The ibm System/ 360 Bill of Material Processor is an 
implementation package used to create and maintain 
a central information system for a manufacturing or- 
ganization. The package will contain (1) generalized 
programs to organize and maintain part number (in- 
ventory, etc.), product structure, manufacturing rout- 
ing, and work center data on direct access files, and 
(2) logic diagrams explaining the retrieval and use of 
the information in manufacturing applications. 

This manual contains a general description of the 
application, the machine configuration, general systems 
charts, and a discussion of input/ output files. A section 
that contrasts this package to the ibm 1440-1311 Bill of 
Material Processor (1440-ME-02X) is provided for 
1440 users who may wish to upgrade their present 
system to a System/ 360. (38 pages) 



H20-0199 Flowchart— Application 60 

Description 

Program Number: 360A-SE-22X 
The ibm System/360 Flowchart is a System/360 pro- 
gram designed to produce program flowcharts. This 
documentation aid operates under the ibm Disk Oper- 
ating System (dos) and is intended to minimize the 
planning and effort required to produce and maintain 
program documentation. 
It enables the user to: 

1. Produce clear, standardized, easily reproduced 
computer-generated flowcharts. 

2. Facilitate program development by keeping flow- 
charts continually up to date. 

3. Standardize flowcharting techniques. 

This publication describes the purposes and objec- 
tives of the ibm System/360 Flowchart and explains 
its uses. It contains a general description of the appli- 
cation, a discussion of the input language, an explana- 
tion of System/ 360 Flowchart processing, a detailed 
description of the statements, and miscellaneous ap- 
plication information. 

For detailed information, the user is referred to the 
User's Manual. (25 pages) 



H20-0149 System/ 360 Online Teller Program 60 

and Mortgage Loan Background 
Capability — Application Description 

Program Number: 360A-FB-16X 
This program furnishes System/ 360 programming sup- 
port for 1060 systems and minimizes expenses in in- 
stalling and maintaining teller terminal complexes. 
The Application Description gives an overview of the 
program, lists its advantages, discusses applications- 
and machine-oriented concepts, presents control and 
audit procedures, and contains other standard sections, 
plus a glossary of terms. ( 18 pages) 



H20-0166 System/360 Scientific Subroutine 60 

Package Version III — Application 
Description 

Program Number: 360A-CM-03X 
The Scientific Subroutine Package (ssp) is a collection 
of over 250 Fortran subroutines divided, for the sake 
of presentation, into two groups : statistics and mathe- 
matics. Over 200 subroutines are presented in both 
single- and double-precision mode, ssp is a collection 
of input/output-free computational building blocks 



H20-0186 General Purpose Simulation 60 

System/360 — Application Description 

This manual discusses the role of gpss in system simu- 
lation, briefly describes the operation of the gpss pro- 
gram, and points out its application scope. A final 
section describes the new entities, block iypes, ex- 
panded features, and system requirements of gpss/360. 
(18 pages) 



H20-0194 System/360 Data Conversion 60 

Utilities — Application Description 

This publication describes the general capabilities of 
ibm System/ 360 Data Conversion Programs and, 
through examples, illustrates their use. 

The ibm System/ 360 Data Conversion Programs 
provide an effective and flexible capability for convert- 
ing current ibm system data files to System/ 360 data 
sets. Designed as general purpose utility programs 
utilizing control cards, the programs will accept data 
sets from current ibm systems tape or dasd devices and 
write these data sets in the proper formats on System/ 
360 tape or dasd devices. The programs have data 
transformation capability that allows maximum flexibil- 
ity in resystemizing data sets for System/360. (49 pages) 



H20-0202 Student Scheduling System/360 60 

Application Description 

Student Scheduling System/360 is a class section as- 
signment package for scheduling students in secondary 
schools, vocational schools, and junior colleges. After a 
school has created a master schedule of course offer- 
ings, the system processes student requests to create 
student schedules and class lists. 

This scheduling package includes two auxiliary pro- 
grams. A Tally program and a Conflict Matrix program 
furnish the school administrator with data useful to 
master schedule creation. The Tally run lists the total 
number of students requesting each course, and the 
Conflict Matrix points out potential scheduling con- 
flicts. 

The new package contains improvements over many 
similar programs. Greater flexibility is achieved by in- 
clusion of many new user options, such as better study 
hall control, common-course scheduling, an expanded 
prerun edit, and alternate course substitution. Parame- 
ters controlling number of periods per day, number of 
courses offered, sections per course, and total number 
of sections have been significantly enlarged. Features 
of the new ibm System/ 360 are also utilized to increase 
overall program effectiveness. (27 pages) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 35 



H20-0205 System/360 Scientific Subroutine 60 

Package Version ill — Programmer's 
Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CM-03X 
The Scientific Subroutine Package (ssp) is a collection 
of over 250 foktran subroutines divided, for the sake 
of presentation, into two groups: statistics and mathe- 
matics. Also, over 200 subroutines are presented in 
both single- and double-precision mode, ssp is a collec- 
tion of input/output-free computational building 
blocks that can be combined with a user's input, out- 
put, or computational routines to meet his needs. The 
package can be applied to the solution of many prob- 
lems in industry, science, and engineering. 

Version 3 of the Scientific Subroutine Package for 
System/360 incorporates and extends the capabilities 
of the original ssp/seo. This version provides over 40 
new mathematical and statistical subroutines, 24 of 
which are in both single- and double-precision 
Fortran. Examples of the new capabilities are the use 
of the or iteration for obtaining eigenvalues of a 
matrix, and the nonparametric test of Kolmogorov- 
Smimov. 

This manual contains sufficient information to per- 
mit the reader to understand and use all of the sub- 
routines of the Scientific Subroutine Package. (460 



H20-0210 Project Management System 60 

for IBM System/360 — Application 
Description 

PMS/360 is a highly modular set of computer program 
routines, each performing one function common to 
many management applications. It is open-ended — 
that is, the number of functions under pms/sbo can be 
expanded and added to. It is versatile — that is, the 
user can control program logic without resorting to 
reprogramming. Output reports can be defined with a 
single set of procedural statements and can be revised 
with every computer run if required. The computer 
code itself is written in a way that simplifies modifica- 
tion, if this ever becomes necessary. At present, pms/ 
380 contains the following three modules: a Network 
Processor, a Cost Processor, and a versatile Report 
Processor. In suitable combinations these processors 
will accomplish the data processing required in critical 
path analysis, pert, and pert Cost. (29 pages) 



H20-02 1 7 System/360 COBOL Edit on the 60 

1401 Program Reference Manual 

Program Number: 1401-SE-13X 

This program is of benefit to System/ 360 cobol users 
in detecting syntactical errors in System/ 360 cobol 
program statements before compilation of the System/ 
360. 

The program reference manual contains complete 
data on the application description, programming in- 
formation, and operating instructions. Systems informa- 
tion is not presented in detail. ( 22 pages ) 

H20-0220 Student Scheduling System/360 60 

The Tally and Conflict Matrix 
Programs — User's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-US-06X 
Use of the Tally and Conflict Matrix programs of Stu- 
dent Scheduling System/360 is facilitated by this com- 
bined programmer's and operator's manual. These two 
programs furnish the school administrator the data 
needed to create the best possible master schedule of 
course and section offerings, prior to use of the Sched- 
uler Program. 



The Tally program accumulates the number of stu- 
dents requesting each course, by sex and by grade. 
These counts are used to determine how many sections 
of a given course are required. Those courses shown to 
require one- or two-section offerings are entered into 
the Conflict Matrix program, which is then used to 
point out potential scheduling conflicts. 

The programmer's section of this manual contains 
program systems charts, general program description, 
i/o description, program modification aids, sample 
problem, etc. The operator's section contains program 
setup sheet, console operators instructions, message 
list, storage maps, and restart procedures. (22 pages) 



H2O-0222 System/360 Project Control System 60 

Version 2 — Application Description 

Program Number: 360A-CP-06X 

This manual presents a brief description of a project 
control system, and discusses the design, features, and 
input/ output characteristics of a computer program 
developed to serve as the data processing element of 
such a system. Although the ibm System/ 360 Project 
Control System is designed primarily for those areas 
of government and industry concerned with construc- 
tion, repair, or maintenance, its features are such that 
it can meet the critical path requirements of a broad 
range of users, regardless of industry. (24 pages) 



H20-0232 System/360 Data Conversion 60 

Utility I Programmer's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-15X 

This program is useful in converting ibm 1620/1401/ 
1440/1460/1410/7010 card, tape, and dasd data files to 
System/360 tape or dasd data sets. 

The Programmer's Manual presents a general and 
detailed description of the program and its operation 
under the ibm System/ 360 Basic Operating System 
(8K disk). In addition, the individual modules, stand- 
ard program interfaces, and incorporation of user 
modules are discussed. 

The reader should be familiar with IBM System/360 
Data Conversion Utility I — Application Description, 
Form H20-0194, IBM Basic Operating System/360 As- 
sembler with Input /Output Macros (8K Disk), Form 
C24-3361, and IBM Basic Operating System/360 Pro- 
grammer's Guide, Form C24-3372. 

(86 pages) 



H20-0233 System/360 Data Conversion 60 

Utility I Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-15X 
This program is useful in converting ibm 1620/1401/ 
1440/1460/1410/7010 card, tape, and dasd data files to 
System/ 360 tape or dasd data sets. 

The Operator's Manual presents a program setup 
sheet, console operating instructions, message list, stor- 
age maps and restart procedures. 

The reader should be familiar with System/360 Data 
Conversion Utilities — Application Description, Form 
H20-0194, IBM System/360 Data Conversion Utility I 
— Programmers Manual, Form H20-0232, and IBM 
Basic Operating System/360 Operating Guide, Form 
C24-3450. 

(32 pages) 



H20-0239 Student Scheduling System/360 60 

The Scheduler Program 
User's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-US-WX 

Student Scheduling System/360 is a class section as- 
signment program for scheduling students in secon- 
dary schools, vocational schools, and junior colleges. 
After a school has created a master schedule of course 
offerings, the system processes student requests to 
create student schedules and class lists. 

This manual contains a detailed explanation of the 
Scheduler program within the scheduling application 
framework, with special emphasis on input data and 
output reports. It also includes an "Operator's Section," 
which describes operational setup and running pro- 
cedures. (64 pages) 



H20-O240 System/360 Continuous System 60 

Modeling Program — Application 
Description 

Program Number: 360A-CX-16X 
This is an ibm System/360 program for the simulation 
of continuous systems. It provides an application- 
oriented input language that accepts problems ex- 
pressed in the form of either an analog block diagram 
or a system of ordinary differential equations. Data 
input and output are facilitated by means of applica- 
tion-oriented control statements. 

This manual contains a general description of the 
application, the machine configuration, a general sys- 
tems chart, and a sample problem. (32 pages). 



H20-0242 Synchronous Transmit-Receive 60 

Access Method for OS/360 
Application Description 

This manual describes the macro-instruction support 
which enables a System/360 with os/seo to communi- 
cate with STR-type terminal devices. The level of sup- 
port is discussed, and the language is briefly described. 
(12 pages) 



H20-0243 Synchronous Transmit-Receive 60 

Access Method for DOS/360 
Application Description 

This manual describes the macro-instruction support 
which enables a System/360 with dos/mo to communi- 
cate with STR-type terminal devices. The level of sup- 
port is discussed, and the language is briefly described. 
(7 pages) 



H20-0244 Communications Control 60 

Application Program 
Programmer's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SC-01X 
This manual is intended to supply an overall under- 
standing of the ccap system concepts. It contains 
sufficient information to allow a systems programmer 
to plan and design a ccap installation. Information 
necessary for implementing any modifications prior to 
installation is contained in detail in the System Manual 
supplied with delivery of the system from the Program 
Information Department. (52 pages) 



36 



H20-0246 System/360 Bill of Material 60 

Processor Version 2 — Programmer's 
Manual 

Program Number: 360A-ME-06X 
The ibm System/360 Bill of Material Processor is an 
implementation package used to create and maintain 
the central data files for a manufacturing organization. 
This manual includes (1) & brief discussion of sys- 
tem definition, (2) a checklist of things to be done be- 
fore modifying the file organization and maintenance 
programs or preparing retrieval programs, (3) descrip- 
tions of all i/o files, (4) explanation and operating in- 
structions for the sample problem, (5) descriptions of 
all the file organization and maintenance programs 
and instructions for their modification, and (6) de- 
scriptions and logic diagrams for selecteduser retrieval 
programs. (400 pages) 



H20-0254 System/360 Bill of Material 60 

Processor Version 2 — Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-ME46X 
The dbm System/360 Bill of Material Processor is an 
implementation package used to create and maintain 
the central data files for a manufacturing organization. 
This operator's manual for the file organization and 
maintenance programs contains detailed operating in- 
formation for: 

1. Master File Creation and Maintenance Modules 

2. Chain File Creation and Maintenance Modules 

3. Bill of Material Processor Input/ Output Modules 
to be used with user-prepared retrieval programs 

4. File reorganization modules 

5. A set of four specialized Bill of Material Processor 
utility programs 

In addition there are specific operating procedures 
for ibm Basic Operating System/360 control programs 
and the ibm Disk Operating System/360 control pro- 
grams as they apply to the Bill of Material Processor. 
(96 pages) 



H20-0255 Syslem/360 Wholesale IMPACT 60 

Program Library Program Description 
Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360A-DW-0SX, Version 2 

360V-DW-06X 
This program library provides a distributor with the 
information necessary to determine when and how 
much to order, thus minimizing the total cost of 
carrying inventory, purchasing and receiving, freight 
charges, and lost discounts for any specified level of 
service. The program library uses probability science 
in combination with an ibm System/360. 

The impact programs are grouped into two cate- 
gories: initializing programs, and operating programs. 
Five programs are provided for initializing purposes: 
( 1 ) Edit Run, ( 2 ) Mean Absolute Deviation and Fore- 
cast Model Run, (3) Order Quantity and Order Model 
Run, (4) Safety Stock and Safety Factor Run, and (5) 
Report Generator Run. Three programs are provided 
for operating purposes: (1) Service Point and Varia- 
ble Interval Allocation Run, (2) Fixed Interval Al- 
location Run, and (3) Allocation Print Run. An 
extensive group of macroinstructions is included for 
incorporation in user-written programs. The Wholesale 
impact program Library for the Model 20 (360V-DW- 
06X) is a subset of the System/360 Library (360A- 
DW-05X). 

This manual contains a general description of the 
overall system and a detailed description of each pro- 
gram and macroinstruction. (184 pages) 



H2O-0256 System/360 Wholesale IMPACT 60 

Program Library Operations Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360A-DW-05X, Version 2 

360V-DW-06X 
This program library provides a distributor with the 
information necessary to determine when and how 
much to order, thus minimizing the total cost of car- 
rying inventory, purchasing and receiving, freight 
charges, and lost discounts for any specified level of 
service. The program library uses probability science 
in combination with an ibm System/360 Data Process- 
ing System. 

The impact programs are grouped into two cate- 
gories: initializing and operating programs. Five pro- 
grams are provided for initializing purposes: (1) Edit 
Run, (2) Mean Absolute Deviation and Forecast 
Model Run, (3) Order Quantity and Order Model 
Run, (4) Safety Stock and Safety Factor Run, and (5) 
Report Generator Run. Three programs are provided 
for operating purposes: ( 1 ) Service Point and Variable 
Interval Allocation Run, (2) Fixed Interval Allocation 
Run, and (3) Allocation Print Run. 

The Model 20 Program Library is a subset of the 
System/360 Wholesale impact Program Library. 

This manual contains a general description of the 
overall system and a detailed description of each pro- 
gram. (72 pages) 



H20-0262 System/360 Demand Deposit 60 

Accounting — Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-FB-15X 
This manual contains operating instructions for the 
runs that make up the System/ 360 Demand Deposit 
Accounting application program. It includes instruc- 
tions for preparation of all i/o units, and, for each 
program, a program setup sheet, operating instruc- 
tions, operator message list, and core map. ( 124 pages ) 



H20-0263 System/360 Demand Deposit 60 

Accounting— Programmer's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-EB-1SX 
This program is adaptable by commercial banks to ac- 
complish demand deposit accounting in either a single 
or multi-bank environment The program provides for 
conversion of ibm 1440 series disk and tape balance 
and name/ address records. Also included are programs 
to collect and display historical profit and loss informa- 
tion for selected accounts or groups of accounts. 

For each program, this manual presents a program 
abstract, program systems chart, and general descrip- 
tion. Where applicable, some program modification 
aids are included. 

The input/ output section includes a summary for all 
files by type (card, disk, tape, printer, and micr) and 
a visual record layout and description of file functions. 
(220 pages) 



H20-0285 System/360 Data Conversion 60 

Utility III, Version 2 
Programmer's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-26X 
These macros will be helpful in converting ibm 705/ 
1401/1410/1440/ 1460/1620/7010/7040/ 7044/7070/ 
7074/7080/7090/7094 card or tape data files to System/ 
360 tape or dasd data sets. 

This manual presents a general and detailed descrip- 
tion of the program and its operation under the ibm 
System/360 Tape Operating System and the ibm 
System/360 Disk Operating System. In addition, the 



macro capabilities, standard program interfaces, and 
incorporation of user instructions are discussed. 

The reader should be familiar with the correspond- 
ing Application Description, Form H20-0194, and 
Operator's Manual, Form H20-0286, and with those 
ibm System/360 manuals listed in the Application 
Directory. (93 pages) 



H20-0286 System/360 Data Conversion 60 

Utility III, Version 2 
Operator's Manual 

This program will be useful in converting ibm 705/ 
1401 / 1410/1440/ 1460/1620/7010/ 7040/ 7044/7070/ 
7074/7080/7090/7094 card and tape data files to 
System/360 tape or dasd data sets. 

This manual presents operating procedures, a mes- 
sage list, restart procedures, and a program setup 
sheet. 

The reader should be familiar with the correspond- 
ing Application Description, Form H20-0194 and Pro- 
grammer's Manual, Form H2O-0285, and with IBM 
System/360 Tape Operating System, Operating Guide, 
Form C24-5021, or IBM System/360 Disk Operating 
System, Operating Guide, Form C24-5022. (17 pages) 



H20-0290 Mathematical Programming 60 

System/360 Control Language 
User's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CO-14X 
This manual is one of a series of manuals which de- 
scribe the use of the rsM Mathematical Programming 
System/360 (MPs/seo). It assumes that the user is 
familiar with the Application Description, Form H20- 
0136 and IBM Operating System/360 Job Control Lan- 
guage, Form C28-6531. This manual is a prerequisite 
of MPS 1 360 Linear Programming User's Manual, Form 
H20-0291, and the mps/sm marvel Manual (to be 
published at a later date). This manual describes the 
organization of the components of MPs/seo and their 
interface with Operating System/360 (os/seo). It also 
describes in detail the control language used to com- 
municate a solution strategy for solving a mathemati- 
cal programming problem to MPs/seo, and os/360 job 
control language statements necessary to execute mps/ 
360. (38 pages) 



H20-0293 System/360 Flowchart 60 

User's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-22X 
The ibm System/360 Flowchart is a System/360 pro- 
gram designed to produce program flowcharts. This 
documentation aid operates under the ibm Disk Oper- 
ating System (dos) and is intended to minimize the 
planning and effort required to produce and maintain 
program documentation. 
It enables the user to: 

1. Produce clear, standardized, easily reproduced 
computer-generated flowcharts. 

2. Keep flowcharts continually up to date. 

3. Standardize flowcharting techniques. 

This reference publication contains the specifications 
and detailed instructions for using the System/ 360 
Flowchart program. The only prerequisite for reading 
it is a basic understanding of flowcharting. (56 pages) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 37 



H20-0294 System/360 Flowchart 60 

Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-22X 
The ibm System/360 Flowchart is a System/360 pro- 
gram designed to produce program flowcharts. This 
documentation aid operates under the ibm Disk Oper- 
ating System (dos) and is intended to minimize the 
planning and effort required to produce and maintain 
program documentation. 
It gives the user the ability to: 

1. Produce clear, standardized, easily reproduced 
computer-generated flowcharts. 

2. Keep flowcharts up to date continually. 

3. Standardize flowcharting techniques. 

This reference publication gives the specifications 
and detailed information for operating the System/ 360 
Flowchart program. It contains the console operating 
instructions, job control card deck key, job control 
card details, halt and message list, a file and storage 
map, and restart procedures. 

A knowledge of dos operating procedures, including 
the use of job control card, is a prerequisite for reading 
and using this manual. 

For more detailed information about the System/360 
Flowchart input language, refer to the User's Manual. 
(20 pages) 



H20-0297 System/360 Administrative 60 

Terminal System — OS (ATS/OS) 
Application Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-19X 

This system consists of control and functional programs 
that permit many different text-processing and data- 
handling activities to be carried on simultaneously 
through different typewriter terminals attached to an 
ibm System/360. Written to operate under os/3eo, the 
Administrative Terminal System runs in a multipro- 
gramming environment. It will run concurrently with 
and independently of other tasks in other partitions/ 
regions. 

This publication contains a general discussion of 
the features of the program, an indication of some of 
the areas in which it may be applied, and the machine 
configuration required. Three appendices are included 
dealing with data formats, core storage estimates, and 
communication line requirements. (28 pages) 



H20-0302 Shared Hospital Accounting 60 

System (SHAS) Application Description 

Program Number: 360A-VH-11X 
The Shared Hospital Accounting System (shas), de- 
veloped by rBM, provides extensive accounting services 
to groups of hospitals sharing central System/360 com- 
puter facilities. By means of a flexible system of pro- 
grams and options, each participating hospital retains 
its own individuality in terms of access to records as 
well as types and formats of files set up and reports 



Managed by an executive program, the system re- 
cords and processes data related to inpatient and out- 
patient billing, accounts receivable, and general ledger, 
and is designed to facilitate automatic preparation of 
Medicare and other insurance billing forms. Com- 
munication with the central facility is effected through 
teleprocessing terminals located at each hospital in the 
group. 

This publication describes the objectives and fea- 
tures of the rBM Shared Hospital Accounting System 
and is designed to give the reader an overall knowl- 
edge of the system without reference to program detail. 
(112 pages) 



H20-0304 General Purpose Simulation 60 

System/360 Introduction- — User's Manual 

This publication provides a basic introduction to the 
use of the General Purpose Simulation System/360 
(gpss/36o). It is written for those individuals who have 
no previous simulation experience. 

Examples are given throughout the manual to em- 
phasize the basic features of the gpss/sbo program. A 
complete and detailed description of all the gpss/360 
features may be found in the General Purpose Simula- 
tion System/360 User's Manual, Form H20-0326. Read- 
ers are advised to obtain a copy of the User's Manual 
when they begin to write more sophisticated models. 

The information presented in this manual should 
enable most readers to apply the program intelligently 
within a short period of time. (88 pages) 



H20-0305 System/360 Online Teller Program 60 
and Mortgage Loan Background Capability 
Programmer's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-FB-16X 

This program furnishes System/ 360 programming sup- 
port for 1060 systems and minimizes expenses in in- 
stalling and maintaining teller terminal complexes. The 
Programmer's Manual presents the program logic and 
data definitions for the program. It enables a user to 
plan modifications to the program to suit bis own re- 
quirements. (188 pages) 



H20-0309 System/360 APT Numerical 60 

Control Processor — Part Programming 
Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CN-10X 
This program has been developed to span the gap be- 
tween the engineering drawing and the machine tool 
control system. 

This manual describes apt (Automatic Programmed 
Tool), a programming system that uses an English-like 
language to describe a part shown as an engineering 
drawing. The statements are keypunched into cards, 
converted by the apt processor into an intermediate 
format, and then converted to instructions that can be 
read by the machine tool controller. (113 pages) 



H20-0311 General Purpose Simulation 60 

Operating System/360 — Operator's 
Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CS-17X 
This publication contains information that will enable 
the user to link-edit and incorporate the gpss/360 pro- 
gram into a system for subsequent execution under the 
control of os/seo. Detailed examples are given for edit- 
ing the gpss/360 program into a private jobltb or the 
os/seo sys. ltnkltb; several other examples illustrate 
the os/aeo jol cards required to execute models that 
use various features provided by gpss/s60. 

This Operator's Manual describes and illustrates a 
method (reallocation) whereby the user can reallo- 
cate the quantity of gpss/360 entities and effectively 
use all available core on a given machine. The various 
data sets required by gpss/sbo are also listed and de- 
scribed. (37 pages) 



H20-0313 System/360 Data Conversion 60 

Utility II, Version 3 (Sequential, Direct 
Access) — Programmer's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-20X 

This program will be useful in converting ibm 705/ 
1410/7010/7040/ 7044/7070/7074/7080/7090/7094 
card, tape, and dasd data files to System/360 tape or 
dasd data sets. 

This manual presents a general and detailed descrip- 
tion of the program and its operation under the ibm 
Operating System/ 360. In addition, the individual 
modules, standard program interfaces, and incorpora- 
tion of user coding are discussed. (122 pages) 

H20-0314 System/360 Data Conversion 60 

Utility II, Version 3 (Direct Access Indexed 
Sequential) — Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-20X 

This program will be useful in converting ibm 705/ 
1410 / 7010 / 7040 / 7044 / 7070 / 7074 / 7080 / 7090 / 7094 
card, tape, and dasd data files to System/ 360 tape or 
dasd data sets. 

This manual presents a program setup sheet, console 
operating instructions, and a message list. (14 pages) 

H20-0315 IBM System/360 Document 60 

Processing System — Application Description 

The System/ 360 Document Processing System oper- 
ates under the control of Operating System/ 360, proc- 
essing narrative and bibliographic data into a set of 
interrelated data sets. These data sets can then be 
searched for Boolean combinations of keywords. Vari- 
ous elements of the data sets can be manipulated by a 
set of special utilities to produce various forms of in- 
dexes. 

Without limiting the system to a specific applica- 
tion, because no such limit exists, this manual surveys 
the operational concepts and capabilities of System/ 
360 Document Processing. Routines within the system 
are written in the os/seo Assembler Language and 
require no further coding on the part of the system 
user. (28 pages) 

H20-0318 Public Utility Customer Information 60 

Control System— Application Description 

The ibm System/360 Public Utility Customer Informa- 
tion Control System is a program modularly con- 
structed and designed to assist customers in the in- 
stallation of online information systems. The Customer 
Information Control System is an interface program 
between user-written processing programs and System/ 
360 Operating System; the control system with the 
user-written programs and System/360 Operating sys- 
tem comprises an information system. Through a series 
of macro instructions, the user invokes the facilities of 
the Customer Information Control System. 

This manual describes the Customer Information 
Control System. Knowledge of System/360 Operating 
System would assist the reader in understanding the 
contents of this manual. (44 pages) 

H20-0319 System/360 Data Conversion and 60 

Label Processing Subroutines, Version 2 
Program Reference Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-23X 
This manual contains a description of a set of sub- 
routines that may be used in converting data files from 
current system formats to System/ 360 formats and 
vice versa. The subroutines available for processing 
current system data file formats are listed and de- 
scribed. Also, the use of the subroutines is shown by 
example. ( 63 pages ) 



38 



H20-O321 IBM System/360 Attached Support 60 

Processor System (ASP) Version 2 
Console Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-15X 
The Attached Support Processor (asp) system is a mul- 
tiprocessor operating system that provides a compatible 
extension to Operating System/360 (os/seo). Designed 
primarily for the use of the customer with a large sci- 
entific system and a workload typically consisting of 
many jobs of short duration, asp includes features to 
facilitate the use of the 709X Emulator and os/aeo 
integrated into the same operational environment. 

This manual contains instructions that will permit 
the console operator to operate the asp system, asp 
console operation is identical in most respects to ibm 
System/360 operation. Therefore, to avoid repetition 
of documentation, the material in this manual has been 
prepared on the assumption that the operator is famil- 
iar with ibm System/ 360 operation. Details concerning 
System/360 operations are found in IBM System/360 
Operating System, Operator's Guide, Form C28-6540, 
and in its prerequisite and recommended publications. 
If the 709X Emulator is to be used, the asp operator 
should also be familiar with ibm System/360 Conver- 
sion Aids, 709/7090/7094/709411 Emulator Program, 
Form C28-6565. (120 pages) 



60 



H20-0322 IBM System/360 Attached Support 
Processor System (ASP) Version 2 
Application Programmer's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-15X 
The Attached Support Processor (asp) system is a 
multiprocessor operating system which provides a 
functional extension to Operating System/360 (os/ 
aao ). Designed primarily for the use of the customer 
with a large scientific system whose workload typically 
consists of many jobs of short duration, asp includes 
features to facilitate the use of the 709X Emulator and 
os/seo integrated into the same operational environ- 
ment. 

This manual contains detailed information concern- 
ing system concepts, programming considerations, con- 
trol cards, deck setup, and output, os/300 program- 
ming is the primary operating system used for asp; 
therefore, to avoid repetition of documentation, the 
material in this manual has been prepared on the 
assumption that the programmer is familiar with os/ 
860 programming. Details of os/seo utilization are 
found in IBM Operating System/360 Job Control Lan- 
guage, Form C28-6539, and in its prerequisite and 
recommended publications. (44 pages) 



H20-0323 IBM System/360 Attached Support 60 

Processor System (ASP) Version 2 
System Programmer's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-15X 
The Attached Support Processor (asp) system is a 
multiprocessor operating system which extends the 
functional capabilities of Operating System/360 (os/ 
360 ). Designed primarily for the use of the customer 
with a large scientific system whose workload typically 
consists of many jobs of short duration, asp includes 
features to facilitate the use of the 709X Emulator 
and os/seo integrated into the same operational en- 
vironment. 

This manual contains detailed information concern- 
ing die internal operations of die asp system and in- 
cludes a functional description, instructions for writing 
Dynamic Support Programs and for generating the 
system, and a description of modifications to os/seo 
and 709X Emulator programs. (172 pages) 



H20-0325 System/360 Online Teller Program 60 

and Mortgage Loan Background Capability 
Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-FB-16X 

The Operator s Manual includes operating procedures 
for the Online Teller program as well as the Conver- 
sion, Reorganization, and Control Pack Setup pro- 
grams. It also contains a discussion of testing aids. (36 
pages) 



H20-0326 General Purpose Simulation 60 

System/360 — User's Manual 

This publication is an extension and amplification of 
the GPss/seo Introductory User's Manual, Form H20- 
0304. It provides a detailed description and explana- 
tion of the component parts and operation of the 
GPss/seo program. Examples illustrating the uses of 
GPss/seo are given in appropriate sections of the man- 
ual. This manual should enable the reader to construct 
and simulate models using the full capabilities of 
gpss/soo. (244 pages) 



H20-0327 General Purpose Simulation 60 

System/360, Disk Operating System 
Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CS-19X 

This publication contains information that will enable 
the user to link-edit and incorporate the gpss/soo pro- 
gram into a system for subsequent execution under the 
control of dos/380. 

A method (beaixocation) whereby the user can 
reallocate the quantity of gpss/sbo entities and effec- 
tively use all available core on a given machine is 
described and illustrated. The various data sets re- 
quired by gpss/sbo are also listed and described. (20 
) 



H20-0329 IBM System/360 Product Structure 60 

Retrieval Program — Application 
Description 

The ibm System/360 Product Structure Retrieval Pro- 
gram is an implementation package used to retrieve 
product structure records created and maintained by 
the System/360 Bill of Material Processor Program 
(seoA-ME-oex). The package will contain (1) general- 
ized programs to retrieve product structure records, 
(2) flexible user report formats, and (3) logic dia- 
grams explaining the retrieval and use of the informa- 
tion in manufacturing applications. 

This manual contains a general description of the 
application, the machine configuration, general systems 
charts, and a discussion of input/ output files. (24 
pages) 



H20-0331 System/360 APT Numerical Control 60 
Processor Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CN-10X 
This manual provides suggested processor generation 
and maintenance techniques, program setup instruc- 
tions, console operating instructions, halts and error 
messages, storage map, and restart procedures. (12 
pages) 



H20-0344 Project Management System/360 60 

Version 2 Program Description and 
Operations Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CP-04X 
This manual provides a detailed description of the 
three component parts of pms/soo: the Network Proces- 
sor, the Cost Processor, and the Report Processor. It 
provides in detail the format of input required, the 
methods of calculation followed, and an explanation of 
the output generated by each processor. It also defines 
os/360 Job Control cards required to run the three 
processors. 

This manual will enable the user to perform critical 
path analysis as well as pert and PERx/Cost analyses. 
(400 pages) 



H20-0346 Synchronous Transmit-Receive 60 

Access Method for DOS/360 
User's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-32X 
This publication describes the Synchronous Transmit- 
Receive Access Method for dos/sbo. The stb access 
method provides macro instructions and routines to 
support sth transmission under program control. The 
macro instructions are described for the following 
functions: 

1. Environment definition 

2. Line control 

3. Data transmission 

4. Code conversion 

In addition, the stb error messages are described 
and a macro instruction summary is given. Prerequi- 
sites are: a basic knowledge of System/360 machine 
concepts, a basic knowledge of dos/soo, and a knowl- 
edge of the principles of stb data transmission. (36 
pages) 



H2O-0347 Synchronous Transmit-Receive 60 

Access Method for DOS/360 
Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-32X 
This publication describes the operator actions when 
using the Synchronous Transmit-Receive Access 
Method for dos/360. Topics include establishing a data 
line, error messages, and maintenance. (8 pages) 



H20-0349 Synchronous Transmit-Receive 60 

Access Method for System/360 
Operating System User's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-33X 
This publication describes the Synchronous Transmit- 
Receive Access Method for os/seo. The stb Access 
Method provides macro instructions and routines to 
support stb transmission under program control. The 
macro instructions are described for the following 
functions: 

1. Environment definition 

2. Line control 

3. Data transmission 

4. Buffer management 

5. Code conversion 

In addition, the stb error messages are described 
and a macro instruction summary is given. Prerequi- 
sites are: a basic knowledge of System/360 machine 
concepts, a basic knowledge of os/8eo, and a knowl- 
edge of the principles of stb data transmission. (64 
pages) 



IBM System/360 Bibliography 39 



H20-0350 Synchronous Transmit-Receive 60 

Access Method for OS/360 
Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-33X 
This publication describes the operator actions when 
using the Synchronous Transmit-Receive Access 
Method for os/sao. Topics include establishing a data 
line, error messages, and maintenance. (8 pages) 



H20-0352 1400 Autocoder to COBOL 60 

Conversion Aid Program Version 2 
Application Description 

Program Number: 360A-SE-19X 
This document provides information about the 1400 
Autocoder to cobol Conversion Aid Program (accap) 
and its resulting cobol programs. The information pro- 
vided should enable the user to evaluate accap for his 
installation before its use. 

The manual contains a general description of accap, 
a discussion of the overall program conversion process, 
and some testing experiences with the program. (28 
pages) 



H20-0353 IBM System/360 Remote Access 60 

Computing System (RAX) Version 2 
Application Description 

Program Number: 360A-CX-17X 
This system is designed to allow multiple concurrent 
access to a System/360 processor from remote termi- 
nals, rax implements time-sharing techniques for the 
compilation and execution of user computing problems 
in Fortran and Assembler languages. Also, it provides 
a Terminal Command Language to provide control of 
the terminal and to implement the use of the program- 
ming languages. 

This publication contains a description of the system, 
the equipment requirements, the system capabilities, 
the elements of the Terminal Command Language, 
and a discussion of the system operation. (32 pages) 



H20-0354 System/360 Remote Access 60 

Computing System (RAX) Version 3 
Program Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-17X 
This publication provides the information necessary to 
use the ism System/360 Remote Access Computing 
System (fax). It contains a description of the system, 
which provides concurrent access to a System/360 
Model 30, 40, or 50, for up to 63 remote 1050 ibm Data 
Communication Terminals and eight 2260 Display Sta- 
tion locations. This system provides for the compila- 
tion and execution of Basic Fortran rv and Basic 
Assembler Language programs and the maintenance of 
program and data files in a library structure. (148 pages) 



H20-0355 IBM System/360 Remote Access 60 

Computing System (RAX) Version 3 
Operations Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-17X 

This publication provides the System/360 machine 
operator with detailed instructions for starting, run- 
ning, and stopping the Remote Access Computing Sys- 
tem (bax). It includes machine requirements, descrip- 
tion of online messages and their meanings, and restart 
procedures. This manual also includes the procedures 
required for system -generation and library mainte- 
nance. (44 pages) 



H20-0367 System/360 Continuous System 60 

Modeling Program User's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-16X 
This is an ibm System/360 program for the simulation 
of continuous systems. It provides an application- 
oriented input language that accepts problems ex- 
pressed in the form of either an analog block diagram 
or a system of ordinary differential equations. Data 
input and output are facilitated by application- 
oriented control statements. 

This manual contains a general description of the 
program, detailed programming information, and a 
description of the inputs and outputs. (68 pages) 



H20-0368 System/360 Continuous System 60 

Modeling Program Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-16X 
This is an ibm System/360 program for the simulation 
of continuous systems. It provides an application- 
oriented input language that accepts problems ex- 
pressed in the form of either an analog block diagram 
or a system of ordinary differential equations. 

This manual contains information and procedures 
that will enable the user to incorporate the System/360 
Continuous System Modeling Program into an Operat- 
ing System/360 library; to include a procedure in the 
Operating System/360 procedure library (os/aeo 
SYSi.PROCLm); and subsequently to execute System/ 360 
csmp under the control of, and using the services of, 
os/3eo. (20 pages) 



H20-0369 System/360 Product Structure 60 

Retrieval Program Programmer's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-ME-07X 
The ibm System/360 retrieval package for the BUI of 
Material Processor Program provides the following 
types of retrieval: 

1. Single-level explosion 

2. Indented explosion 

3. Summarized explosion 

4. Single-level implosion 

5. Indented implosion 

6. Summarized implosion 
This manual includes: 

1. A brief discussion of system definition. 

2. A checklist of things to be done before cus- 
tomizing retrieval programs. 

3. Descriptions of all i/o files. 

4. Explanation and operating instructions for the 
sample problem. 

5. Descriptions of all retrieval programs and sub- 
routines, plus instructions for their modification. 

6. Descriptions and logic diagrams for three re- 
trieval phases. (48 pages) 



H20-0370 System/360 Product Structure 60 

Retrieval Program Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-ME-07X 

The ibm System/360 Bill of Material Processor Re- 
trieval Programs constitute an implementation package 
that uses the assembly and where-used information 
from the processor files previously loaded on disk to 
produce reports for the user. 

This manual for the retrieval programs contains de- 
tailed operating information for retrieval program sys- 
tem loading and retrieval job control. (16 pages) 



H20-0372 Mathematical Programming 60 

System/360 Read Communications Format 
(READCOMM) — Program Reference Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CO-14X 
This manual provides the system user with the infor- 
mation necessary to use the Read Communications 
Format (readcomm) feature of mps/sw. beadcomm is 
a subroutine that enables the user to augment mps/sm 
with procedures written in the Fortran language. 

This manual assumes that the user is familiar with 
the MPS/360 Application Description, Form H20- 
0136, the MPS/360 Control Language User's Manual, 
Form H20-0290, the MPS/360 Linear Programming 
User's Manual, Form H20-0291, and the Fortran pro- 
gramming language. (48 pages) 



H20-0373 System/360 AUTOSPOT Numerical 60 
Control Processor, Version 2 — Part 
Programming Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CN48X 
This manual describes the autospot language for 
users of numerically controlled machine tools. Included 
in this manual are definitions and examples of lan- 
guage elements. Also included are the interpretation of 
machining statements as output to the clfile and the 
description of this output file. (176 pages) 



H20-0374 System/360 AUTOSPOT and 60 

AD-APT/AUTOSPOT Numerical Control 
Processors, Version 2 — Operator's Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360A-CN-WX (AUTOSPOT) 

360A-CN-09X (AD-APT/AUTOSPOT) 
This manual provides suggested processor generation 
and maintenance techniques, program setup instruc- 
tions, console operating instructions, halts and error 
messages, storage map, restart procedures, and disk 
storage map. ( 12 pages ) 



H20-O375 System/360 AD-APT/AUTOSPOT 60 

Numerical Control Processor, Version 2 
Part Programming Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CN-09X 
The ibm n/c 860 adaptation of apt for small computers 
(ad-apt) uses a symbolic language to simplify the 
preparation of instructions for numerically controlled 
machined tools. The ad-apt processor prepares inter- 
mediate data for a user-written postprocessor program. 
This manual contains the definition and examples of 
the ad-apt symbolic language. (152 pages) 



H20-0376 Project Control System/360 60 

Program Description and Operations Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CP-06X 
The Project Control System serves as the data process- 
ing element of a system that helps management carry 
out its functions of planning and supervising projects, 
within a broader environment of operations and pro- 
cedures. Although designed primarily for those areas 
of government and industry concerned with construc- 
tion, repair, or maintenance, the system will meet the 
critical path requirements of a broad range of users, 
irrespective of industry. It will process data from net- 
works planned in either precedence-diagramming or 



40 



arrow-diagramming methods. The system consists of a 
set of routines stored on disk. The sequence of proc- 
essing and system outputs is controlled by the system 
control card, the type of input data to be processed, 
and the output report requests submitted at run time. 
Output reports include status listings, bar charts, and 
basic resource and cost summarization reports. Up- 
dating capability is provided for network restructuring 
as well as progress reporting for in-process work items. 
(.130 pages) 



H20-0462 IBM System/360 AUTOSPOT 60 

Numerical Control Processor — Application 
Description 

Program Number: 360A-CN-08X 
The purpose of this manual is to provide an introduc- 
tion to the autospot language for users of numerically 
controlled machine tools. Included in this manual are 
language structure and elements, and system configu- 
ration. (24 pages) 



H20-0463 IBM System/360 AD-APT/ 60 

AUTOSPOT Numerical Control Processor 
Application Description 

Program Number: 360A-CN-09X 
The bbm n/c 360 adaptation of apt for small computers 
(ad-apt) uses a symbolic language to simplify the 
preparation of instructions for numerically controlled 
machine tools. The ad-apt processor prepares inter- 
mediate data for a user-written postprocessor program. 
(44 pages) 



H20-0464 IBM System/360 Vehicle 60 

Scheduling Program— Application 
Description 

This publication describes the general capabilities of 
the bbm System/360 Vehicle Scheduling Program and 
explains some of the many uses of this approach. 

The Vehicle Scheduling Program determines the 
route that a group of vehicles must travel in order to 
meet certain commitments in the delivery of service or 
products to a collection of given destinations. The pro- 
gram tends to minimize some of the basic parameters, 
such as distance, time, and the number of vehicles, or 
achieves a satisfactory balance of these. The program 
analyzes a network representing the potential calling 
points and computes either actual or approximate dis- 
tances between all points. A schedule is then produced 
with adherence to restrictions such as route-time, 
speed, vehicle capacity, and customer requirements. 
(32 pages) 



H20-0466 IBM System/ 360 Attached Support 60 
Processor System (ASP) Version 2 — System 
Description 

Program Number: 360A-CX-1SX 

The Attached Support Processor (asp) system is a 
multiprocessor operating system that provides a com- 
patible extension to Operating System/ 360 (os/36o). 
Designed primarily for the use of the customer with a 
large scientific system and a workload typically con- 
sisting of many jobs of short duration, asp includes 
features to facilitate the use of the 709X Emulator and 
os/aao integrated into the same operational environ- 
ment. 

An outgrowth of the 704X-709X Direct Couple Op- 
erating System (dcs), asp incorporates the operational 
characteristics of this system, although it diverges from 
it in implementation. (40 pages) 



H20-0468 Data Acquisition 60 

Multiprogramming System — System 
Description 

This manual describes an operating system for online 
scientific applications. In addition to support for the 
usual peripheral devices, the system supports 32 levels 
of priority interrupt and the ibm 1827 Data Control 
Unit for interfacing directly with scientific applica- 
tions. The system supports the assignment of program 
tasks to various priority levels. Foreground program 
tasks may be dynamically scheduled for execution 
during periods with no active priority levels. (24 
pages) 



H20-0469 System/360 Mortgage loan 60 

Program Programmer's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-FB-19X 
The mortgage loan program fulfills the prime require- 
ments for mortgage loan procedure. This manual sets 
forth a detailed description of mortgage loan process- 
ing. Included are sections on transactions and trans- 
action file processing. In addition, complete program 
descriptions are given for each run in the application. 
This includes program abstracts, processing descrip- 
tions, system charts, and input/ output lists. Also in- 
cluded are detailed file layouts and suggested methods 
for converting a master file. (236 pages) 



H20-0470 System/ 360 Mortgage Loan 60 

Program Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-FB-19X 
This manual contains operating instructions for the 
runs that make up the System/ 360 Mortgage Loan 
Accounting application program. It includes instruc- 
tions for preparation of all i/o units, and, for each 
program, a program setup sheet, operating instruc- 
tions, operator message list, and core map. (40 pages) 



H20-0471 System/360 Inventory Control 60 

Application Description 

The ibm inventory control application consists of a 
group of integrated programs and techniques designed 
for the selection and implementation of order point in- 
ventory control where it applies in manufacturing or- 
ganizations. The programs provide for: 

1. Classification of inventory items for determining 
the type of control. 

2. Calculation of economic order quantities on the 
basis of usage information or future requirements. 

3. Computation of safety stock and order point. 

4. Projection of demand on the basis of historical 
data. 

. 5. Basic programs for transaction processing and re- 
port preparation. 

This manual includes a general description of these 
programs, the machine configuration, general systems 
charts, sample reports, and a discussion of inventory 
control concepts applicable to the use of the programs. 
) 



H20-0475 System/ 360 Automated Chemistry 60 
Program (360 ACP) for the 1080 Data 
Acquisition System — Application Description 

Program Number: 360A-UH-12X 

The 360 acp, a Type n program within the Clinical and 
Administrative REcord system (case), is a System/360 
program designed to operate under the System/360 
Disk Operating System. The 360 acp processes the 
punched card output of the ibm 1080 Data Acquisition 



System servicing continuous processing analyzer sys- 
tems and one or more ibm 1084 Sampler Readers, all 
operating in a clinical laboratory environment. It 
matches specimen identification numbers with their 
raw data values, makes the necessary adjustments, and 
computes specimen concentrations. A quality control 
report is produced which summarizes the test runs, 
and each test result and specimen identification num- 
ber is stored in disk memory. By a user-provided pro- 
gram, the results are stored in the patient file. The 
360 acp requires 32K core storage, a 1052 Printer-Key- 
board, a 2311 Disk Storage Drive, a printer, a card 
reader, and the floating-point and decimal arithmetic 
features. 

The purpose of this manual is to provide a general 
description of the application, a description of the 
various program runs (including system flowchart), 
a description of the input/output files as related to the 
various runs, the machine configuration required, and 
a statement of the system advantages. (32 pages) 



H20-0476 Mathematical Programming 60 

System/360 Linear and Separable 
Programming — User's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CO-14X 
This manual provides the system user with the infor- 
mation required to prepare input data and control 
cards and to interpret the system's output. It is a basic 
reference document for any user interested in the prob- 
lems with which the system can help him. All proce- 
dures are fully explained in this manual. (224 pages) 



H20-0477 IBM System/360 Document 60 

Processing System Program Description 
and Operations Manual 

Program Number :360A-CX-12X 
The System/360 Document Processing System is a set 
of programs designed to convert machine-readable 
document data into a set of searchable data sets, to 
search these data sets, and to produce various index 
listings. The system operates under the control of the 
System/360 Operating System. 

This manual generally expresses the intent and con- 
tent of an operations manual and a programming 
manual. Part 1 of the manual contains descriptive pro- 
gram information and specifications; Part 2 contains 
detailed operational instructions. A prerequisite to 
reading portions of this manual is a basic understand- 
ing of IBM System/ 360 Operating System Job Control 
Language Form C28-6539. (268 pages) 



H20-0479 System/360 Matrix Language 60 

(MATLAN) Application Description 

Matlan is a programming system that is designed to 
simplify handling of and computation with matrices. 
This publication describes the matlan language and 
its general capabilities. 

Matrices may consist of real or complex, single- or 
double-precision numbers. Segmenting algorithms are 
used if the storage requirements of the matrices exceed 
available core size. 

matlan is useful in many scientific and technical 
applications. It is of special interest in the aerospace 
industry, as well as in electrical and civil engineering, 
mathematical statistics, and econometrics. (20 pages) 



IBM System/360 Bibliography 41 



H20-O480 IBM Retail IMPACT Fashion System 60 
under Operating System/360 Program 
Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-DR-04X 
The ibm Retail impact Fashion System consists of 
programs and procedures designed to provide the 
retailer with timely and accurate information for fash- 
ion merchandising. The system provides reorder rec- 
ommendations, return recommendations, and other 
action reports to assist the fashion merchandiser in re- 
sponding to changes in the volatile fashion market. 

This manual describes the concepts, characteristics, 
and implementation of the Fashion System. Opera- 
tional controls, report interpretation, and complete file 
specifications are included. The programs are de- 
scribed conceptually and specifically. Input, output, 
and processing information is included along with 
program modification aids. This manual provides the 
information and guidance necessary for planning and 
installation of the system. ( 184 pages) 



H20-0481 Retail IMPACT Fashion System 60 

under Operating System/ 360 — Operations 
Manual 

Program Number: 360A-DR-04X 

This manual provides instructions and guidance for 
operating the programs in the ibm Retail impact Fash- 
ion System. The major components of the manual de- 
scribe (1) preparatory information and procedures, 
(2) operations, and (3) retrieving the programs from 
the distribution tape, preparing the system, and run- 
ning the sample problem. (44 pages) 



H20-0483 Advanced Life Information System 60 
Policy Master Record Code Book 

The policy master record code book describes every 
section and trailer of the policy master record, each 
field in every section and trailer, and the codes and 
values applicable to each field. There is a table of con- 
tents at the beginning of the manual and one for each 
section and trailer. The table of contents at the be- 
ginning of the manual identifies only the location of 
sections and trailers. The table at the beginning of 
each section or trailer indicates the location of each 
field. (260 pages) 



H20-0487 System/360 Requirements 60 

Planning Application Description 

A manufacturing organization requires that all parts, 
both manufactured and purchased, be available to 
meet production schedules demanded by finished 
product due dates, and that a sufficient quantity be 
available to satisfy demand. Manufacturing also must 
be able to adjust these requirements quickly to react 
suitably and in time to forecast any customer order 
changes. In addition, there is a need to maintain in- 
ventories at an optimum level so as, not to incur the 
costs of obsolescence, unneeded warehouse space, un- 
necessary inventory, insurance and purchase charges. 
ibm System/ 360 Requirements Planning is designed 
to meet these needs. The system is capable of: 

1. Determining net finished product requirements. 

2. Determining net component part requirements. 

3. Planning economic lot size or order quantities. 

4. Offsetting requirements by considering lead times. 

5. Maintaining and updating the requirements plan 
by processing changes to forecasts and orders (re- 
ferred to as "requirements alterations"). 



6. Providing for review of planned orders at the end 
of each level; "interrupt" and adjustment of these 
planned orders; "reentry" (referred to as "conversa- 
tional planning" ) . 

7. Providing for management review through de- 
tailed requirements reports and exception notices. 
(76 pages) 



H20-0489 Program for Optical System 60 

Design/ll (POSD/II) Application Description 

POSD/n consists of an interrelated set of programs 
providing a complete and flexible facility for the geo- 
metric analysis of image-forming optical systems, to- 
gether with a means for automatically correcting such 
systems. Particular emphasis has been placed on creat- 
ing an efficient man-machine relationship. The evalua- 
tion techniques available to the designer encompass 
both ray tracing and third- and fifth-order aberration 
analysis with ray-tracing speeds in the order of 1/10 
second per ray surface. The program has the capacity 
to analyze systems containing prisms, toric surfaces, 
and diffraction gratings, in addition to the usual re- 
fracting or reflecting elements. 

posn/n is an extension of H3o posd (hso-eo-hx and 
uso-Eo-izx) with increased operating speeds and addi- 
tional program capabilities. Two new posd/h programs 
are provided to operate under the ibm Problem Lan- 
guage ANalyzer (plan*) program to support both the 
1130 system and System/360. Additional utility fea- 
tures are incorporated to provide greater flexibility for 
the user. Significant improvements, such as provision 
for varying glasses, broaden the scope of the automatic 
design program. *plan operates as a submonitor pro- 
viding simplified user modification of programs and 
design languages. 

posd/ii utilizes 1 input formats and operating proce- 
dures identical to 1130 posd. (24 pages) 



H2O-0490 Problem Language Analyzer 60 

(PLAN) Application Description 

This manual provides a description of the scope and 
purpose of the Problem Language Analyzer. It allows 
the reader to measure the applicability of this system 
to the solution of his problems and provides a descrip- 
tion of the plan approach to modular problem solu- 
tion. (16 pages) 



H20-0492 System/360 Decision Logic 60 

Translator Application Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-32X 

The Decision Logic Translator program accepts deci- 
sion tables punched in cards in a prescribed format 
and translates the tables into a Fortran program. The 
Fortran source program is punched in cards or stored 
on disk or tape ready for compilation. 

This manual describes the decision table language, 
the format of the input decision tables, features of the 
Decision Logic Translator, program output, and a 
sample problem. (28 pages) 



H20-0493 Mechanism Design System 60 

Kinematics — Application Description 

A programmed system for the kinematic analysis of 
linkage mechanisms is made available to the mechani- 
cal engineer through the Mechanism Design System — 
Kinematics. 

A wide variety of two- and three-dimensional linkage 
mechanisms can be analyzed with this FORTRAN-coded 
system. Program input provided by the engineer in- 
cludes a list of the linkage elements and the connectiv- 



ity of those elements, metric data that gives size to the 
elements, and position and motion input data. For 
mechanisms that can be solved by the system, plotted 
and printed output is provided to aid the engineer in 
evaluating his design. 

The primary functions of the program are to create a 
digital model of the linkage mechanism, solve for posi- 
tion and motion and display the calculated results. The 
model of the linkage can be stored on disk for later 
recall. The disk also stores intermediate results for data 
display after processing is complete. The use of a 
model facilitates modification of the linkage by simple 
and direct means. 

This manual is divided into five sections. The intro- 
duction discusses the overall role of the 1130 Comput- 
ing System and the System/ 360 in mechanism design 
and analysis. The next section discusses specific con- 
cepts of kinematic analysis, the programs that make up 
the system, and a sample problem. The third section 
gives machine and programming system requirements 
and estimated program timing. The fourth and fifth 
sections present glossary and references, respectively. 
(24 pages) 



H20-O494 Data Acquisition Multiprogramming 60 
System (DAMPS), Version 2 — Application 
Description 

This manual describes an operating system for real- 
time scientific applications. The system will support a 
single real-time job containing multiple online applica- 
tions in the foreground, while processing an offline ap- 
plication in the background, damps, Version 2, supports 
the 32 levels of the Priority Interrupt special feature 
and the Store and Fetch Protection special feature, 
both of which are required for system operation. In 
addition to support for the usual peripheral devices, 
the system supports the ibm 1827 Data Control Unit for 
interfacing directly with scientific applications. (24 
pages) 



H20-0495 Rigid Frame Selection Program 60 

(RFSP) Application Description 

The Rigid Frame Selection Program (rfsp) provides 
direct optimal design procedures for rigid frame con- 
struction in steel, timber, or concrete. Two- and three- 
hinged frames may be analyzed and designed using 
the programs. Cost reduction can be realized in two 
ways — material inventory and design. 

Procedures included in the program can be used to 
design members for different types of structures, using 
the results of analysis programs provided by the user. 

The program operates under a problem-oriented lan- 
guage supported by the Problem Language ANalyzer 
(plan), thus allowing the user to create his own input 
language, if he so prefers. (32 pages) 



H20-0496 MARVEL/360 Primer 



60 



Program Number: 360A-CO-15X 
Marvel is a language processor for the data prepara- 
tion, matrix generation, output analysis, and manage- 
ment report writing functions associated with the 
Mathematical Programming System/360 (360A-CO- 
14X). marvel was designed and implemented to pro- 
vide powerful functional capabilities in this fast grow- 
ing area of mathematical programming. In providing 
such a comprehensive language and processor capabil- 
ity, "trade-offs" were made that reduced execution 
speed. 



42 



marvel will provide maximum customer utility as an 
input/output system for the development of new linear 
programming applications, because this is an area 
where extended function is more significant than high 
performance. In a production environment where em- 
phasis is on execution speed, marvel will be less suit- 
able. 

This marvel language primer is designed to ac- 
quaint the reader with the basic notation employed in 
marvel. Further, by constructing a sample program, it 
is hoped to introduce the potential user to a variety of 
marvel statements. The discussion of statements in the 
primer is limited to those features of each statement 
that are applicable to the specific problem presented. 
Therefore, the reader should consult the MARVEL/360 
Program Description Manual, Form H20-0505, where 
a comprehensive discussion of all marvel statements is 
provided. (60 pages) 



H20-0505 MARVEL/360 Program Description 60 

Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CO-15X 
This publication provides the information required to 
use the marvel programming language. It is a basic 
reference document for any user interested in the 
problems with which this system can help him. It is 
expected that the reader is thoroughly familiar with 
the contents of the marvel/mo Primer. 

marvel is a language processor for the data prepara- 
tion, matrix generation, output analysis, and manage- 
ment report writing functions associated with the 
Mathematical Programming System/360 (360A-CO- 
14X). marvel was designed and implemented to pro- 
vide powerful functional capabilities in this fast grow- 
ing area of mathematical programming. In providing 
such a comprehensive language and processor capabil- 
ity, "trade-offs" were made that reduced execution 
speed, 

marvel will provide maximum customer utility as 
an input/output system for the development of new 
linear programming applications, because this is an 
area where extended function is more significant than 
high performance. In a production environment where 
emphasis is on execution speed, marvel will be less 
suitable. ( 184 pages) 



H20-0506 System/360 Vehicle Scheduling 60 

Program — Program Description and 
Operations Manual 

Program Number: 360A-ST-06X 
This manual contains specific information about the 
preparation for, the functions of, and the use of the 
ibm System/360 Vehicle Scheduling Program, as well 
as its operation under the ibm System/360 Disk Op- 
erating System. Detailed data preparation suggestions 
are explained under the program section to which they 
apply. The operations section contains a description of 
program setup and restart procedures, console operat- 
ing instructions, and card layouts. In addition, the 
manual presents input/output descriptions, sugges- 
tions for option usage, fists of messages, and a sample 
problem. 

The reader should be familiar with the System/360 
Vehicle Scheduling Program Application Description, 
Form H20-0464. (120 pages) 



H20-0507 Bibliography of Application 99 

Publications Finance Industries 

The purpose of this bibliography and the associated 
classification system is to fist and categorize ibm appli- 
cation publications that are pertinent to finance indus- 
tries. Section i lists these publications by application or 
industry. Section n contains an abstract of each pub- 
lication, in form number sequence. 

A periodic Bibliography of Application Publications 
(bap) newsletter (N20-1077) is published to keep the 
bibliography up to date. The newsletter is divided into 
two sections. Section i is an updated fisting of applica- 
tion publications by application or industry. This sec- 
tion also includes any corrections to the bibliography 
and a list of superseded publications. Section n con- 
tains an abstract of each publication not included in 
the last published bibliography. (26 pages) 



H20-0508 System/360 Administrative 60 

Terminal System DOS (ATS/ DOS) 
Program Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-18X 
This manual may be used as a reference manual by 
application programmers that are concerned with the 
Administrative Terminal System, ats/360, functioning 
under the ibm System/ 360 Disk Operating System 
(dos). ats/360 applications consist of control and func- 
tional programs that permit the simultaneous perform- 
ance of many different text processing and data-han- 
dling activities on different terminals. This publication 
describes the principles and techniques of storage and 
real-time processing control for each of the programs 
that make up ATs/seo, as well as information pertinent 
to their organization, scope, and planning for system 
applications and/ or modifications to those applications. 
System generation procedures are also described and 
information regarding storage estimates and system 
timing is given. ( 136 pages) 



H20-0509 System/360 Administrative 60 

Terminal System DOS (ATS/DOS) 
Terminal Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-18X 

This manual contains procedures for operating the ibm 
Administrative Terminal System (ats)/360. Operation 
consists of manipulating the keyboard on the ibm 2741 
Communications Terminal to send commands to the 
computer, enter documents into the system for storage, 
and print documents which have been previously 
stored. 

Procedures are provided for using the terminal to 
send and receive messages in the form, of documents 
from one terminal location to another, to transfer stored 
documents onto magnetic tape or punched cards, and 
to accomplish high-speed printing of stored documents 
at the computer center. Procedures are also included to 
bring documents into the system that are stored on 
punched cards and magnetic tape. 

The procedures are arranged so that the operator 
can begin with the most basic commands and immedi- 
ately start using the terminal while progressing through 
the remaining text and examples to understand the 
operating principles. 

A summary is included at the end of some sections 
to provide a quick review for operators who only use 
the ats/360 occasionally, or infrequently after exposure 
to the initial training period. 



Four appendices are included. Appendix A provides 
a listing of operator commands. Appendix B provides a 
listing of computer responses. Appendix C provides a 
glossary of terms that are used throughout the manual. 
Appendix D consists of punched card codes and refer- 
ence data for entering special characters and hexa- 
decimal values at the terminal. ( 124 pages) 



H20-0510 System/360 Administrative 60 

Terminal System DOS (ATS/DOS) 
Application Description 

Program Number: 360A-CX-18X 
This system consists of control and functional programs 
that permit many different text-processing and data- 
handling activities to be carried on simultaneously 
through different terminals attached to an ibm System/ 
360. Written to operate under dos/soo, the Administra- 
tive Terminal System will allow background programs 
to run concurrently with, and independently of, normal 
terminal operation. 

This publication contains a general discussion of the 
features of the program, an indication of some of the 
areas in which it may be applied, and the machine con- 
figuration required. (28 pages) 



H20-0511 System/360 Administrative 60 

Terminal System DOS (ATS/DOS) 
Computer Center Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-18X 
This manual describes operating procedures for the 
ibm Administrative Terminal System, ats/sbo. These 
procedures are designed for computer centers using 
the Disk Operating System (dos) version of the ibm 
System/360 Model 30, 40, or 50F. ats/3bo computer 
centers using a different machine configuration may 
use this manual as a reference for establishing pro- 
cedures for use with the system. 

These procedures are intended for the computer 
center operator or other personnel using the equipment 
during scheduled operating periods to set up the sys- 
tem for ats/360 applications, maintain the real-time 
capability while the system is in use, and shut down 
the system to terminate ats/sso operations. 

Any deviation from these procedures must be care- 
fully considered to avoid introducing errors which 
could jeopardize the effectiveness of the system. 

Special handling instructions and other computer 
center (cc) operator duties are described for servicing 
the requests of remote terminal (rt) operators, main- 
taining the security of records, off-line machine opera- 
tions for peripheral equipment, and error recovery 
techniques. 

The manual is divided into sections, each of which 
describes the overall system application, arrangement 
of equipment, and procedures for its use. (72 pages) 



H20-O512 MARVEL/360 Operations Manual 60 

Program Number: 360A-CO-15X 
This publication contains information that will enable 
the user to link-edit and incorporate the marvel/360 
program into a system for subsequent execution under 
control of Mathematical Programming System/360. 
Detailed examples are given for editing the marvel/ 
360 program into a private jobltb or the os/seo 
sysi.linklib. (12 pages) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 43 



H20-O513 Linear Programming System/360 60 

(LPS/360) — Application Description 

This program provides the System/360 Disk Operating 
System (dos) user with a simple, easy to understand 
and easy to use means of solving lp problems, and with 
a powerful tool for implementing other mathematical 
optimization applications. 

The system contains all the procedures necessary to 
solve an lp problem and to perform an extensive post- 
optimal analysis of the problem. The system provides 
extensive data generation and maintenance facilities. 

To solve an lp problem, these procedures are called 
into core storage by procedure control statements that 
define the processing sequence. 

This manual contains a description of the system, 
the required machine configurations, and limits on 
problem size. (20 pages) 



H20-0514 System/360 Model 44 60 

Remote Access Computing System 
Application Description 

This system is designed to allow multiple concurrent 
access to a System/360 Model 44 from remote termi- 
nals, rax implements time-sharing techniques for the 
compilation and execution of user computing problems 
in Fortran and Assembler Languages. Also, it pro- 
vides a Terminal Command Language to provide con- 
trol of the terminal and to implement the use of the 
programming languages. 

This publication contains a description of the sys- 
tem, the equipment requirements, the system capabili- 
ties, the elements of the Terminal Command Lan- 
guage, and a discussion of the system operation. (28 
) 



H20-0515 System/360 Automated Chemistry 60 
Program (360 ACP) for the 1080 Data 
Acquisition System — Program 
Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-UH-12X 

The bbm System/360 Automated Chemistry Program 
(seo acp) is designed to process the punched card 
output of the bm 1080 Data Acquisition System serv- 
icing continuous processing analyzer systems and one 
or more ibm 1084 Sampler Readers, all operating in a 
clinical laboratory environment. 

The purpose of this manual is to provide the user 
with an understanding of the program necessary to 
implement the application. Included are descriptions 
of the two runs which make up mo acp, an input/ out- 
put description, timing information, program modifica- 
tion aids, and a sample problem. (56 pages) 



H20-0516 System/360 Automated Chemistry 60 

Program (360 ACP) for the 1080 Data 
Acquisition System, Operations Manual 

Program Number: 360A-UH-12X 

System/360 Automated Chemistry Program (seo act) 
is designed to process the punched card output of the 
1080 Data Acquisition System servicing continuous 
processing analyzer systems and one or more ebm 1084 
Sampler Readers, ail operating in a clinical laboratory 
environment. The seo acp is composed of two runs — 



a file creation program and a process data program. 
The former is executed at the time the system is set 
up and need not be performed again unless the user 
wishes to change any of the files. The latter is the pro- 
gram designed to process the 1080 punched card out- 
put. 

This manual gives the specifications and necessary 
information for operating seo acp. It includes a de- 
scription of retrieval of data from distributed machine- 
readable material and cataloging programs in the 
user's core image library. Use of this manual requires 
an operating knowledge of the ibm Disk Operating 
System (dos) job control cards and operating pro- 
cedures. (32 pages) 



H20-0517 Advanced Life Information System 60 

Operations Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 

This manual presents the information required to set 
up the Advanced Life Information System (alis) and 
to execute the alis programs. This system operates 
under the bbm System/ 360 Disk Operating System 
(dos) and consists of a series of programs which are 
run in sequence. The aus programs are presented in 
the suggested running sequence. Suggestions on user 
program integration with alis are also made. The in- 
formation applicable to all alis programs is presented 
once at the beginning of the manual. Following that 
information is a control card, console operating, mes- 
sage, error, restart, and external control information 
for each alis program. Operating instructions for the 
alis utility programs are also included. (132 pages) 



H20-0519 Advanced Life Information System 60 
Utility Program Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 
This manual provides general information about the 
utility programs supplied with the Advanced Life In- 
formation System. The user should be familiar with 
the Operations manual to gain the necessary supple- 
mentary information to include the utility programs on 
his library and to execute them. (72 pages) 



H20-0521 System/360 Generalized 60 

Information System (Basic) Application 
Description Manual 

This manual surveys the operational concepts and sys- 
tem capabilities of the Generalized Information System 
(Basic). It provides an introduction to the language of 
gis and describes the file organization and processing 
actions supported by gis. 

The System/360 Generalized Information System 
(Basic) operates under control of the System/360 
Operating System and supports a wide variety of ap- 
plications by providing information handling capabili- 
ties against many typical data base organizations. As a 
system, gis provides facilities for defining, maintaining, 
and retrieving data from user files under direction of 
the using installation and its personnel. ( 64 pages) 



H20-0522 Bibliography of Application 99 

Publications Distribution Industries 

The purpose of this bibliography and the associated 
classification system is to list and categorize ibm appli- 
cation publications that are pertinent to distribution 
industries. Section i lists these publications by appli- 
cation or industry. Section n contains an abstract of 
each publication, in form number sequence. 



A periodic Bibliography of Application Publications 
(bap) newsletter (N20-1853) is published to keep the 
bibliography up to date. The newsletter is divided into 
two sections. Section i is an updated listing of applica- 
tion publications by application or industry. This sec- 
tion also includes any corrections to the bibliography 
and a list of superseded publications. Section n con- 
tains an abstract of each publication not included in 
the last published bibliography. (26 pages) 



H20-0523 System/360 AD-APT/AUTOSPOT 60 

(OS) Numerical Control Processor 
Application Description 

Ad-apt/autospot is a symbolic language designed to 
simplify the preparation of instructions for numerically 
controlled machine tools. This manual provides an 
introduction to both the ad-apt and autospot lan- 
guages. Included are language structure and elements, 
and system configuration. 

This program will provide the os/3eo installation 
with the capability currently available in ad-apt/auto- 
spot (s60a-cn-09x) under dos/ 360. (60 pages) 



H20-0524 Information Management 60 

System/360 for the IBM System/360 
(System Description) Application 
Description Manual 

The Information Management System/360 is an Oper- 
ating System/360 processing program designed to fa- 
cilitate the implementation of medium to large com- 
mon data bases in a multiapplication environment. 
This environment is created to accommodate both 
online message processing and conventional batch 
processing, either separately or concurrently. The sys- 
tem permits the evolutionary expansion of data proc- 
essing applications from a batch-only to a teleprocess- 
ing environment. 

This manual includes a general description of the 
system and its various facilities and programs, listings 
of typical and minimum configurations, and a sample 
application. (48 pages) 



H20-0525 System/360 Text Processor 60 

HYPHENATION/360 
Program Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-DP-07X 
Hyphenation/ 360 provides division of words for text- 
processing applications in which the addition of word 
syllables to a line to meet justification requirements is 
preferable to forcing the line to end in a complete 
word. This hyphenation capability is provided in the 
form of a module that can be linked with a users 
System/360 text-processing program or the composi- 
tion/360 component of the ibm System/360 Text 
Processor. 

Through program linkage, the hyphenation/ seo 
module accepts a word from the users program and 
determines the division points. The word, with the 
division points indicated, is returned to the user's pro- 
gram, where the portion to be retained on the line can 
be selected on the basis of the user's graphic require- 
ments. 

This publication contains processing descriptions, 
core and disk requirements, timing information, and 
detailed instructions for the use of the hyphena- 
tion/360 module and its associated utility programs. 
A thorough understanding of the call, save, and re- 
turn macros discussed in IBM System 'WO DOS Su- 
pervisor and Input/Output Macros, Form C24-5037 is 
a prerequisite for reading this publication. (68 pages) 



44 



H20-0526 System/360 Text Processor 60 

HYPHENATION/360— Operations Manual 

Program Number: 36OA-DP-07X 
Hyphenation/ 380 provides division of words for text- 
processing applications in which the addition of word 
syllables to a line to meet justification requirements is 
preferable to forcing the line to end with a complete 
word. This hyphenation capability is provided in the 
form of a module that can be linked with a user s 
System/360 text-processing program or the oomposi- 
tion/360 module of the ibm System/ 360 Text Processor. 

Through program linkage, hyphenation/sbo accepts 
a word from the user's program and determines the 
division points. The word, with the division points 
indicated, is returned to the user's program, where 
the portion to be retained on the line can be selected 
on the basis of the user's graphic requirements. 

This publication contains detailed preparatory sys- 
tem procedures; operating instructions, error messages, 
and restart procedures for the component programs; 
and programming system and machine requirements. 

A knowledge of dos operating procedures is a pre- 
requisite for reading and using this manual. (36 



H20-0527 System/360 1287 Input Conversion 60 

Program — Program Description Manual 

Program Number: 36QA-DR-WX 
This program consists of a Transaction Specification 
Compiler and an Operational Processor. The Compiler 
provides for the description of the format and process- 
ing logic to be applied to documents scanned by the 
ibm 1287 Optical Reader. The program module created 
by the Compiler is referenced by the Processor in order 
to convert the data from the documents to a conversion 
journal. This manual describes the general program 
logic, the input and output formats, and provides 
samples of each. (48 pages) 

H20-0528 System/360 1287 Input Conversion 60 
Program — Operations Manual 

Program Number: 360A-DR-WX 

The purpose of this manual is to provide the user with 

the information, instructions, and guidance necessary 

to: 

1. Retrieve and prepare the programs for operation. 

2. Prepare to use the system. 

3. Operate the programs in the system. 
(32 pages) 

H20-0529 IBM System/360 Attached Support 60 

Processor System (ASP) Version 2 (MVT/ 
Local Execution) System Description 

Program Number: 360A-CX-15X 

The Attached Support Processor (asp) system is an 
operating system that provides a compatible extension 
to System/360 Operating System. Designed primarily 
for the commercial and scientific customer with a com- 
puter job shop environment, asp provides for increased 
automation of the computing operation. The asp sys- 
tem operates as a programmed operator of Operating 
System, providing an operational interface for con- 
trolling the system job stream, thus optimizing the use 
of the computer s resources. 

This manual describes Version 2 of the asp system, 
including Mvr/Local Execution extensions that will be 
made available in a future modification. This manual 
contains a general description, machine configuration, 
application program considerations, operational con- 
siderations, and extended asp configurations. The man- 
ual is primarily intended for installation planning pur- 
poses. For an overall description of the existing asp 
Version 2 program see Form H20-0466. (32 pages) 



H20-0530 Bibliography of Application 99 

Publications Public Utility Industries 

The purpose of this bibliography and the associated 
classification system is to list and categorize ibm appli- 
cation publications that are pertinent to public utility 
industries. Section i lists these publications by applica- 
tion or industry. Section n contains an abstract of each 
publication, in form number sequence. 

A periodic Bibliography of Application Publications 
(bap) newsletter N20-1866 is published to keep the 
bibliography up to date. The newsletter is divided into 
two sections. Section i is an updated listing of applica- 
tion publications by application or industry. This sec- 
tion also includes any corrections to the bibliography 
and a list of superseded publications. Section n con- 
tains an abstract of each publication not included in 
the last published bibliography. (14 pages) 

H20-0531 Bibliography of Application 99 

Publications Printing and Publishing 
Industries 

The purpose of this bibliography and the associated 
classification system is to list and categorize ibm appli- 
cation publications that are pertinent to printing and 
publishing industries. Section i lists these publications 
by application or industry. Section n contains an ab- 
stract of each publication, in form number sequence. 
A periodic Bibliography of Application Publications 
(bap) newsletter N20-1867 is published to keep the 
bibliography up to date. The newsletter is divided into 
two sections. Section i is an updated listing of applica- 
tion publications by application or industry. This sec- 
tion also includes any corrections to the bibliography 
and a list of superseded publications. Section n con- 
tains an abstract of each publication not included in 
the last published bibliography. (12 pages) 

H20-0532 System/360 Power System 60 

Planning for the Electric Utility Industry 
Application Description Manual 

The Power System Planning (psp) application pro- 
gram package is designed specifically for the ibm 
System/360. The package provides the electric utility 
planning engineer with the most important digital 
simulation programs for studying the steady-state and 
transient operational characteristics of present and 
projected interconnected power networks. The pack- 
age provides for the storing of data describing electric 
networks and the convenience of automatic data prep- 
aration for the simulation programs. 

This manual contains a general description of the 
application, the machine configuration required, a 
general system flowchart, and four system charts cov- 
ering the data storage and retrieval program and the 
three electrical network simulation programs provided 
within the package. (36 pages) 



H20-0533 Shared Hospital Accounting System 60 
(SHAS) Program Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-UH-UX 
The Shared Hospital Accounting System (shas) pro- 
vides hospital, accounting for a multiple-hospital en- 
vironment. The participating hospitals are connected 
to the central System/360 facility by teleprocessing 
terminals, shas consists of application programs and a 
teleprocessing executive. The application programs are 
patient billing, accounts receivable, and general ledger 
including accounting for both inpatients and out- 
patients. This manual refers to the accounts receivable 
portion of shas. References to teleprocessing and other 
applications have been minimized but still may be 
present to be consistent with subsequent manuals 
dealing with the entire system. 



This basic publication provides information on the 
Shared Hospital Accounting System program to enable 
the user to understand the function of all of the shai 
programs as a guide for preparing to install shas. 

This document is written as a reference.manual and 
not as a study text. For education purposes mis manual 
should be used in conjunction with the SHAS Applica 
tion Description Manual, Form H2Q-0602 and tht 
SHAS Operation Manual? Farm H2O-0534. 

The organization is such mat the reader can easil] 
find in-depth information on what the program doe 
for the user. It also helps the user connect that infer 
mation with the programs through the use of progran 
references, oobol tags, and modular descriptions fol 
lowing modular programs. The-user can turn to a given 
program description and find the information inune 
diately without having to read the entire section, and 
can easily relate the information directly to the pro- 
gram and the code. 

This manual is written for systems engineers or pro- 
grammers with a thorough understanding of dos, 
cobol, and System/ 360 Basic Assembler Language. 
(188 pages) 



H20-0534 Shared Hospital Accounting System 6) 

(SHAS) Operations Manual 

Program Number: 360A-UH-11X 
The Shared Hospital Accounting System (shas) pro- 
vides hospital accounting for a multiple-hospital en- 
vironment. The participating hospitals may be con- 
nected to the central System/360 facility by tele- 
processing terminals, shas consists of application pro- 
grams and a teleprocessing executive. The application 
programs are patient billing, accounts receivable, and 
general ledger, including accounting for both inpa- 
tients and outpatients. 

This basic publication gives the specifications and 
necessary information for operating the shas programs. 
It includes a description of retrieving data from dis- 
tributed machine-readable material and cataloging 
programs in the user's core image library. Use of this 
manual requires an operating knowledge of the ibm 
Disk Operating System (dos) job control cards and 
operating procedures. 

This document is written as a reference manual for 
central operation and user-hospital personnel. User 
hospitals will find guidance for installation preparation, 
data coding and creation, and options available during 
operation. For education purposes, this manual should 
be used in conjunction with the Shared Hospital Ac- 
counting System Application Description Manual, 
Form H20-0302 and the Shared Hospital Accounting 
System Program Description Manual, Form H20-0533. 
(636 pages) 



H20-0535 PLAN Graphics Support for the 60 

IBM 2250 — Application Description Manual 

PLAN Graphics Support is designed to drastically re- 
duce the time required to convert existing applications 
or create new applications for graphic displays. This 
system supports Models 1, 3, and 4 of the ibm 2250 
Display Unit 

With plan Graphics Support, the application pro- 
grammer works at a level where he is relieved from 
tedious graphic programming. High-level statements 
allow the application programmer to simply state the 
format, content, and control options that are desired 
by the console operator (the application user). By 
means of user-oriented statements, the application 
programmer may rapidly extend his existing applica- 
tion program or create new applications to include 
interactive graphic capability. 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 45 



Among the graphic interface features supported are: 

1. Graphic Output — Data generated by the appli- 
cation may be displayed using points, characters, 
vectors, or geometric shapes. 

2. Graphic Input— Data may be created or modified 
at the console and passed to the application via the 
Light Pen, Programmed Function Keyboard, and 
Alphameric Keyboard. 

3. Monitoring and Control — Intermediate results 
can be examined in an application. The console user 
dynamically controls the next function of the applica- 
tion program to be executed. 

plan (Problem Language ANalyzer), a Type n pro- 
gram, is used as a base for plan Graphics Support. 
Since it coexists with plan, the user has access to all 
of the functional capability in plan, plan Graphics 
Support and plan support both the ibm 1130 and 
System/360. (24 pages) 



H20-0536 Bibliography of Application 99 

Publications Insurance Industry 

The purpose of this bibliography and the associated 
classification systems is to list and categorize ibm 
application publications that are pertinent to the in- 
surance industry. Section x lists these publications by 
application or industry. Section n contains an abstract 
of each publication, in form number sequence. 

A periodic Bibliography of Application Publications 
(bap) newsletter (N20-1869) is published to keep the 
bibliography up to date. The newsletter is divided into 
two sections. Section i is an updated listing of appli- 
cation publications by application or industry. This 
section also includes any corrections to the bibliog- 
raphy and a list of superseded publications. Section n 
contains an abstract of each publication not included 
in the last published bibliography. (22 pages) 



H20-0537 Data Acquisition Multiprogramming 60 
System/360 Model 44 (DAMPS) Program 
Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-20X 
This publication contains detailed information for pre- 
paring programs to be executed under damps. It dis- 
cusses the system's requirements and capabilities, and 
the f acilities that are available as a result of the damps 
extensions to the System/360 Model 44 Programming 
System. (78 pages) 



H20-0538 Data Acquisition Multiprogramming 60 
System/360 Model 44 (DAMPS) Operations 
Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-20X 
This publication describes the operations that are re- 
quired to run, construct, or modify the Data Acquisi- 
tion Multiprogramming System/360 Model 44. This 
publication assumes that the reader has operating 
knowledge of the ibm System/360 Model 44 Program- 
ming System. (36 pages) 



H20-0539 Graphic Analysis of Three- 60 

Dimensional Data (GATD) Application 
Description Manual 

Graphic Analysis of Three-Dimensional Data (gatd) 
is an application system built around the ibm 2250 
Display Unit, which allows online analysis of three- 
dimensional data, gatd operates in conjunction with 
Operating System/ 360, plan (Problem Language 
Analyzer), and plan Graphics Support. 



Many industries are concerned with the quantitative 
description of three-dimensional surfaces as approxi- 
mated by field or laboratory observations. Since it is 
usually impossible to obtain a sufficient number of 
measurements to adequately define a surface, a nu- 
merical model of the surface is developed. The numeri- 
cal model is used to predict the value of the surface 
representing the dependent variable where observa- 
tions are not present. 

A typical gatd problem begins with a light-pen 
query of the user's mass data file. Because the raw 
observational data extracted from the user's file may 
be poorly distributed, or the data may contain bad or 
spurious points, it is necessary to display, monitor and, 
in some cases, clean up the data before processing 
further. To accomplish this end, a powerful set of data 
editing facilities is provided. 

Once edited the data can be passed to analytical 
routines which develop numerical models. Graphic 
representation of the numerical models can be dis- 
played in the form of contour maps, perspective views, 
cross sections, and fence diagrams. 

All operations take place in a conversational mode as 
directed by the 2250 console operator with the light 
pen. 

Geology, geophysics, oceanography, meteorology, 
engineering, and physical property analysis are a few 
of the areas where this powerful new analytical tool 
can be applied. The development and use of these 
techniques in a man/machine environment opens up 
entirely new problem-solving techniques and will lead 
to significant reductions in total problem solution 
time. (28 pages) 



H20-0540 Retail IMPACT Fashion System 60 

under Disk Operating System/360 
Program Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-DR-08X 
The ibm Retail impact Fashion System consists of pro- 
grams and procedures designed to provide the retailer 
with timely and accurate information for fashion mer- 
chandising. The system provides reorder recommenda- 
tions, return recommendations, and other action re- 
ports to assist the fashion merchandiser in responding 
to changes in the volatile fashion market. 

This manual describes the concepts, characteristics, 
and implementation of the Fashion System. Opera- 
tional controls, report interpretation, and complete file 
specifications are included. The programs are de- 
scribed conceptually and specifically. Input, output, 
and processing information is included along with pro- 
gram modification aids. This manual provides the in- 
formation and guidance necessary for planning and 
installation of the system. (184 pages) 



H20-0541 Retail IMPACT Fashion System 60 

under Disk Operating System/360 
Operations Manual 

Program Number: 360A-DR-08X 
This manual provides instructions and guidance for 
operating the programs in the ibm Retail impact 
Fashion System. The major components of the manual 
describe (1) preparatory information and procedures, 
(2) operations, and (3) retrieving the programs from 
the distribution tape, preparing the system, and run- 
ning the sample problem. (40 pages) 



H20-0544 System/360 Scientific Subroutine 60 

Package (PL/I) Application Description 

The System/360 Scieptific Subroutine Package (ssp) 
(pl/i) is a collection of mathematical and statistical 
subroutines (or procedures) written in the pl/i lan- 
guage. It provides the pl/i user with most of the basic 
capabilities in earlier Fortran versions of ssp/seo. It 
also has the same basic characteristics as die Fortran 
versions, in that it consists of input/output-free com- 
putational building blocks, written completely in pl/i, 
which may be combined with a user's input, output, or 
computational routines as needed. The package may 
be applied to the solution of many problems in indus- 
try, science, and engineering. 

This Application Description presents an introduc- 
tion to the program, a list of the capabilities of the 
package, rules of usage, machine configuration, pro- 
gramming systems, and a list of reference material. 
(12 pages) 

H20-0545 System/360 Remote Access 60 

Computing System (RAX) Version 3 
Application Description 

This system is designed to allow multiple, concurrent 
access to a System/360 processor from remote termi- 
nals, rax implements time-sharing techniques for the 
compilation and execution of user computing problems 
in Fortran and Assembler languages. Also, it provides 
a Terminal Command Language to provide control of 
the terminal and to implement the use of the program- 
ming languages. 

This publication contains a description of the system, 
the equipment requirements, the system capabilities, 
the elements of the Terminal Command Language, 
and a discussion of the system operation. (32 pages) 

H20-0549 System/360 AD-APT/ AlJrOSPOT 60 

(OS) Numerical Control Processor Part 
Programming Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CN-12X 
The ibm n/c 360 adaptation of apt for small computers 
(ad- apt) uses a symbolic language to simplify the 
preparation of instructions for numerically controlled 
machined tools. The ad- apt processor prepares inter- 
mediate data for a user-written postprocessor program. 
This manual contains the definition and examples of 
the ad- apt symbolic language. (168 pages) 

H20-0550 Shared Hospital Accounting System 60 
(SHAS) Teleprocessing Operations Manual 

Program Number: 360A-UH-11X 
The Shared Hospital Accounting System (shas) pro- 
vides hospital accounting for a multiple-hospital en- 
vironment. The participating hospitals are connected 
to the central System/360 facility by teleprocessing 
terminals, shas consists of application programs and a 
teleprocessing executive. 

The application programs are patient billing, ac- 
counts receivable, and general ledger, including ac- 
counting for both inpatients and outpatients. 

This publication gives the specifications and neces- 
sary information for operating the shas teleprocessing 
programs. This manual also includes a description of 
how to assemble and operate the teleprocessing system. 
Operation of ar inquiry procedure is included. 

For the installation of the system knowledge of tele- 
processing and QTAM under dos is required. Prerequi- 
sites for the 1050 teleprocessing terminal setup and 
maintenance are the IBM 1050 Operators Guide, Form 
A24-3125 and Procedures for Transmitting/Receiving 
Messages between an IBM Data Processing System 
and a 1050 Data Communication System, Form C20- 
1664. (72 pages) 



46 



H20-O556— System/360 Inventory Control 60 

Operations Manual 

Program Number.- 360A-MF-04X 
System/ 360 Inventory Control consists of nine pro- 
grams designed to assist in the implementation of order 
point inventory control in manufacturing organizations. 
This manual contains information regarding pre- 
paratory and operating procedures for the programs. 
It includes a complete list of the console messages that 
can be produced by the programs. (36 pages) 



H20-0557 System/360 AD-APT/AUTOSPOT 60 

(OS) Numerical Control Processor 
Operations Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CN-12X 

This manual provides suggested processor generation 
and maintenance techniques, program setup instruc- 
tions, console operating instructions, halts and error 
messages, storage map, and restartprocedures. (12pages) 



H20-O558 System/360 Array Processing 60 

Subroutine Package Application 
Description Manual 

The Array Processing Subroutine Package is a set of 
subroutines designed to enhance and simplify the use 
of the IBM 2938 Array Processor, and to provide a 
series of analytical methods for use in digital signal 
analysis. (20 pages) 



H20-0559 System/360 Matrix Language 60 

(MATLAN) Operations Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CM-05X 

This manual provides detailed information to generate 

a MATLAN system and to run matlan programs. ( 124 

pages) 



H20-0560 Mathematical Programming System/ 60 
360 Report Generator (MPSRG) Program 
Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CO-20X 

This manual provides the system user with the infor- 
mation required to prepare input data and a report 
program. It is a basic reference document for any user 
of mpsrg. All mpsrg procedures are fully explained in 
this manual. 

This manual assumes that the user is familiar with 
the MPS/ 360 Application Description, Form H20-0136, 
the MPS/360 Control Language User's Manual, Form 
H20-0290 and the MPS/360 Linear and Separable Pro- 
gramming User's Manual, Form H20-0476. (60 pages) 



H20-0561 Mathematical Programming System/ 60 
360 Report Generator (MPSRG) 
Operations Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CO-20X 

This manual contains complete information regarding 
the preparatory and operating procedures for the 
mps/ seo Report Generator. (32 pages) 



H20-0563 IBM System/360 Model 44 Remote 60 

Access Computing System RAX/44 
Operations Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-21X 
This publication provides die System/360 machine 
operator with detailed instructions for starting, run- 
ning, and stopping the Remote Access Computing Sys- 
tem (rax). It includes machine requirements, descrip- 
tion of online messages and their meanings, and restart 
procedures. This manual also includes the procedures 
required for system generation and library mainte- 
nance. (36 pages) 

H20-0564 System/360 Matrix Language 60 

(MATLAN) Program Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CM-05X 
Matlan is a programming system, operating under the 
control of System/360 Operating Systems, that is de- 
signed to simplify handling of and computation with 
matrices. This publication describes the matlan lan- 
guage in detail and includes description of the state- 
ments, programming considerations, and examples. 
(224 pages) 

H20-0565 IBM System/360 Model 44 Remote 60 

Access Computing System RAX/44 
Program Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-21X 
This publication provides the information necessary to 
use die ibm System/360 Model 44 Remote Access 
Computing System (rax). It contains a description of 
the system, which provides concurrent access to a 
System/360 Model 44 for up to 63 remote 1050 ibm 
Data Communication Terminals and eight 2260 Dis- 
play Station locations. This system provides for the 
compilation and execution of Fortran rv and Assem- 
bler Language programs and the maintenance of 
program and data files, in a library structure. (80 
pages) 

H20-0572 System/360 Decision Logic Translator 60 
Program Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-32X 
The Decision Logic Translator program translates deci- 
sion tables punched in cards into a Fortran source pro- 
gram. The Fortran source program is either punched 
in cards or stored on disk or tape ready for compila- 
tion. This manual contains information needed by the 
reader to understand the functions performed by the 
Decision Logic Translator. A sample problem shows 
how to use the decision table language to program an 
application. (36 pages) 

H20-0573 System/360 Decision Logic Translator 60 
Operations Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-32X 
This manual contains information on the prepara- 
tion and operation of the Decision Logic Translator 
program. It is designed to translate decision tables 
(punched into cards in a prespecified format) into a 
Fortran program (stored on disk, on tape, or on 
cards) ready for compilation. The reader should be fa- 
miliar with the contents of the following publications: 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System— System 
Control and System Service Programs, Form C24- 
5036 
IBM System/360 Decision Logic Translator Applica- 
tion Description Manual, Form H20-0492 
IBM System/360 Decision Logic Translator Program 
Description Manual, Form H20-0572 
(20 pages) 



H20-0574 System/360 Generalized Information 60 
System Application Description Manual 

This manual surveys the operational concepts and sys- 
tem capabilities of the Generalized Information System 
(gis). It provides an introduction to the language of 
gis and describes the file organization and processing 
actions supported by gis. 

The System/360 Generalized Information System 
operates under control of the ibm System/360 Operat- 
ing Systems and uses the 'Multiprogramming with a 
Variable Number of Tasks" (mvt) feature, gis is de- 
signed to operate in a terminal environment using (he 
Queued Telecommunications Access Method and sup- 
ports a wide variety of applications by providing in- 
formation handling capabilities against many typical 
data base organizations. As a system, gis provides fa- 
culties for defining, maintaining and retrieving data 
from user files under direction of the using installation 
and its personnel. (80 pages) 

L22-6871 IBM System/360 2911 Manual 13 

Switching Unit Models 1, 2, and 5 and 2989 
Remote Switching Console Special Systems 
Feature 

This bulletin describes the function of the 2911 Manual 
Switching Unit and the 2989 Remote Switching Con- 
sole for System/360 signal lines. ( 16 pages) 



L22-6890 IBM 2930 Model 1 Tape 13 

Intersystem Connecting Unit 

This bulletin describes the operation of the ibm 2930 
Model 1 Tape Intersystem Connecting Unit, which is 
a special systems feature for connecting a 1401, 1410, 
1460, or any 7000-series system to a System/360. 

The reader s familarity with IBM System/360 Prin- 
ciples of Operation, Form A22-6821 is presumed. 

Detailed information concerning interface lines is in 
the following publications: IBM System/360 I/O Inter- 
face — Channel-to-Control Unit, Original Equipment 
Manufacturers' Information, Form A22-6843. IBM 729 
II, TV, V, VI Magnetic Tape Units, Original Equipment 
Manufacturers' Information, Form A22-6643. (20 
pages) 



L22-6901 IBM 2937 Models 1 , 2, and 3 1 3 

Multiplier-Summation Processor — Special 
Systems Feature — RPQ 880626 

This bulletin describes the function of the multiplier 
summation processor as an input/ output device of the 
ibm System/ 360. Physical and electrical requirements 
are given along with illustrations of the formation of 
final product sums. (16 pages) 



L22-6902 IBM System/360 Model 40 13 

Sum of Products Instruction — RPQ W12561 
Special Systems Feature 

This bulletin describes the function of a new instruc- 
tion, Sum of Products, as an option of System/360 
Model 40. Computation of the convolution integral is 
possible with this single instruction. The instruction is 
described and timing and overflow considerations are 
given. (2 pages) 

L22-6903 IBM System/360 Model 40 13 

Halfword Translate Instruction — RPQ W13462 
Special Systems Feature 

This bulletin describes the function of a new instruc- 
tion, Halfword Translate, as an option of System/360 
Model 40. The instruction is used in a data move 
operation. A description of the instruction is given, to- 
gether with its timing. (2 pages) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 47 



L22-6904 IBM System/360 Model 40 13 

Table Address Chaining— RPQ W135T8 
Special Systems Feature 

This bulletin describes the function of table address 
chaining as a System/360 Model 40 i/o data chaining 
option. A description of the option is given together 
with restrictions for use of the option. (2 pages) 



Course Description Note 

These publications describe a course, its objec- 
tives, length, intended audience, prerequisites, 
and course code. All materials required by the 
instructor and student are listed. Abstracts are 
included for education materials created espe- 
cially for the course; abstract references are 
provided for the other materials. 



R20-9135 IBM System/360 Macro Writing 90 

Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." ( 2 pages ) 

R20-9136 IBM System/360 Operating 90 

System Generation — Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." ( 2 pages ) 



L22-6921 IBM System/360 Custom Feature 13 

Description, 2903 Special Control Unit 
Model 1— RPQ 880836 

This publication describes the organizational, func- 
tional, and operational characteristics of the ibm 2903 
Special Control Unit Model 1, which permits attach- 
ment of a wide variety of nonstandard and conven- 
tional input/output devices to ibm System/360 Models 
30, 40, 44, 50, 65, 67, and 75. Attachment of the 2903-1 
to a System/360 is via the standard System/360 i/o 
interface of a selector or multiplexer channel. 

A detailed description of the functional units and 
interfaces of the 2903 is given, with particular emphasis 
on programming aspects of and design considerations 
for attached input/ output adapters and external de- 
vices. Command, status, and sense information per- 
taining to the 2903 and the external devices is also 
included. 

The reader is assumed to have a knowledge of in- 
formation-processing systems and to have read IBM 
System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22-6821. 
IBM System/360 I/O Interface— Channel to Control 
Unit — OEMI, Form A22-6843 is a required reference. 
Other related literature is listed by title and form num- 
ber and briefly described in IBM System/360 Bibliog- 
raphy, Form A22-6822. (48 pages) 



L27-3009 2905 Remote Multiplexer 13 

Component Description 

This publication describes the ibm 2905 Remote Mul- 
tiplexer and its operation. The 2905 is used with vari- 
ous ibm and common-carrier terminals and is con- 
nected to an ibm System/ 360 through the ibm 2906 
Data Transmission Unit. Communication facilities that 
can be used with the 2905 are specified. 

Refer to Planning and Installation of a Data Com- 
munications System Using IBM Line Adapters, Form 
A24-3435, for further information. 

Other related literature is referenced by form num- 
ber and briefly described in the IBM System/360 
Bibliography, Foi^> A22-6822. (112 pages) 



R20-1 055 IBM System/360 COURSE Selection 
Guide — Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (2 pages) 

R20-9064 IBM System/360 COBOL Coding 
Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 



R20-9100 IBM System/360 Programming 
Language/One Coding 
Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 



R20-9105 IBM System/360 FORTRAN IV 
Language/One Coding 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 



90 



90 



90 



90 



90 



R20-91 07 IBM System/360 Introduction 
Course Description 

Upon successful completion of this course the student 
is familiar with the integration of equipment and pro- 
gramming systems for System/360. Topics covered are: 
development of System/360, configurations, data rep- 
resentation and formats, cpu organization, channels, 
multiprogramming and multiprocessing, programming 
systems, input/output devices, direct access storage 
devices, teleprocessing, data file planning, education 
and publications, and transition to the System/360. 

This course replaces System Features {1-3600), Form 
Z23-4045, and Random File Concepts (S-1300), Form 
R20-4002. (4 pages) 



R20-9 1 48 IBM System/360 Operating System 
Workshop — Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (2 pages) 



R20-9150 COBOL Program Fundamentals 
Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (3 pages) 



R20-9151 Writing Programs in COBOL 
Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (3 pages) 

R20-9152 COBOL Programming Techniques 
Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (3 pages) 



R20-91 54 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 
System Communication Coding — BTAM 
Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (2 pages) 



R20-9163 IBM System/360 Communication 
System Design and Analysis — Course 
Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 



R20-91 65 System/360 Assembler Language 
Coding Programmed Instruction ' 
Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (2 pages) 



R20-9108 System/360 System Operation 
BOS — Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 



R20-9168 IBM System/360 Report Program 
90 Generator Coding (Card System) 

Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (2 pages) 



90 



90 



90 



90 



90 



90 



90 



90 



L27-3010 IBM System/360 Custom Systems 13 

Unit, 2905 Remote Multiplexer, 2906 
Transmission Control, Installation 
Manual — Physical Planning 

This publication contains detailed physical-planning 
information for the ibm 2905 Remote Multiplexer and 
the ibm 2906 Transmission Control. Dimensions, 
weights, cable specifications, service clearances, physi- 
cal specifications, and electrical and environmental re- 
quirements for each unit are included. ( 10 pages ) 



M08-0033 System/360 VTOC Overlay 80 

This transparent plastic overlay is designed to simplify 
the reading of vroc listings. When placed over a listing 
(obtained by means of the iehlist utility program, 
orderable component number — irr-soe), the overlay 
labels the fields of the vtoc so that the programmer no 
longer needs to refer to a manual to interpret them. 



R20-9113 IBM System/360 Disk/Tape 

Operating Systems — Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 



R20-91 1 8 IBM System/360 Operating 
System Coding — Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." ( 6 pages ) 



R20-9121 IBM System/360 Report Program 
Generator Program Coding 
Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 



R20-91 28 IBM System/360 Customer Executive 
Seminar — Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 



90 R20-9169 IBM System/360 Report Program 
Generator Coding (Tape System) 
Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." ( 2 pages ) 



90 



90 



R20-91 70 IBM System/360 Report Program 
Generator Coding (Disk System) 
Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." ( 2 pages) 

R20-91 71 System/360 Assembler Language 
Coding Workshop — Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (2 pages) 



90 R20-9188 IBM System/360 Operating System 
STRAM — Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (2 pages) 



90 



90 



90 



90 



48 



Course Description Note 

These publications describe a course, its objec- 
tives, length, intended audience, prerequisites, 
and course code. All materials required by the in- 
structor and student are listed. Abstracts are in- 
cluded for education materials created especially 
for the course; abstract references are provided for 
the other materials. 



R20-9189 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 90 

System Synchronous Transmit Receive 
Access Method — Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." ( 2 pages ) 

R20-9195 IBM System/360 Introduction to 90 

Forecasting — Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 

R20-9196 IBM System/360 General Purpose 90 

System Simulator — Introduction — Course 
Description 

"See Course Description Note." ( 1 page) 

R20-9197 IBM System/360 General Purpose 90 

System Simulator — Advanced — Course 
Description 

"See Course Description Note." ( 1 page) 

R20-9201 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 90 

System Synchronous Transmit Received 
Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (2 pages) 

R20-92O2 IBM System/360 Synchronous 90 

Transmit Received Devices and Concepts 
— Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (2 pages) 

R20-921 1 IBM System/360 Basic PL/I Coding 90 

Programmed Instruction— Course 
Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 

R20-9214 1287 Optical Reader — Course 90 

Description 

"See Course Description Note." ( 3 pages) 

R20-9216 IBM System/360 OS Language 90 

Interface — Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 

R20-9227 System/360 Computer System 90 

Simulator/360 — Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 

R20-9232 Introduction to System/360 90 

Programmed Instruction — Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (3 pages) 

R20-9233 System/360 OS BTAM Coding 90 

Course Description 

Upon successful completion of the course, the student 
is able to understand the functions of btam and where 
it fits in the Operating System, and to code using btam 
macros in order to service the communication lines con- 
nected to System/360. (4 pages) 



R20-9236 Introduction to the System/360 
Document Processing System 
Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (8 pages) 

R20-9244 System/360 Operating System 
Advanced Operator Training— Course 
Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 

R20-9257 IBM System/360 Operations 
Management — Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 

R20-9259 IBM System/360 DOS/TOS 
Facilities for Nonprogrammers 
Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 

R20-9262 System/360 Mathematical 

Programming System Control Program 
and Linear Programming Feature 
Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 

R20-9263 System/360 Mathematical 
Programming System II Separable 
Programming Feature Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 

R20-9264 System/360 Mathematical 
Programming System III READCOMM 
FORTRAN — Interface Feature — Course 
Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 

R20-9265 System/360 Mathematic 
Programming System IV MARVEL 
Language Feature — Course Description 

"See Course Description Note." (4 pages) 



90 X20-1706 IBM 2302 Disk Storage Drive 85 

Reference Card 

A capacity and transmission time reference card ar- 
ranged in a tabular format. Formulas and examples of 
how to use the card are included. (Folded Card) 



90 



90 



90 



90 



90 



90 



90 



80 



X20-1702 Proportional Record Layout 
Format Forms 

The front side of this form consists of the Proportional 
Record Layout Form. It is suitable for card, tape, and 
disk records. Positional markings are 00-99 and 01-100. 

The back side of the form is the Record Format 
Form. This form permits record layouts to be prepared 
without the space limitations of positional markings. 
Space is also provided for reference data. 

These forms are general-purpose and may be used 
for all systems. (25 per pad— 11 x 16%) 



X20-1703 IBM System/360 Reference 85 

Data Card 

The information on this card is a digest of the data 
contained in the IBM System/360 Principles of Opera- 
tion, Form A22-6821 and IBM Basic Support Assem- 
bler with Input/Output Macros (8K Tape), Form 
C24-3355. (Card- 5 fold) 



X20-1 705 IBM 231 1 Disk Cell Drive 85 

Reference Card 

A capacity and transmission time reference card ar- 
ranged in a tabular format. Formulas and examples of 
how to use the card are included. (Folded Card) 



X20-1709 IBM System/360 Basic 85 

Programming Support— Basic 
Utilities Reference Card 

This reference card is a digest of form C28-6505. It 
contains information needed to make use of the Basic 
Programming Support Basic Utility Programs, includ- 
ing an example of coding and deck setup. (Folded 
Card) 



X20-1 71 IBM 2314 Direct Access Storage 85 

Facility Capacity and Transmission 
Time Reference Card 

This reference card provides a convenient reference 
and several informative examples for planning and pro- 
gramming purposes. Tables include timing and capac- 
ity with and without keys. ( 1 page ) 



X20-1711 IBM System/360 Record Layout 80 

Worksheet 

Padded forms showing double word, word, halfword 
and byte boundaries. Bytes marked to accommodate 
packed-decimal digits. Provides for two records of 256 
positions each, both in hexadecimal and decimal num- 
bering. ( 25 per pad — 11 x 16% ) 



X20-1717 IBM 2301 Drum Storage 85 

This reference card describes the capacity of the 2301 
and the data transmission time requirements for 
records of various lengths. Formulas and examples 
supplement the tables. ( Folded Card ) 



X20-171 8 IBM 2303 Drum Storage 85 

Reference Card 

This reference card describes the capacity of the 2303 
and the data transmission time requirements for records 
of various lengths. Formulas and examples are used to 
supplement the tables. (Card) 



X20-1719 IBM System/360 Character Seta 85 

This card shows the character sets used by bbm System/ 
360 programming languages, printers, and system 
typewriters. It also includes the character sets used 
by some current-system equipment that may be in use 
during a transition to System/360. (2 pages) 



X20-1733 IBM Operating System/360 85 

Reference Data, Assembler Language 
Data Management Macro Instructions 

This pocket size booklet is a digest of the data man- 
agement macro instruction os/3eo. The information 
presented in this publication is extracted from C28- 
6647 and N28-2217. (28 pages) 



X20-1738 System/ 360 Reference Data 85 

Assembler Language Supervisor 
Macro-Instruction 

The information in this form is a digest of the data 
contained in the IBM System/360 Operating System 
Control Program, Form C28-6541. (4-page pocket 
booklet) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 49 



X20-1739 System/360 Reference Data 85 

Linkage Editor 

The information in this form is a digest of the data 
contained in the IBM System/360 Operating System 
Linkage Editor, Form C28-6538. (4-page pocket book- 
let) 



X20-1741 IBM 1287 Optical Reader 80 

Document Tracing Guide 

This card is a forms design guide for assisting the 1287 
users in the physical layout of input documents. (Card 

-ey 4 x9y 4 ) 



X20-1744 PL/ 1 Refrence Data 85 

Lists keywords and character sets of pl/i. Keywords 
are given in alphabetical sequence, are related to pages 
in C28-6571, and their use is illustrated by short exam- 
ples. Character sets are given in System/360 ascending 
collating sequence, punched-card codes and System/ 
360 8-bit code are shown, and names, use, and short 
examples are given and related to pages in C28-6571. 
(8 pages) 



X20-1746 Operating System/360 Job Control 85 
Language Reference Card 

This card contains reference tables and examples of 
usage designed to assist the user in preparing the Job 
Control Language aids for os/m The reference card 
pertains to the Primary Control Program only. 



X20-1747 Share Print Chart 80 

Share Print Chart — 6 lines per inch spacing. Installa- 
tion supply special spacing chart, padded. 



X20-1749 IBM System/360 PL/I Reference Card 85 
for DOS/TOS 

Reference card. (10 pages) 



X20-1751 IBM 2260 Display Format 80 

Padded form ( 25 per pad) 



X20-1758 IBM System/360 Model 30 1401/ 85 

1440/ 1460 Compatibility Feature Reference 
Card 

A reference card for the System/360 Model 30, 1401/ 
1440/ 1460 Compatibility Feature. (10 pages) 



X20-1 769 IBM System/360 Operating System 85 

COBOL E and F Language Reference Card 

Reference card. (4 pages) 



X20-1770 IBM System/360 BPS/BOS/DOS/TOS 85 
Sort/Merge Reference Card 

Reference card. ( 100 pages ) 



X20-1771 IBM System/360 Reference Data 85 

DOS Job Control Language Operator 
Communication Reference Card 

A reference card for dos job control language operator 
communication. (14 pages) 



X20-8020 Flowcharting Template 80 

This template provides a convenient means for draw- 
ing standard symbols used frequently in flowcharting 
computer programs. (1 sheet) 



X20-8030 General Purpose Card Punching 80 

Form 

A general purpose form for preparing input data, con- 
trol cards, program patch cards and other card input 
to ibm equipment. (25 per pad — 8% x 11) 



X22-6834 IBM System/360 Unit Record I/O 80 

Template 

Equipment templates on acetate sheets, Y\ inch equals 
1 foot scale, for planning machine room layouts. ( 1 
sheet) 



X22-6835 IBM System/360 Hypertape Template 80 

Equipment templates on acetate sheets, Yt inch equals 
1 foot scale, for planning machine room layouts. (1 
sheet) 



X22-6837 Magnetic Tape Record 85 

Characteristics — IBM 2400 Series 
Magnetic Tape Units 

This card is presented as an aid in estimating tape 
processing time and record capacity per reel. (Card) 



X22-6840 Hypertape Capacity and Timing 85 

This card is presented as an aid in estimating tape 
processing time and record capacity per reel. (Card) 



X22-6858 Data Storage Template 80 

Equipment templates on acetate sheets, Y\ inch equals 
1 foot scale, for planning machine room layouts. (3 
sheets) 



X22-6859 IBM System/360 Consoles and 80 

Terminals Template 

Equipment templates on acetate sheets, Y\ inch equals 
1 foot scale, for planning machine room layouts. (2 
sheets) 



X22-6860 Magnetic and Optical Character 80 

Readers Template 

Equipment templates on acetate sheets, Y\ inch equals 
1 foot scale, for planning machine room layouts. (1 
sheet) 



X22-6894 IBM System/360 Processors Models 80 

25, 30 and 40 

Equipment templates on acetate sheets, Vi inch equals 
1 foot scale, for planning machine room layouts. (1 
sheet) 



X22-6905 IBM System/360 Processor 90 

Model 67 Template 

Equipment templates on acetate sheets, Yi inch equals 
1 foot scale, for planning machine room layouts. (5 
sheets) 



X22-6914 IBM System/360 Processors Models 80 
44 and 50 

Equipment templates on acetate sheets; Yi inch equals 
1 foot scale, for planning machine room layouts. (4 
sheets) 



X22-6923 IBM System/360 Model 85 80 

Physical Planning Template 

Equipment templates on acetate sheets, Yi inch equals 
1 foot scale, for planning machine room layouts (4 
pages) 



X22-6924 IBM System/360 Model 65 80 

Multisystem Physical Planning Template 

Equipment templates on acetate sheets, Ya inch equals 
1 foot scale, for planning machine room layouts. (4 
pages) 



80 



X20-1759 IBM 1287 Optical Reader Design 
Formats 

Padded form ( 25 per pad) 



80 



X22-6925 Field Engineering Furniture 
X22-6855 Magnetic Tape Template 80 Template 

Equipment templates on acetate sheets, Yi inch equals Equipment templates on acetate sheets, Y* inch equals 

1 foot scale, for planning machine room layouts. (1 1 foot scale. (1 sheet) 

sheet) 



X20-1760 Examples of Control Cards for 85 

System/ 360 Operating System 

This reference card gives sample control cards for 
running fobtban, cobol, pl/i, Assembler, and Utility 
jobs. An introduction and reference list to System/ 360 
Operating System are included. (10 pages) 



X20-1761 Mathematical Programming Input 80 

Form 

Padded form ( 25 per pad ) 



X22-6856 IBM System/360 Processors 80 

Template 

Equipment templates on acetate sheets, Yi inch equals 
1 foot scale, for planning machine room layouts. (5 
,sheets) 



X22-6857 Communication Equipment Template, 80 

Equipment templates on acetate sheets, Yi inch equals 
1 foot scale, for planning machine room layouts. (1 
sheet) 



X24-3347 IBM System/360 RPG File 80 

Description Sheet 

The file description specification sheet provides infor- 
mation about the input and output files used by the 
object program. (25 per pad — 8% x 13) 



X24-3348 IBM System/360 RPG File Extension 80 
Sheet 

The file extension sheet is used to provide information 
about table files, chaining files, and record address files. 
(25 per pad— 8% x 13) 



50 



X24-3349 IBM System/360 RPG Line Counter 80 

Specification Sheet 

This line-counter specification sheet is used if a report 
that will ultimately be printed is to be stored on some 
intermediate device, and if the program uses overflow 
indicators (for automatic skipping). (25 per pad — 
8%xl3) 



X24-3350 IBM System/360 RPG Input 80 

Specification Sheet 

The input specification sheet is used to specify the files 
to be read into the system, identify records contained 
in the file, and describe the location of the data fields in 
each record. (25 per pad — 8% x 13) 



X24-3351 IBM System/360 RPG Calculation 80 

Specification Sheet 

The calculation specification sheet is used to specify 
operations and calculations on input data obtained 
from previous calculations. (25 per pad — 8% x 13) 



X24-3352 IBM System/360 RPG Output-Format 80 
Specification Sheet 

This output-format specification sheet is used to specify 
the location of the data fields in the output records and 
the kind of output fields to be produced. (25 per pad — 
8%xl3) 



X24-3376 IBM System/360 Model 30 80 

IBM 1052 Key-tabs 

These key-tabs are fastened on the front of the keys on 
the ibm 1052 when the Model 30 is being operated in 
1400 Compatibility mode. (Plastic Sheet— 5% x 8%) 



X24-3406 IBM System/360 Model 30 80 

IBM 2702 Worksheet 

Multiplexor channel multiplex mode loading evaluation 
for ibm System/360 Model 30 may indicate an apparent 
overload for the ibm 2702 Transmission Control Unit 
(when attached to the multiplexor channel). The ibm 
2702 Worksheet is then used with an alternate pro- 
cedure for evaluation of the 2702. This worksheet is 
designed for use with the alternate procedure for the 
2702 described in IBM System/360 Model 30 Channel 
Characteristics and Functional Evaluation, Form A24- 
3411. (25 per pad— 11 x 16%) 



X24-3407 IBM System/360 Model 30 80 

Multiplexor Channel Worksheet 

This worksheet is used to facilitate evaluation of the 
channel effects imposed upon ibm System/360 Model 
30 when the multiplexor channel is operating in multi- 
plex mode. The evaluation procedure is described in 
the IBM System/360 Model 30 Channel Characteristics 
and Functional Evaluation, Form A24-3411. (25 per 
pad— 11x16%) 



X24-3448 IBM 1445 Printer Spacing Chart 80 

This chart is scaled in non-photographic blue arid 
provides 113 printing positions at eight characters per 
inch for carriage spacing of six lines per inch. Vertical 
rulings are shown for each inch or every eight char- 
acters apart to assist in printing layout. A carriage- 
control tape facilitates planning for tape punching. 
Space is available on the top of the form to indicate 
miscellaneous print line formats. ( 1 page) 



X24-3477 Compatibility Initialization Deck 80 

Coding Sheet 

This form is used to facilitate preparation of the Com- 
patibility Initialization Deck (cn>) when the 1401, 1440, 
and 1460 Compatibility Feature is used on the ibm 
System/360 Model 30. 

The form shows the codes required for each of the 32 
cards used to lead the 1400 auxiliary storage A and B. 
The contents of the cards required for the initialization 
routine are also shown. Except for variable data, the 
forms are pre-printed. 

The card fields of the cm are described in detail in 
the System/ 360 Model 30, 14O0 Compatibility Feature, 
Form A24-3255. (1 sheet) 



X24-5045 System/360 Assembler Coding 
Form DTFSR Entries Tape 

Padded form, 25 per pad. 

X24-5046 System/360 Coding Form 
DTFSR Entries Card Read-Punch 

Padded form, 25 per pad. 

X24-5047 System/360 Coding Form 

DTFSR Entries Printer and Print Keyboard 

Padded form, 25 per pad. 



X24-5048 System/360 Coding Form 
DTFSR Entries Disk 



Padded form, 25 per pad. 



X24-5049 System/360 Coding Form 
DTFDA Entries 

Padded form, 25 per pad. 



X24-5050 System/360 Coding Form 
DTFIS Entries 

Padded form, 25 per pad. 



X24-5051 System/360 Coding Form 
DTFSD Entries 

Padded form, 25 per pad. 



X24-5052 System/360 Coding Form 
DTFMT Entries 

Padded form, 25 per pad. 



X24-5053 System/360 Coding Form 
DTFCD Entries 

Padded form, 25 per pad. 



X24-5054 System/360 Coding Form 
DTFCN Entries 

Padded form, 25 per pad. 



X24-5055 System/360 Coding Form 
PRMOD Entries 

Padded form, 25 per pad. 



X24-5056 System/360 ISMOD Entries 

Padded form, 25 per pad. 



80 



X26-5508 IBM System/360 Process I/O 80 

Devices Template 

Equipment templates on acetate sheets,^ inch equals 1 
foot scale for planning machine room layouts. (2 sheets) 



X26-5590 System/360 Report Program 80 

Generator Indicator Summary 

Padded form, 25 per pad. 



X27-2950 IBM 2250 Display Layout Sheet 80 

A layout sheet to plan a display and formulate the 
associated program data. (1 sheet) 



X28-6383 IBM FORTRAN IV Reference Data 85 

Fortran rv information is included for ibm System/ 
360 Basic Programming Support System (bps Card 
and bps Tape), ibm System/360 Tape Operating Sys- 

30 tem (tos), ibm System/360 Disk Operating System 
(dos), ibm System/360 Operating System (e, g, and 
k), ibm System/360 Model 44 Programming System 
(44ps), ibm System/360 Time Sharing System (tss), 
ibm 1130 System (1130), ibm 1800 System (1800), and 

-q United States of America Standards Institute (usasi). 
(8 pages) 



X28-6506 IBM System/360 Assembler Short 80 

.Q Coding Form 

This form is designed to assist programmers in coding 
programs in the ibm System/360 special support basic 
assembler language, as described in Form C28-6503. 
(25 per pad— 8% x 11) 

80 

X28-6507 IBM System/360 Assembler Long 80 

Coding Form 

This form is designed to assist programmers in coding 
30 programs in the ibm System/360 special support basic 
assembler language, as described in Form C28-6503. 
(25 per pad— 8% x 14) 



X28-6509 IBM System/360 Assembler 80 

80 Coding Form 

This form is designed to assist programmers in coding 
programs in the ibm System/360 operating system as- 
sembler language, as described in Form C28-6514. (25 
per pad — 8% x 14) 



X28-6812 IBM System/360 Model 44 85 

Programming System Formats for 
Machine Check Interruption Diagnostics 

When a machine-check interruption occurs, the sys- 
tem attempts to produce a diagnostic printout on the 
console typewriter and, if successful, places the ma- 
chine in the wait state. This printout assists field engi- 
neering personnel in analyzing a malfunction, and it 

80 should be saved by the operator for their use. 

Panel 1 provides material introductory to the use of 
this reference card. Panels 2 and 3 describe the format 
of the printout. Panel 4 describes its content Panel 4 
may be used in conjunction with the first line of the 

gg diagnostic printout to determine the content of re- 
maining lines. Subsequently, Panels 2 and 3 may be 
used to determine the significances of the various fields 
and digits of the selected items displayed. (2 pages) 



80 



80 X28-7327 FORTRAN Coding Form 

Padded form, 25 per pad. 



80 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 51 



Y20-0042 System/360 Data Conversion Utility 60 
III Version 2 System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-26X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user gain a more thorough knowledge of the program- 
ming logic employed in the program macros. This 
manual presents a narrative for each macro which 
should be complemented by a listing of the basic tape. 
The manual is available from Mechanicsburg to 
those who need it for either die modification or main- 
tenance of the program. ( 76 pages ) 

Y2O-0O62 System/360 Flowchart 60 

System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-22X 
The ibm System/ 360 Flowchart program is a System/ 
360 program designed to produce flowcharts. This 
documentation aid operates under Dos/seo and is in- 
tended to minimize the planning and effort required to 
produce and maintain documentation. 
It gives the user ability to: 

1. Produce clear, standardized, easily reproduced 
computer-generated flowcharts. 

2. Keep flowcharts continually up to date. 

3. Standardize flowcharting techniques. 

This publication is used in conjunction with the 
System/360 Flowchart optional tape, which contains 
the source language input, the assembly listings, and 
the program logic flowcharts. The optional tape is 
available from the ibm Program Information Depart- 
ment at Hawthorne, New York. One 2400-foot reel of 
nine-track tape is required. 

This publication contains the narrative for the flow- 
charts, switch and register usage, miscellaneous pro- 
gramming notes, and the internal record formats used 
by the program. 

The User's Manual and the Operator's Manual are 
prerequisites to reading and using this publication. 
(92 pages) 

Y20-0065 Mathematical Programming 60 

System/360 System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CO-14X 

This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand the implementation of mps/360. It is 
designed to be used with the program listings and flow- 
charts of mps/ see (388 pages) 

Y20-0O67 System/360 Data Conversion 60 

Utilities II, Version 2 (Sequential, Direct 
Access) System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-20X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user gain a more thorough knowledge of the program- 
ming logic employed in the program modules, sub- 
routines, and macros. 

The manual presents, for each module and subrou- 
tine, flowcharts, flowchart narrative, and switch and 
register listings. For each macro, a listing and macro 
narrative are provided. (256 pages) 

Y20-0071 System/360 Online Teller Program 60 
and Mortgage Loan Background Capability 
System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-FB-16X 
This manual contains detailed flowcharts for the online 
program and the file preparation programs. Program 
narratives and descriptions of switches are given in the 
Programmer's Manual and correlated to the flowcharts 
by cross-reference indexes. (278 pages) 



Y20-O075 General Purpose Simulation 60 

System/360 System Manual 

This publication contains a description of the internal 
structure and basic operation of the gpss/sso program. 
All eleven modules which make up the gfss/sm pro- 
gram are discussed in general and, where appropriate, 
the operation of all routines within a given module is 
explained in detail. 

In general, the material presented throughout this 
manual is applicable to both the os and dos version of 
the GPss/aeo program. Specific differences are listed and 
described in Appendix D. 

The information contained in this manual should 
give the user a thorough understanding of the struc- 
ture and operation of the cpss/seo program so that 
help block routines or other modification may be more 
easily implemented. (407 pages) 



Y20-0080 System/360 APT Numerical Control 60 
Processor Version 2 System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CN-10X 

This manual provides detailed information to assist 

the user in gaining a more thorough knowledge of the 

programming logic employed in the application. (920 

pages) 



Y20-0083 Project Management System/360 60 

Network Processor System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CP-04X 
This manual presents a detailed description of subrou- 
tines and internal data formats of pms/sw Network 
Processor. In conjunction with the program listings and 
flowcharts, it provides the user with a complete de- 
scription of how this processor is implemented. (228 
pages) 



Y20-0084 Project Management System/360 60 

Cost Processor System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CP-04X 
This manual presents a detailed descripiton of subrou- 
tines and internal data formats of PMs/aeo Cost Proc- 
essor. In conjunction with the program listings and 
flowcharts, it provides the user with a complete de- 
scription of how this processor is implemented. (185 
pages) 



Y20-0085 Project Management System/360 60 

Version 2, Report Processor System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CP-04X 
This manual presents a detailed description of subrou- 
tines and internal data formats of pms/sbo Report 
Processor. In conjunction with the program listings and 
flowcharts, it provides the user with a complete de- 
scription of how this processor is implemented. (375 
pages) 



Y20-O092 System/360 Scientific Subroutine 60 

Package Version 3 System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CM-03X 
This manual provides flowchart information on the 
logic used in each subroutine of the System/360 Sci- 
entific Subroutine Package. All subroutine descriptions 
and listings are contained in the Users Manual. (264 
pages) 



Y20-0096 Synchronous Transmit-Receive 60 

Access Method for DOS/360 System 
Manual 

Program Number: 36QA-SE-32X 
This publication describes the architecture and logic 
of the Synchronous Transmit-Receive Access Method 
for Dos/seo. The manual describes die process for gen- 
erating stb. capability into a dos system, loading die 
access method, and logic. Included are: 

sysgen and stb. loading 

Architecture 

Macro Expansions 

Routine Logic 

stb Error Recovery 

Control Block 
Prerequisites are: 

1. A basic knowledge of System/360 machine con- 
cepts. 

2. A basic knowledge of nos/aeo. 

3. A knowledge of principles of stb transmission. 

4. Understanding of the Synchronous Transmit- 
Receive Access Method User's Manual. (120 pages) 



Y20-0097 Synchronous Transmit-Receive 60 

Access Method for OS/360 System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-33X 
This publication describes the architecture and logic 
of the Synchronous Transmit-Receive Access Method 
for os/seo. The manual describes die process for gen- 
erating stb capability into an os system, loading the 
access method, and logic. Included are: 

sysgen and stb loading 

Architecture 

Macro Expansions 

Routine Logic 

stb Error Recovery 

Control Block 
Prerequisites are: 

1. A basic knowledge of System/360 machine con- 
cepts. 

2. A basic knowledge of os/seo. 

3. A knowledge of principles of stb transmission. 

4. Understanding of the Synchronous Transmit- 
Receive Access Method User's Manual. (360 pages) 



Y20-0099 System/360 Bill of Material 60 

Processor, Version 2 System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-ME-06X 

This manual provides detailed information to assist the 
user in gaining a more thorough knowledge of the 
programming logic employed in the application. 

It contains detailed reference material for the file 
organization, maintenance, and reorganization pro- 
gram modules. (380 pages) 



Y20-0100 TEST/360 Control Card Edit and 60 

Analysis Program — Application 
Description 

Program Number: 360A-SE-25X 
This program is a stand-alone program for editing and 
analyzing network and message generation control 
cards before using die test/380 (Teleprocessing En- 
vironmental Simulator Testing) system, test/bso is a 
confidential Type n program, which does not allow 
users the possibility of testing their input at other than 
specific datacenter locations. This program allows prior 
editing at any location approved and authorized by 
the regional datacenter. 



52 



The test/ 360 Control Card Edit and Analysis Pro- 
gram provides the following: 

1. Edit of the 17 types of test/360 network and 
message generation control cards. 

2. Diagnostic message and column indicator for each 
edit error found. 

3. Estimated core storage requirements for the test/ 
360 simulation being specified. 

4. Summary report of system, line, and terminal 
specifications. 

5. Ability to edit sets of test/360 control cards in 
one pass. 

Minimum configuration consists of a 64K System/ 
360 Model 30 with 2540, 1403, 1052, and optionally, a 
2400 ( seven- or nine-track) . 

The source language used is System/360 Basic As- 
sembler with an 8K bps supervisor. (8 pages) 



Y20-0101 System/360 Remote Access 60 

Computing System (RAX) System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-17X 
This publication provides the systems programmer 
with detailed information about the rax system. It con- 
tains flowcharts and descriptions of the routines mak- 
ing up the system. ( 376 pages) 



Y20-O1 05 1 400 Autocoder to COBOL 60 

Conversion Aid Program Version 2 
Program Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-19X 
This program is designed to aid in conversion to 
System/360 cobol for all 1401, 1410, 1440, 1460 and 
7010 users whose current applications are written in 
Autocoder, by (1) reducing the total effort required 
in program conversion, (2) freeing manpower of much 
of the routine reprogramming effort, and (3) elimi- 
nating many clerical errors associated with reprogram- 
ming. 

This manual contains a general description of the 
program, the machine configuration used, and a 
sample problem. (56 pages) 



Y20-0106 1400 Autocoder to COBOL 60 

Conversion Aid Program Version 2 
Operator's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-19X 
This program is designed to aid in conversion to Sys- 
tem/360 cobol for all 1401, 1410, 1440, 1460, and 7010 
users whose current applications are written predom- 
inately in Autocoder, by (1) reducing the total effort 
required in program conversion, (2) freeing man- 
power of much of the routine reprogramming effort, 
and (3) eliminating many clerical errors associated 
with reprogramming. 

This manual contains the information necessary to 
run the program. It includes operating instructions, 
halts and message list, and storage map. Instructions 
are also provided for preparing a functioning system 
from the basic machine-readable material furnished 
by the Program Information Department. (108 pages) 



input and output are facilitated by means of applica- 
tion-oriented control statements. 

This manual provides detailed information to help 
the user gain a thorough knowledge of the program's 
logic. It contains flowcharts, flowchart narratives, and 
tables of switches and data used in common. It also 
includes a section describing the procedures for imple- 
menting several program modifications. (226 pages) 



Y20-0112 IBM System/360 Product Structure 60 

Retrieval Program System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-ME-O7X 

This manual provides detailed information to assist the 
user in gaining a more thorough knowledge of the 
programming logic employed in the application. 

It contains reference material for the program mod- 
ules included with the retrieval package. (54 pages) 



Y20-01 1 6 TEST/360 Control Card Edit and 
Analysis Program — Program Reference 
Manual 



60 



Program Number: 360A-SE-25X 

This program is a stand-alone program for editing net- 
work and message generation control cards before 
using them in the test/soo (Teleprocessing Environ- 
mental Simulator Testing) system. The primary func- 
tion of the program is to provide an efficient method 
of analyzing these control cards, test/360 is a confiden- 
tial Type n program, which does not allow users the 
possibility of testing their input at other than specific 
datacenter locations. The edit and analysis program 
allows prior editing at any location. 
The program provides the following: 

1. Edit of the 17 types of test/sBo network and mes- 
sage generation control cards. 

2. Diagnostic message and column indicator for each 
edit error found. 

3. Estimated core storage requirements for the test/ 
360 simulation being specified. 

4. Summary report of system, line, and terminal 
specifications. 

5. Ability to edit sets of test/360 control cards in 
one pass. 

Minimum configuration consists of a 64K System/ 
360 Model 30 with 2540, 1403, and 1052. (40 pages) 



Y20-0U8 System/360 AD-APT/AUTOSPOT 60 

Numerical Control Processor System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CN-09X 

This manual provides detailed information to assist the 
user in gaining a more thorough knowledge of the 
programming logic employed in the application. Cer- 
tain information, applicable to both this processor and 
the autospot Processor (swa-cn-osx) will be found in 
the autospot System Manual, Form Y20-0119. (234 
pages) 



Y20-01 24 1 400 Autocoder to COBOL 
Conversion Aid Program 
Version 2, System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-19X 
This Conversion Aid Program is designed to ease tfe 
transition to System/360 for all 1401, 1410, 1440, 148, 
and 7010 users whose current applications are writta 
predominately in Autocoder and sps, by (1) reducig 
the effort required in reprogramming, (2) freeiig 
manpower from the reprogramming effort to develp 
new applications, (3) eliminating many clerical errors 
associated with reprogramming, and (4) making e- 
systemization of the applications easier, since cobdl 
language is much easier to modify. 

This manual contains information necessary to un- 
derstand the workings of the program- Each phase is 
detailed and sufficient information is provided to allow 
the user to modify the program functions or its opent- 
ing environment. Instructions for processing the op- 
tional tape material are also included. (92 pages) 



Y20-OT26 Project Control System/360 System 60 
Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CP-06X 
This manual describes the routines and subroutines 
that comprise the ibm Project Control System/360. It 
is divided into the seven logical phases of the system 
and is intended primarily for the programmer who 
wishes to gain an understanding of the programming 
design of the pcs/aeo. It provides the necessary infor- 
mation for maintaining and modifying the system. ( 128 
pages) 



Y20-0127 System/360 Mortgage Loan 60 

Program System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-FB-19X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user gain more thorough knowledge of the program 
logic employed in the mortgage loan application. In- 
cluded for each run is an introduction to the run and 
a flowchart narrative, applicable switch listings and 
register usage in addition to the actual flowchart. (88 
) 



Y20-0130 Computer System Simulator/360 60 

Program Description and Operations Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-29T 
This manual provides a definitive description of the 
Computer System Simulator/360 (css/360), a simula- 
tor program for analyzing the performance of com- 
puter systems. The structure and language of the 
program are explained in detail, with some examples 
showing the application of the program. In addition, 
the operation procedures for running the program 
are included. (248 pages) 



Y20-01 1 1 System/360 Continuous System 60 

Modeling Program System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-16X 

This is an ibm System/360 program for the simulation 
of continuous systems. It provides an application- 
oriented input language that accepts problems ex- 
pressed in the form of either an analog block diagram 
or a system of ordinary differential equations. Data 



Y20-0119 System/360 AUTOSPOT Numerical 60 

Control Processor System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CN-08X 
This manual provides detailed information to assist the 
user in gaining a more thorough knowledge of the pro- 
gramming logic employed in the application. (404 
pages) 



Y20-0143 IBM System/360 Document 60 

Processing System — System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-12X 
This manual represents the information required to 
maintain or modify the internal logic of the ibm Sys- 
tem/360 Document Processing System. Insofar as pos- 
sible, all agreements, assumptions, and production aids 
used by the development programmers are included. 
(316 pages) 



IBM System/360 Bibliography 53 



Y20-0148 TEST/360 Version 2— Program 60 

Description Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-24R 

TEST/ 360 is a general-purpose tp test package which 

allows the user to test his operational programs and to 

evaluate the performance of his entire tp system before 

installation. 

test/360, operating in a separate System/360 cpu, 
is interfaced with the user's teleprocessing system 
through an ibm transmission control unit. Thus, the 
customers program residing in a separate cpu can 
operate in accordance with actual operating condi- 
tions. Because the user's programs and associated 
hardware are both integral parts of the simulation 
process, test/360 provides the closest approximation to 
a true operational environment. 

This manual describes test/360 and how it interfaces 
with the user's teleprocessing system during test. The 
document also describes the preparation of control 
cards, the generation of message transactions from the 
simulated terminals, logical features, interval reports, 
end-of-job reports, and post-run analysis reports which 
enable a user to evaluate the performance of his tp 
system. ( 144 pages) 

Y20-0153 Medical Information System 60 

Programs (MISP) Application Description 

Program Number: 360A-UH-08L 
A hospital must have the ability to respond quickly and 
accurately to the demands placed upon it. The appli- 
cation of electronic information processing can help 
provide a solution to the recurring problem of improv- 
ing service with limited resources. 

The Medical Information System Programs (misp) 
represent an application of information-processing 
equipment to answer this need, misp is designed to 
assist in the installation of a teleprocessing system 
(hospital information system) linking the many differ- 
ent service areas in a hospital where complete and 
prompt patient care is a requirement. These areas in- 
clude the nursing station, admitting, pharmacy, clini- 
cal laboratories, Xray, electrodiagnositcs, dietary, oper- 
ating room, central supply, and others. 

This manual describes in general the purpose and 
functions of a hospital information system using misp. 
(40 pages) 

Y20-0155 Medical Information System 60 

Programs (MISP) — Application Description 
Programmer's Manual 

Program Number: 360A-UH-08L 
The purpose of this manual is to describe how to use 
the Medical Information System Programs and facili- 
ties. A description of each interface to the executive, 
program, each library routine, system symbols, and 
parameters for system definition are included. In addi- 
tion, there is a series of steps outlined for guidance in 
construction of application programs using the misp 
facilities. 

This manual is available to those who meet the spe- 
cial conditions under which misp is released. (204 
pages) 

Y20-0168 System/360 Vehicle Scheduling 60 

Program, Scheduling Production and 
Distance Listing System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-ST-06X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user gain a more thorough knowledge of the program- 
ming logic employed in the Schedule Production and 
Distance Listing phases of the System/360 Vehicle 
Scheduling Program. (40 pages) 



Y20-0174 System/360 Administrative 60 

Terminal System DOS (ATS/DOS) 
System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-18X 
This manual contains information on the system de- 
sign, logic flow, and coding of the ats/360 Program. It 
contains narrative which describes the significant pro- 
grams which make up the system. Program flowcharts 
and assembly listings, although logically part of this 
manual, are not included in it. These are available on 
tape as described elsewhere. (206 pages) 



Y20-0177 Advanced Life Information System 60 

Batch Edit Program System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand program logic. It describes processing 
of input cards and the creation of input edit transac- 
tion items. Appropriate flowcharts, flowchart narra- 
tives, input/ output formats, program modification aids, 
and table descriptions are included. (104 pages) 



Y20-0178 Advanced Life Information System 60 

Input Edit Program System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 
This manual provides detailed information to help 
understand program logic. It describes processing of 
transaction items produced by the batch edit program 
and also describes the creation of external file mainte- 
nance transactions. Appropriate flowcharts, flowchart 
narratives, input/ output formats, tables and descrip- 
tions, and program modification aids are included. 
(544 pages) 



Y20-0179 Advanced Life Information System 60 
Frequently Used Record Formats 
System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-WX 

This manual contains the transaction data area for- 
mats, the miscellaneous data area formats, and policy 
master record formats. The transaction data area 
formats illustrate the output from the input edit pro- 
gram and the input to the file maintenance program. 
The transaction data area formats also illustrate a 
portion of certain output messages from the file main- 
tenance program. The miscellaneous data area formats 
illustrate a portion of certain output messages from 
the file maintenance program. Both the transaction 
data area formats and the miscellaneous data area 
formats are a part of the input and output for many 
of the output programs. In the documentation for the 
output programs reference is made to Frequently 
Used Record Formats for illustration of the exact na- 
ture of portions of the input or output message. (84 
pages) 



Y20-0180 Advanced Life Information System 60 

Miscellaneous Volume System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 

This manual contains sections on customer constants, 
customer tables, file maintenance account numbers 
and customer account strips, file maintenance message 
codes, transaction codes, and file maintenance work 
areas. The information in this manual will be referred 
to by many system manuals, particularly the file main- 
tenance system manuals. (244 pages) 



Y2O-0181 Advanced Life Information System 60 

File Maintenance Run Executive Program 
System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 
This manual provides detailed information to help 
understand program logic. This manual describes con- 
trol of all file maintenance processing. Also described 
is the creation of file maintenance messages for the 
output analysis program, policy master record updat- 
ing, and creation of restart records for the data cell 
restore program. Appropriate flowcharts, flowchart 
narratives, input/output formats, and work area de- 
scriptions are included. (136 pages) 



Y20-0182 Advanced Life Information System 60 

Data Cell Reorganization Program, 
Policy Master Record Merge Program, 
Data Cell Reconstruction Program, and 
Data Cell Restore Program System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 
This manual describes the policy master record file 
organization on the ibm 2321 Data Cell Drive and the 
programs which were written to (1) initially load the 
data cell file, (2) reorganize the data cell file, (3) re- 
construct a data cell, (4) provide restart procedures, 
and (5) maintain backup tape files. The following 
text describes the file organization and introduces the 
programs. A complete description of each program is 
provided in a subsequent section. (96 pages) 



Y2O-0183 Advanced Life Information System 60 
File Maintenance Include (R) Routines 
(Narratives) System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand program logic. It includes a general 
description of each file maintenance include (R) rou- 
tine. This manual should be used with the File Main- 
tenance Include (R) Routines (Flowcharts) to obtain 
a more detailed understanding of the processing in 
each include routine. ( 512 pages ) 



Y20-0184 Advanced Life Information System 60 

File Maintenance Include (R) Routines 
(Flowcharts) System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand program logic. It contains a flowchart 
for each file maintenance include (R) routine. This 
manual should be used with the File Maintenance 
Include (R) Routines (Narratives) to obtain a more 
detailed understanding of the processing in each in- 
clude routine. (684 pages) 



Y20-0185 Advanced Life Information System 60 

Hie Maintenance Call (S) Routines 
(Narratives) System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-O9X 

This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand program logic. It includes a general 
description of each file maintenance call (S) routine. 
This manual should be used with the File Maintenance 
Call (S) Routines (Flowcharts) to obtain a more de- 
tailed understanding of the processing in each call 
(S) routine. (612 pages) 



54 



Y20-O186 Advanced Life Information System 60 

File Maintenance Call (S) Routines 
(Flowcharts) System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand program logic. It contains a flowchart 
for each file maintenance call (S) routine. This manual 
should be used with the File Maintenance Call (S) 
Routines (Narratives) to obtain a more detailed un- 
derstanding of the processing in each call (S) routine. 
(604 pages) 

Y20-0187 Advanced Life Information System 60 

File Maintenance Issues, Additions, 
Complex Changes, and Terminations 
Transactions System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand the processing for issues, additions, 
complex changes, and terminations in the file mainte- 
nance program. It describes the processing for the 
respective transactions. A program abstract, narratives, 
and flowcharts are provided. (48 pages) 



Y20-0188 Advanced Life Information System 60 

File Maintenance Simple Changes 
Transactions System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand the simple change processing. It de- 
scribes the external file maintenance transactions that 
add, delete, or replace individual policy master record 
fields and/ or trailers. A program abstract, narratives, 
and flowcharts are provided. ( 196 pages) 



Y20-0189 Advanced Life Information System 60 

File Maintenance 36XX Financial 
Transactions-Payments System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-O9X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand payment processing in the file main- 
tenance program. It describes financial processing for 
all payment transactions. A program abstract, narra- 
tives, and flowcharts are provided. (80 pages) 



Y20-0190 Advanced Life Information System 60 

File Maintenance Financial 
Transactions-Accounting Entries 
System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 

This manual provides detailed information to help the 

user understand accounting entry processing in the file 

maintenance program. It describes financial processing 

for all accounting adjustment transactions. A program 

abstract, narratives, and flowcharts are provided. ( 132 

pages) 

Y20-0191 Advanced Life Information System 60 

File Maintenance Status 
Transactions-Process and Quote Terminations 
System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand status transaction processing in the 
file maintenance program. It describes processing for 
executing termination status transactions on a process 
(action) and a quote basis. A program abstract, narra- 
tives, and flowcharts are provided. (32 pages) 



Y20-0192 Advanced Life Information System 60 

File Maintenance Status Transactions-Process 
and Quote Miscellaneous, Loan Values, 
and Participation Values System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-O9X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand status transaction processing in the 
file maintenance program. It describes processing for 
executing miscellaneous, loan value, and participation 
value status transactions on a process (action) and a 
quote basis. A program abstract, narratives, and flow- 
charts are provided. (76 pages) 



Y20-0193 Advanced Life Information System 60 

File Maintenance Billing Transactions 
System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-ILO9X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand the billing processing in the file 
maintenance program. It describes processing for the 
internal transaction billing (normal billing), catch-up 
billing, externally generated billing (billing request 
transaction billing), and special frequency billing. A 
program abstract, narratives, and flowcharts are pro- 
vided. (56 pages) 



Y20-0194 Advanced Life Information System 60 

File Maintenance Premium Due, Overdue, 
and Anniversary Processing Transactions 
System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-O9X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand the internal activity processing in the 
file maintenance program. It describes processing for 
premium due, overdue, and anniversary processing 
activity. A program abstract, narratives, and flowcharts 
are provided. (56 pages) 



Y20-0195 Advanced Life Information System 60 

File Maintenance Rate File Extract and 
Anniversary Extract Update Transactions 
System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 

This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand the creation of rate file extracts and 
the anniversary extract update processing in the file 
maintenance program. It describes processing for the 
creation of the rate file extracts and the processing re- 
quired to perform the anniversary extract updating. 
A program abstract, narratives, and flowcharts are 
provided. (24 pages) 



Y20-0196 Advanced Life Information System 60 

File Maintenance Contractual Changes 
and Notifications System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand the internal activity processing in file 
maintenance. It describes the internal processing based 
on the annual activity and contractual change activity 
date in the policy information section of the policy 
master record. A program abstract, narratives, and 
flowcharts are provided. (104 pages) 



Y20-0197 Advanced Life Information System 60 

Output Analysis Program System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand program logic. It describes the proc- 
essing of messages output from the file maintenance 
run. Appropriate flowcharts, flowchart narratives, in- 
put/output formats, program modification aids, and 
tables and descriptions are included. The input/out- 
put formats and descriptions are to be used as an ex- 
planation of the file maintenance output in addition 
to their use to describe the input and output from the 
output analysis program. (212 pages) 



Y20-0198 Advanced Life Information System 60 

Transaction Register Program 
System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand program logic. It describes process- 
ing of transaction register extracts and error register 
extracts produced by the output analysis program and 
also describes the creation of transaction register re- 
ports. Appropriate flowcharts, flowchart narratives, in- 
put/output formats, tables and descriptions, and pro- 
gram modification aids are included. (84 pages) 



Y20-0199 Advanced Life Information System 60 

Status Print Program System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-ILWX 

This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand program logic. It describes process- 
ing of status report extracts produced by the output 
analysis program and the creation of printed status re- 
ports. Appropriate flowcharts, flowchart narratives, 
input/output formats, tables and descriptions, and 
program modification aids are included. (212 pages) 



Y20-020O Advanced Life Information System 60 

Policy Accounting Journal System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-O9X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand program logic. It describes the proc- 
essing of accounting messages and the printing of the 
policy accounting journal. Appropriate flowcharts, 
flowchart narratives, input/output formats, and tables 
are included. (32 pages) 



Y20-0201 Advanced Life Information System 60 

Accounting Control Program System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL49X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand program logic. It describes the up- 
dating of the accounting control file and the printing 
of the accounting control register. Appropriate flow- 
charts, flowchart narratives, input/output formats, and 
program modification aids are included. (52 pages) 



Y20-0202 Advanced Life Information System 60 

Error Register Program System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand program logic. It describes the proc- 
essing of error register messages and the printing of 
the error register. Appropriate flowcharts, flowchart 
narratives, input/output formats, and tables and de- 
scriptions are included. (32 pages) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 55 



Y20-0203 Advanced Life Information System 60 

Rate File Program System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-IL-09X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand program logic. It describes process- 
ing for rate file extracts, the reference to the rate file, 
and the creation of the output extract for updating the 
policy master record file. Appropriate flowcharts, flow- 
chart narratives, input/output formats, and program 
modification aids are included. (40 pages) 

Y2O-O204 Project Management System/360 60 

Flowchart System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CP-04X 
This manual contains the flowcharts for Project Man- 
agement System/360. It should be used in conjunction 
with the System Manuals for the Network Processor, 
Form Y20-0083, Cost Processor, Form Y20-0084, and 
Report Processor, Form Y20-0085. (308 pages) 

Y20-0205 MARVEL/360 System Manual 60 

Program Number: 360A-CO-15X 
Mabvel is a language processor for the data prepara- 
tion, matrix generation, output analysis, and manage- 
ment report writing functions associated with the 
Mathematical Programming System/ 360 (3eo-A-oo-i4x). 
mabvel was designed and implemented to provide 
powerful functional capabilities in this fast-growing 
area of mathematical programming. In providing such 
a comprehensive language and processor capability, 
trade-offs were made that reduced execution speed. 

mabvel provides maximum customer utility as an 
input/ output system for the development of new linear 
programming applications. This is an area where ex- 
tended function is more significant than high perform- 
ance. In a production environment where emphasis is 
on execution speed, mabvel is less suitable. 

This manual gives detailed information concerning 
the program logic for the purpose of making modifica- 
tions to or doing maintenance work on the program. It 
is designed to be used with the program listings of 
marvel/ seo. (410 pages) 

Y20-0206 Communication Network Design 60 

Program/360 CNDP/360/DOS/TOS 
Application Description 

Program Number: 360A-SE-28R 
CNDP/360 is a program to assist in the design of com- 
munication networks for data and message transmis- 
sion. 

This manual contains a general description of the 
program's capabilities, required machine configura- 
tion, general systems charts, a list of input/ output data 
sets, and a sample run. It is designed to run on System/ 
360 under control of the Disk Operating System or 
the Tape Operating System. (24 pages) 



Y20-0207 Communications Network Design 60 

Program/360 CNDP/360/DOS/TOS 
Program Description and Operations 
Manual 

Program Number: 360A-SE-28R 
CNDP/360 is a program to assist in the design of 
communication networks for data and message trans- 
mission. 

This publication describes the design capabilities of 
cndp/360 input information and program output. A 
sample run is provided to illustrate the required design 
data and the network constructed. Also included are 
the necessary operating instructions. ( 100 pages) 



Y20-0208 System/360 Text Processor 60 

HYPHENATION/360 System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-DP-O7X 
Hyphenation/360 prpvides division of words for text- 
processing applications where the addition of word 
syllables to a line to meet justification requirements is 
preferable to forcing the line to end in a complete 
word. This hyphenation capability is provided in the 
form of a module that can be linked with a user's Sys- 
tem/360 text-processing program or the composition/ 
360 module of the ibm System/360 Text Processor. 

Through program linkage, hyphenation/380 accepts 
a word from the user's program and determines die 
division points. The word, with the division points in- 
dicated, is returned to the user's program, where the 
portion to be retained on the line can be selected on 
the basis of the user's graphic requirements. 

This manual provides detailed information to help 
the user gain a more thorough knowledge of the pro- 
gramming logic and techniques used in each of the 
component programs. The information includes pro- 
gram narrative, switch and register listings, storage 
allocation data, and program modification aids. 

The manual is intended for use chiefly by systems 
analysts and programmers who may need to alter the 
component programs or otherwise engage in program 
maintenance. 

Familiarity with the Program Description Manual, 
Form H20-0525 and Operations Manual, Form H20- 
0526 is a prerequisite to reading and using this pub- 
lication. (44 pages) 

Y20-0209 System/360 1287 Input Conversion 60 

Program System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-DR-07X 
This program consists of a Transaction Specification 
Compiler and an Operational Processor. The Compiler 
processes the statements which describe the format 
and processing logic to be applied to documents 
scanned by the ibm 1287 Optical Reader. The output 
of the Compiler is a program module written in As- 
sembly Language. 

The program module is assembled and link-edited 
with the Operational Processor and existing program 
modules. The Operational Processor controls the exe- 
cution of the various program modules and converts 
the data to a conversion journal, error journal, and 
correction turnaround documents. 

Provision is made for correcting the error journal 
and updating the conversion journal. (212 pages) 

Y20-0211 Data Acquisition Multiprogramming 60 
System/360 Model 44 (DAMPS) System 
Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-20X 
This publication describes the internal logic of the 
damps/44 extensions to the System/360 Model 44 Pro- 
gramming System. It is designed for persons involved 
in program maintenance, and system programmers who 
are altering the program design. Program logic is not 
required for system construction, use, or operations. 
(170 pages) 

Y20-0213 Student Sheduling System/360, The 60 

Scheduler Program System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-US-07X 
This manual provides detailed information to assist 
the user in gaining a more thorough knowledge of the 
programming logic employed in the application. It pre- 
sents, for each phase, flowcharts, flowchart narrative, 
a list of switches, an index register list, programming 
notes, and program listings. (644 pages) 



Y20-0215 Shared Hospital Accounting System 60 
(SHAS) System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-UH-UX 
The Shared Hospital Accounting System (shas) pro- 
vides hospital accounting for a multiple-hospital en- 
vironment. The participating hospitals utilize the ap- 
plication programs of a central System/360 facility. 
The application programs include accounts receivable, 
patient billing, general ledger and system executive 
and monitor routines. 

This reference publication is used for additional 
support of shas accounts receivable application only. 
The manual contains detailed program information 
useful for program modification, error diagnosis situa- 
tions, and maintenance performance. This manual 
contains detail descriptive information on the logical 
operation of each program through program flow- 
charts. The program flowcharts are very detailed; every 
line of cobol code is depicted. The narratives are 
general for the most part — more detail has been 
included for the complicated programs. Program 
switches, indication usage, and labels and symbols are 
defined for each system program. 

The data listings provided are examples which 
might be used by a typical shas user. All of the data 
shown has been used to load the files and run the 
sample problem. The data includes label books, func- 
tion books, hospital profile load, edit specifications, 
sample problem data, and control cards. 

A chart indicating storage allocation of core re- 
quired by each program has been included as an 
appendix. (480 pages) 



Y20-0227 System/360 APT Numerical Control 60 

Processor Version 3 System Manual 
Flowcharts 

Program Number: 360A-CN-10X 

This manual consists entirely of flowcharts for the 

subject program. (280 pages) 



Y20-0230 System/360 Wholesale IMPACT 60 

Program Library System Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360A-DW45X, Version 2 

360V-DW-O6X 
The System Manual provides detailed information to 
assist the user in gaining a more thorough knowledge 
of the programming logic employed in the application. 

This manual presents, for each run, general descrip- 
tion, flowcharts, flowchart narrative, programming 
notes, and a switch and register listing. For each oper- 
ating system with which the impact Programs can be 
run, there is an Input/ Output Section listing, Control 
Systems Macro listing, core storage requirements, and 
storage maps. ( 480 pages ) 



Y20-025I Shared Hospital Accounting System 60 
(SHAS) Teleprocessing System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-UH-UX 
The Shared Hospital Accounting System (shas) pro- 
vides hospital accounting for a multiple-hospital en- 
vironment. The participating hospitals utilize the ap- 
plication programs of a central System/360 facility. 
The application programs include accounts receivable, 
patient billing, general ledger and system executive 
and monitor routines. 

This reference publication is used for additional 
support of shas teleprocessing executive and control 
programs. The manual contains detailed program in- 



56 



formation useful for program modification, error diag- 
nosis situations, and maintenance performance. This 
manual contains detail descriptive information on the 
logical operation of each program through program 
flowcharts. The program flowcharts are very detailed; 
every line of code is depicted. The narratives are gen- 
eral for the most part — more detail has been included 
for the complicated program segments. Program 
switches, register usage, and labels and symbols are 
defined for each system program module. (68 pages) 



Y20-O256 System/360 Inventory Control 60 

System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-MF-04X 
System/360 Inventory Control consists of nine pro- 
grams especially designed for implementing order 
point inventory control in manufacturing organiza- 
tions. 

This manual provides detailed information to assist 
the user in obtaining a more thorough knowledge of 
die program logic employed in the programs. 

The manual includes program flowcharts and flow- 
chart narratives in addition to information regarding 
switches, labels, symbols, and register assignment. 
(108 pages) 



Y20-0257 Data Acquisition Multiprogramming 60 
System/360 Model 44 DAMPS Assembler 
language Listings System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-20X 
This publication contains the assembly listings of the 
damps extensions to the System/360 Model 44 Pro- 
gramming System. It is designed for persons involved 
in damps program maintenance or modification. (950 
) ' ■ 



Y20-0262 IBM System/360 Model 44 Remote 60 

Access Computing System (RAX) 
System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-21X 
This publication provides the systems programmer 
with detailed information about the rax system. It 
contains flowcharts and descriptions of the routines 
making up the system. ( 260 pages ) 



PLM Note 

Program Logic Manuals describe the internal 
design or logic of the subject programs. These 
manuals are intended for persons involved In 
program maintenance and system programmers 
who are altering the program design. Program 
logic information is not necessary for the opera- 
tion of the program; therefore, distribution of 
these publications is limited to persons with 
maintenance and alteration requirements. 



Y2 1-0001 IBM System/360 Basic 25 

Programming Support — FORTRAN IV 
(16K Card) — Program logic Manual 

Program Number: 360P-FO-205 
"See flm Note." ( 156 pages ) 



Y2 1-0004 IBM System/360 Basic 32 

Programming Support Distribution 
Program— Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360-UT-208 
"See plm Note." (40 pages) 

Effective use of this manual requires an understand- 
ing of the following ibm System/ 360 publications: IBM 
System/360 Basic Programming Support, Distribution 
Program Specifications and Operating Guide, Form 
C21-5001; IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, 
Form A22-6821. 



Y24-5000 IBM Basic Operating System/360 21 

Assembler (8K Disk) — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360B-ASS09 
"See plm Note." (526 pages) 



Y24-5001 IBM Basic Operating System/360 33 

(8K Disk) Sort/Merge — Program logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360B-SM-308 
"See plm Note." ( 390 pages ) 



Y24-5005 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 28 

System — Report Program Generator (8K 
Disk) — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number. 360B-RG-307 
"See plm Note." ( 408 pages ) 



Y24-5006 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 36 

System — 1 070 Process Communication 
Supervisor— Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360B-SV-O32 
"See plm Note." (117 pages ) 



Y24-5007 IBM System/360 Basic 30 

Programming Support Paper Document 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 
ForIBM1231-Nl—360P-lO-060 (Version 2) 
For IBM 1418/ 1428— 360P-IO-059 (Version2) 
For IBM 1412/1419— 360P-IO-0S8 (Version 3) 

"See plm Note." ( 183 pages) 



Y24-5008 IBM System/360 Basic 33 

Programming Support — Tape Sort/Merge 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360P-SM-043, 1-channel 

360P-SM-044, 2-channel 
"See plm Note." ( 171 pages) 



Y24-5009 IBM System/360 Operating 24 

System— COBOL-E— Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360S-COS03 
"See plm Note." ( 280 pages ) 

This manual is designed to be used as a supplement 
to the program listing. Effective use requires an under- 
standing of ibm System/360 operation and of ibm Sys- 
tem/360 Operating System data management linkage 
editing, service programs, and cobol language speci- 
fications. Reference publications for this information 
are listed in the Preface. 



Y20-0263 System/360 Decision Logic 60 

Translator System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CX-32X 
This manual provides detailed information to assist 
the user in gaining a more thorough knowledge of the 
programming logic employed in the application. The 
System Manual is optional information available to the 
user and includes the flowchart narrative, the pro- 
grammed switch listing, the storage allocation, etc. 
Other material consists of the source program, the 
assembly listing, and die flowcharts, recorded on the 
optional tape. (28 pages) 



Y20-0294 Mathematical Programming System/ 60 
360 Report Generator (MPSRG) 
System Manual 

Program Number: 360A-CO-20X 
This manual provides detailed information to help the 
user understand the organization and structure of 
MPs/aeo Report Generator. It is designed to be used 
with the program listing of mps/380 Report Generator. 
(92 pages) 



Y24-50O2 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 
System — System Control — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360B-CL-302 
"See plm Note." (499 pages) 



Y24-5003 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 
System — Logical IOCS— Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360B-IO-303 (Sections 1 and 2) 

360B-IO-304 (Section 3) 

360B-IO-305 (Section 4) 
"See plm Note." (321 pages) 



Y24-5004 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 
System — Autotest (8K Disk) — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360B-PT-306 
"See plm Note." ( 124 pages ) 



36 



30 



Y24-5010 IBM System/360 Basic 36 

Programming Support — Basic Tape 
System (System Control and IOCS) 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360P-40-046 
"See plm Note." ( 325 pages ) 

This manual discusses the 8K Tape Control System 
(System Tape), 8K Independent Control System, and 
Logical and Physical iocs supporting these systems. 



Y24-501 1 IBM System/360 Basic 37 

Programming Support — Tape Autotest 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360P-PT-045 

"See plm Note." ( For 8K Tape ) ( 105 pages ) 



37 Y24-5012 IBM System/360 Basic 21 

Programming Support — Tape Assembler 
Program Logic Manual 



Program Number: 360P-AS-091 
"See plm Note." (524 pages) 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 57 



PLM Note 

Program Logic Manuals describe the internal 
design or logic of the subject programs. These 
manuals are intended for persons involved in 
program maintenance and system programmers 
who are altering the program design. Program 
logic information is not necessary for the opera- 
tion of the program; therefore, distribution of 
these publications is limited to persons with 
maintenance and alteration requirements. 



Y24-501 3 IBM System/360 Basic 

Programming Support — Universal 
Character Set Utility — Program Logic 
Manual 

"See plm Note." (23 pages) 



Y24-501 4 IBM System/360 Basic 
Programming Support — Basic 
Assembler — Program Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." ( 107 pages ) 



Y24-501 5 IBM System/360 Basic 

Programming Support — Basic Utilities 
Program Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." ( 131 pages) 
Programs included are: 
Absolute Loader 
Relocating Loader 
Single-Phase Dump Program 
Two-Phase Dump Program 
i/o Support Package 



Y24-5016 IBM System/360 Tape Operating 
System — Sort/Merge — Program Logic 
Manual 



32 



21 



32 



33 



Program Number: 360M-SM-400 
"See plm Note." ( 218 pages ) 



36 



Y24-501 7 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 
System Introduction to System Control 
Programs — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360N-CL-453, Version 3 
"See plm Note." (68 pages) 

This is one of five program logic manuals that de- 
scribe the internal logic of the ibm System/360 Disk 
Operating System system control programs: 

IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Introduc- 
tion to System Control Programs, Form Y24-5017. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, IPL and 

Job Control Programs, Form Y24-5086. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Super- 
visor and Physical and Logical Transients, Form 
Y24-5084. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Librarian 
Maintenance and Service Programs, Form Y24- 
5079. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Linkage 

Editor, Form Y24-5080. 
These manuals are designed to be used as a supple- 
ment to the program listing, and their effective use re- 
quires an understanding of ibm System/360 operation 
and of ibm System/ 360 Disk Operating System con- 
trol and service programs, macro instructions, and 
operating procedures. Reference publications for this 
information are listed in the Preface of this manual. 



Y24-5018 IBM System/360 Tape Operating 30 

System — Logical IOCS — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360M-IO-404, Version 2.1 

"See plm Note." ( 320 pages ) 

Effective use of this publication requires an under- 
standing of the following ibm System/360 publica- 
tions: 
IBM System/360 Principles of Operation, Form A22- 

6821 
IBM System/ 360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems, 

Assembler Specifications, Form C24-3414 
IBM System/360 Tape Operating System, System 

Control, Form Y24-5022 
Other related publications are listed in the Preface. 



Y24-5019 IBM System/360 Tape Operating 32 

System — Utility Programs — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360M-UT-403 
"See plm Note." ( 165 pages ) 



Y24-5020 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 30 

System Logical IOCS — Volume 1: 
Introduction — Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

CDMOD 360N-CL-453, Version 3 

CPMOD 360N-CL-453, Version 3 

DAMOD 360N-IO-544, Version 3 

DIMOD 360N-CL-457, Version 3 

DTFCN 360N-CL-453, Version 3 

ISMOD 360N-IO-457, Version 3 

MRMOD 360N-IO-477, Version 3 

MTMOD 360N-IO-456, Version 3 

ORMOD 360N-IO-478, Version 3 

PRMOD 360N-CL-453, Version 3 

PTMOD 360N-IO-458, Version 3 

SDMOD 360N-IO-455, Version 3 
"See plm Note." (304 pages) 

This publication is one of four Program Logic Man- 
uals that describe the internal logic of the Logical iocs 
(Input-Output Control System) programs for the ibm 
System/ 360 Disk Operating System. The four related 
Program Logic Manuals are: 

Volume 1 : Introduction, Form Y24-5020. 

Volume 2: Unit Record, Magnetic Tape, and Device 
Independent Files, Form Y24-5087. 

Volume 3: Sequential and Direct Access DASD Files, 
FormY24-5088. 

Volume 4: Indexed Sequential File Management Sys- 
tem, Form Y24-5089. 

Effective use of this publication requires an under- 
standing of ebm System/360 operation and the Disk 
Operating System Assembler language and its associ- 
ated macro definition language. Reference publications 
for this information are listed in the Preface. 



Y24-5022 IBM System/360 Tape Operating 36 

System — System Control — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360M-CL-405, Version 2 
"See plm Note." ( 624 pages ) 

This manual is designed to be used as a supplement 
to the program listings. Effective use requires an un- 
derstanding of ibm System/360 operation and of ibm 
System/ 360 Tape Operating System assembler lan- 
guage, macro-instructions, and system control and 
maintenance program operation. Reference publica- 
tions for this information are listed in the Preface. 



Y24-5023 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 32 

System — Utilities — Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360N-UT-461 

360N-UT-462 

360N-UT-463 
"See plm Note." ( 222 pages ) 



Y24-5025 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 24 

Operating Systems — COBOL-D with DASD 
Macros — Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 
360M-CB-402 
360M-CB-452 

"See plm Note." ( 131 pages ) 

This manual is designed to be used as a supplement 
to the program listing. 



Y24-5026 IBM System/360 Tape Operating 37 

System — Autotest — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360M-PT-407 
"See plm Note." (225 pages) 



Y24-5027 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 37 

System — Autotest — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360N-PT-459 
"See plm Note." ( 429 pages ) 



Y24-5028 IBM System/360 Basic 28 

Programming Support — Report Program 
Generator (8K Tape) — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360M-RG-201 
"See plm Note." (348 pages) 



Y24-502 1 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 
System — Sort/Merge — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360N-SM-450 
"See plm Note." (380 pages) 



Y24-5032 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 25 

Operating Systems — FORTRAN IV — 
33 Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360M-FO-409 

360N-FO-451 
"See plm Note." (151 pages) 



58 



PLM Note 

Program Logic Manuals describe the internal de- 
sign or logic of the subject -programs. These man- 
uals are intended for persons involved in program 
maintenance and system programmers who are 
altering the program design. Program logic in- 
formation is not necessary for the operation of the 
program; therefore, distribution of these publica- 
tions is limited to persons with maintenance and 
alteration requirements. 

Y24-5037 IBM System/360 Basic 28 

Programming Support Report Program 
Generator for Punched Card Equipment 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360P-RG-200 

"See plm Note." ( 296 pages ) 

Effective use of this manual requires an understand- 
ing of bbm System/360 operation and of ibm System/ 
360 Tape Operating System assembler language, macro 
instructions, and system control and maintenance pro- 
gram operation. Reference publications for this in- 
formation are listed in the Preface of this manual. 

Titles and abstracts of other related publications are 
listed in the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form A22- 
6822. 

Y24-5045 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 32 

Operating Systems — Utility Macros 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 
360N-UT-471 
360N-UT-4U 

"See plm Note." (83 pages) 

These utility macros support file-to-file operations 
among the following devices: 

ibm 2501 Card Reader 

ibm 1442 Card Read Punch 

ibm 2520 Card Read Punch 

ibm 2540 Card Read Punch 

ibm 1052 Printer-Keyboard 

ibm 1403 Printer 

IBM 1404 Printer (continuous forms only) 

ibm 1443 Printer 

ibm 1445 Printer 

ibm 2311 Disk Storage Drive 

ibm 2400 Series Tape Drive. For Tape input and/ or 
output, the utility macros require the optional 
supervisor "set mode" facility. 

Effective use of this publication requires an under- 
standing of bbm System/360 operating principles, and 
of the ibm System/ 360 Disk and Tape Operating Sys- 
tems. Reference publications for this information are 
listed in the Preface. 

Y24-5056 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 37 

Operating Systems On Line Test Executive 
Program — Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360N-DN-481 (DOS) 

360M-DN-418(TOS) 
"See plm Note." ( 76 pages ) 

Y24-5079 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 31 

System Librarian Maintenance and Service 
Programs — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360N-CL-453, Version 3 
"See plm Note." (220 Pages) 

Effective use of this manual requires an understand- 
ing of ibm System/ 360 operation and of ibm System/ 
360 Disk Operating System control and service pro- 



grams, macro instructions, and operating procedures. 
Reference publications for this information are listed 
in the Preface of this manual. 

For overall system control logic description, this plm 
is to be used with four other plms: 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Introduc- 
tion to System Control and Service Programs, 
FormY24-5017. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, IPL and 

Job Control Programs, Form Y24-5086. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Supervisor 
and Physical and Logical Transients, Form Y24- 
5084. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Linkage 
Editor, Form Y24-5080. 

Y24-5080 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 31 

System Linkage Editor — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360N-CL-453, Version 3 
"See plm Note." ( 108 pages) 

Effective use of this manual requires an understand- 
ing of ibm System/360 operation and of bbm System/ 
360 Disk Operating System control and service pro- 
grams, macro instructions, and operating procedures. 
Reference publications for this information are listed 
in the Preface of this manual. 

For overall system control logic description, this plm 
is to be used with four other plms: 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Introduc- 
tion to System Control Programs, Form Y24-5017. 
IBM System/ 360 Disk Operating System, IPL and 

Job Control Programs, Form Y24-5086. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Supervisor 
and Physical and Logical Transients, Form Y24- 
5084. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Librarian 
Maintenance and Service Programs, Form Y24- 
5079. 

Y24-5084 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 36 

System Supervisor and Physical and 
Logical Transients— Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360N-CL-453, Version 3 
"See plm Note." (332 pages) 

Effective use of this manual requires an understand- 
ing of ibm System/360 operation and of ibm System/ 
360 Disk Operating System control and service pro- 
grams, macro instructions, and operating procedures. 
Reference publications for this information are listed 
in the Preface. 

For overall system control logic description, this plm 
is to be used with four other plms : 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Introduc- 
tion to System Control Programs, Form Y24-5017. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Librarian 
Maintenance and Service Programs, Form Y24- 
5079. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Linkage 

Editor, Form Y24-5080. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, IPL and 
Job Control Programs, Form Y24-5086. 

Y24-5086 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 36 

System IPL and Job Control Programs 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360N-CL-453, Version 3 
"See plm Note." ( 196 pages ) 

Effective use of this manual requires an understand- 
ing of ibm System/360 operation and of ibm System/ 
360 Disk Operating System control and service pro- 
grams, macro instructions, and operating procedures. 
Reference publications for this information are listed 
in the Preface. 



For overall system control logic description, this plm 
is to be used with four other plms: 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Introduc- 
tion to System Control and Service Programs, 

Form Y24-5017. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Supervisor 

and Physical and Logical Transients, Form Y24- 

5084. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Librarian 

Maintenance and Service Programs, Form Y24- 

5079. 
IBM System/360 Disk Operating System, Linkage 

Editor, Form Y24-5080. 



Y24-5087 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 30 

System Logical IOCS — Volume 2: Unit 
Record, Magnetic Tape, and Device 
Independent Files — Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

CDMOD 360N-IO-453, Version 3 

CPMOD 360N-CL-453, Version 3 

DIMOD 360N-CL-457, Version 3 

DTFCN 360N-CL-453, Version 3 

MRMOD 360N-IO-477, Version 3 

MTMOD 360N-IO-456, Version 3 

ORMOD 360N-IO-478, Version 3 

PRMOD 360N-CL-453, Version 3 

PTMOD 360N-IO-458, Version 3 
"See plm Note." ( 308 pages ) 

This is one of four Program Logic Manuals that de- 
scribe the internal logic of the Logical iocs (Input/ 
Output Control System) programs for the ibm System/ 
360 Disk Operating System. The four related Program 
Logic Manuals are: 

Volume 1: Introduction, Form Y24-5020. 

Volume 2: Unit Record, Magnetic Tape, and Device 
Independent Files, Form Y24-5087. 

Volume 3: Sequential and Direct Access DASD Files, 
Form Y24-5088. 

Volume 4: Indexed Sequential File Management 
System,. Form Y24-5089. 

Effective use of this publication requires an under- 
standing of rBM System/360 operation and the Disk 
Operating System Assembler language and its associ- 
ated macro definition language. Reference publications 
for this information are listed in the Preface. 



Y24-5088 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 30 

System Logical IOCS — Volume 3: 
Sequential and Direct Access DASD 
Files — Progrdm Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

SDMOD 360N-IO-455, Version 3 

DAMOD 360N-IO-4S4, Version 3 
"See plm Note." (236 pages) 

This is one of four Program Logic Manuals that de- 
scribe the internal logic of the Logical iocs (Input/ 
Output Control System) programs for the ibm System/ 
360 Disk Operating System. The four related Program 
Logic Manuals are: 

Volume 1: Introduction, Form Y24-5020. 

Volume 2: Unit Record, Magnetic Tape, and Device 
Independent Files, Form Y24-5087. 

Volume 3: Sequential and Direct Access DASD Files, 
Form Y24-5088. 

Volume 4: Indexed Sequential File Management 
System, Form Y24-5089. 

Effective use of this publication requires an under- 
standing of ibm System/ 360 operation and the Disk 
Operating System Assembler language and its associ- 
ated macro definition language. Reference publications 
for this information are listed in the Preface. 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 59 



PIM Note 

Program Logic Manuals describe the internal 
design or logic of the subject programs. These 
manuals are intended for persons involved in 
program maintenance and system programmers 
who are altering the program design. Program 
logic information is not necessary for the opera- 
tion of the program; therefore, distribution of 
these publications is limited to persons with 
maintenance and alteration requirements. 



Y24-5089 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 30 

System Logical IOCS— Volume 4: Indexed 
Sequential File Management System 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: ISMOD 360N-IO-457, Version 3 
"See plm Note." (336 pages) 

This publication is one of four Program Logic Man- 
uals that describe the internal logic of the Logical iocs 
(Input/ Output Control System) programs for the ibm 
System/ 360 Disk Operating System. The four related 
Program Logic Manuals are: 

Volume 1: Introduction, Form Y24-5020. 

Volume 2: Unit Record, Magnetic Tape, and Device 
Independent Files, Form Y24-5087. 

Volume 3: Sequential and Direct Access DASD Files, 
FormY24-5088. 

Volume 4: Indexed Sequential FUe Management 
System, Form Y24-5089. 

Effective use of this publication requires an under- 
standing of ibm System/ 360 operation and the Disk 
Operating System Assembler language and its associ- 
ated macro definition language. Reference publications 
for this information are listed in the Preface. 

For the titles and abstracts of other related publica- 
tions, refer to the IBM System/360 Bibliography, Form 
A22-6822. 



Y24-5096 IBM System/360 Basic Programming 
Support Modular File Maintenance Program 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360P-UT-219 
"See plm Note." ( 32 pages ) 



Y26-3598 IBM System/360 Operating System 
Assembler (32K) — Program Logic 
Manual 

"See plm Note." ( 123 pages) 



Y26-3642 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 
Operating Systems — Assembler 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 
360M/N-AS-46S 
360N-AS-467 



32 



21 



21 



"See plm Note." ( 137 pages) 



Y26-37O0 IBM System/360 Operating System 
Assembler (64K) — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360S-AS-037 
"See plm Note." (116 pages ) 



21 



Y26-3701 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 28 

Operating Systems — Report Program 
Generator — Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360N-RG-460(Disk) 

360M-RG-408(Tape) 
"See plm Note." ( 130 pages) 



Y26-3704 IBM System/360 Operating System 28 

Report Program Generator — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-RG-038 
"See plm Note." (129 pages) 



Y26-3716 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 21 

System Assembler (F) — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360N-AS-466 
"See plm Note." ( 120 pages) 



Y27-7102 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 25 

FORTRAN II Language Conversion 
Program for the IBM 1401 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 1401-FO-702 
"See plm Note." ( 89 pages ) 



Y27-7103 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 35 

The 1401/1460 Emulator Program for 
IBM System/360 Model 40 — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360C-EU-074 
"See plm Note." (51 pages) 

The relationship of the program logic to that of the 
ibm 1401/1460 Compatibility Feature (#4457) is in- 
cluded. 



Y27-71 08 IBM System/360 Transition Aids: 
COBOL Language Conversion Program 
for the IBM 1401 — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 1401-CB-701 
"See plm Note." ( 88 pages ) 



30 



Y27-71 10 IBM System/360 Operating System 
Graphics Problem Oriented Routines 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-IO-S23 
"See plm Note." (39 pages) 

This manual covers routines intended for use with 
the ibm 2250 Display Unit. Its primary purpose is to 
serve as a guide to the program listings with which it 
is used. 



Y27-71 1 1 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 35 

The 7074 Emulator Program for IBM 
System/360 Models 50 and 65 — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360C-EU-725 
• "See plm Note." ( 74 pages ) 

This publication describes the internal logic of the 
ibm 7074 Emulator Program in conjunction with the 
ibm 7074 Compatibility Feature and is primarily a 
guide to the program listing. 



Y27-71 1 2 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 35 

The 7080 Emulator Program for IBM 
System/360 Model 65 — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360C-EU-727 

"See plm Note." (73 pages) 

This publication is intended to be used with the 
program assembly listing and is primarily a guide to 
that listing. 



Y27-71 1 3 IBM System/360 Operating System 30 
Graphics Access Method — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-IO-523 
"See plm Note." (92 pages) 

This publication describes the operation of the 
Graphics Access Method (gam) for the ibm 2250 Dis- 
play Unit Models 1, 2, and 3, the ibm 2260 Display 
Station (Local Attachment); and the ibm 2280/82 
Film Units. The Graphics Access Method functions in 
both express and basic environments, and both types 
of routines are described herein. 



Y27-71 15 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 
The 1410/7010 Simulator for IBM 
System/360 — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360C-SI-754 
"See plm Note." ( 98 pages ) 



Y27-71 1 6 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 
The 1620 Simulator for IBM System/360 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360C-SI-752 
"See plm Note." (85 pages) 



35 



35 



Y27-71 17 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 
24 The 7070/7074 Simulator for IBM System/ 

360 — Program Logic Manual 

ProgramNumber: 360C-SI-753 
"See plm Note." ( 103 pages) 



35 



Y27-71 1 8 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 
The 7080 Simulator for IBM System/360 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360C-SI-751 
"See plm Note." ( 102 pages ) 



Y27-71 1 9 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 
The 7090/7094 Simulator for IBM 
System/360 — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360C-SI-750 
"See plm Note. (95 pages) 



Y27-71 26 IBM System/360 Model 30—1 620 
Emulator Program — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360C-EU-731 
"See plm Note. ( 79 pages ) 



35 



35 



35 



60 



MM Note 

Program Logic Manuals describe the infernal de- 
sign or logic of the subject programs. These man- 
uals are intended for persons involved in program 
maintenance and system programmers who are 
altering the program design. Program logic in- 
formation is not necessary for the operation of the 
program; therefore, distribution of these publica- 
tions is limited to persons with maintenance and 
alteration requirements. 



Y27-7128 IBM System/360 Operating 36 

System Control Program with MFT — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360S-CIS0S 

360S-DMS08 
"See plm Note." ( 88 pages ) 

This publication describes the internal logic o{ the 
control program to the extent that it is modified for 
mft. These modifications affect die job management, 
task management, and data management routines of 
the control program. 



Y27-71 36 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 32 

System — Vocabulary File Utility Program 
for the IBM 7772 Audio Response Unit 

Program Number: 360N-UT-472 
"See elm Note. ( 56 pages ) 



Y27-7I52 IBM System/360 Operating System 25 
Graphic Programming Services for 
FORTRAN IV — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-LMS37 
"See plm Note." ( 132 pages) 

gsp is a program that enables a Fortran program- 
mer to write graphic programs for use with the ibm 
2250 Display Unit in association with die ibm System/ 
360 Operating System. It is not an extension of Fortran 
iv, but does extend graphic capabilities via subroutines 
and functions to the Fortran programmer, gsp may 
also be used in an assembler language program. 



Y27-71 55 IBM System/360 Operating System 31 

Machine-Check Handler for System/360 
Model 65 — Program Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." ( 76 pages ) 



Y27-7159 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 

Graphic Job Processor Support — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number :360S-RCS41 
"See plm Note." (190 pages) 

This publication describes die internal logic of the 
Graphic Job Processor (gjp) and the Graphics Inter- 
face Task (cfx), which are features of the ibm Sys- 
tem/360 Operating System that permit jobs to be 
defined and initiated by responding to frames dis- 
played on an ibm 2250 Display Unit 



Y28-2009— IBM System/360 Time Sharing 
System — System Logic Summary 
Program Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." ( 276 pages ) 



36 Y28-2022 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 
System — Time Sharing Support System 
Program Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." ( 220 pages ) 



36 



Y28-201 1— IBM System/360 Time Sharing 
System — -System Control Blocks 
Program Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." ( 296 pages ) 

This publication documents all control blocks which 
are a part of die Time Sharing System (rss/seo) Sys- 
tem. Each control block is described in terms of its 
function, size, residence, and use by the rest of the sys- 
tem. A diagram gives a graphic picture of each block, 
and a dsect listing shows all fields and includes com- 
ments on individual fields. 



Y28-201 2 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 
System Resident Supervisor' — Program 
Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." ( 216 pages) 



36 



36 



Y28-201 3 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 
System Command Language 
Program Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." ( 358 pages ) 

The modules described in this manual process die 
commands available to the user, manager, administra- 
tor, and operator of the time sharing system. 



Y28-2014 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 
System Program Control System 
Program Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." (212 pages) 



37 



31 



Y28-2015 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 
System — System Generation and 
Maintenance — Program Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." ( 92 pages ) 

This manual includes a high level flow of logic from 
the sysbld Prelude, through System Build, Startup Pre- 
lude, and Startup to the point where a working system 



30 



Y28-201 6 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 
System Access Methods — Program 
Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." (314 pages) 



Y28-201 8 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 
System — System Service Routines 
Program Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." ( 156 pages ) 



Y28-201 9 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 
System FORTRAN IV — Program 
Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." (6 



25 



Y28-2021 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 

System Assembler — Program Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." (376 pages) 



21 



Y28-2030 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 31 

System Linkage Editor— Program Logic 
''Manual' 

"See plm Note." ( 104 pages) 



Y28-2031 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 31 

System Dynamic Loader — Program 
Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." ( 162 pages ) 

The dynamic loader assigns virtual storage for a 
task's program modules and resolves address constants 
for those pages referenced at execution time. In addi- 
tion, the dynamic loader deletes modules from the task 
and performs several houskeeping functions. Library 
maintenance, a housekeeping function not part of the 
dynamic loader proper, is also discussed in this manual. 



Y28-2039 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 32 

System Independent Utilities — Program 
Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." ( 66 pages ) 



Y28-2041 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 36 

System Task Monitor — Program 
Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." ( 56 pages) 



Y28-2042 IBM System/360 Time Sharing 36 

System On-Line Test Control Program 
Program Logic Manual 

"See plm Note" ( 56 pages ) 

This publication is intended for use with the ap- 
propriate program listings. Its primary purpose is to 
serve as a guide to those listings. 



Y28-6382 IBM System/360 Operating System 24 

COBOL (F) — Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

mS*CB-524 

360S-LM-S25 
"See plm Note." ( 187 pages ) 



Y28-6564 IBM System/360 Model 40—1410/ 
31 7010 Emulator Program — Program Logic 

Manual 

Program Number: 360C-EU-728 
"See plm Note." ( 79 pages ) 



35 



Y28-6566 IBM System/360 Model 65 35 

709/7090/7094/7094 II Emulator 
Program — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360C-EU-729 
"See plm Note." ( 128 pages ) 

This publication describes the internal logic of die 
709/7090/7094/7094 n Emulator Program used with 
Compatibility Feature #7119 to execute 709/7090/ 
7094/7094 n programs on a System/360 Model 65. 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 61 



PLMNote 

Program Logic Manuals describe the internal 
design or logic of the subject programs. These 
manuals are intended for persons involved in 
program maintenance and system programmers 
who are altering the program design. Program 
logic information is not necessary for the opera- 
tion of the program; therefore,- distribution of 
these publications is limited to persons with 
maintenance and alteration requirements. 



Y28-6569 IBM System/360 Model 50 35 

1410/7010 Emulator Program — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360C-EU-726 
"See plm Note." ( 78 pages ) 

This publication describes the internal logic of the 
1410/7010 Emulator Program used with Compatibility 
Feature #4478 to execute 1410/7010 programs on a 
System/ 360 Model 50. 



Y28-6597 IBM System/360 Operating 33 

System — Sort/Merge — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360S-SM-023 

"See plm Note." ( 100 pages) 

This manual can be used to locate specific areas of 
the program, and it enables the reader to relate these 
areas to the corresponding program listings. 

This version of the sort/merge program is designed 
to: 

1. Sort a data set using as intermediate storage the 
ibm 2400-Series (7- or 9-track) Magnetic Tape Unit, 
or the ibm 2311 Disk Storage Drive, or the ibm 2314 
Direct-Access Storage Facility, or the ibm 2301 Drum 
Storage. 

2. Merge up to 16 previously sorted data sets. 



Y28-6599 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 35 

The 7040/7044 Emulator Program for 
IBM System/360 Model 65 — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360C-EU-733 
"See plm Note." ( 139 pages) 

This publication describes the internal logic of the 
7040/7044 Emulator Program used with the Compati- 
bility Feature #7119 to execute 7040/7044 programs 
on an ibm System/ 360 Model 65. 



Y28-6601 IBM System/360 Operating System 25 

FORTRAN IV (E)— Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-FO-092 
"See plm Note." ( 158 pages) 



Y28-6604 IBM System/360 Operating Sysfem 30 

Sequential Access Methods — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-DM-508 

"See plm Note." ( 57 pages ) 

This publication describes the internal logic of the 
routines of the queued sequential access method, the 
basic sequential access method, and the basic parti- 
tioned access method of ibm System/ 360 Operating 
System. 



Y28-6605 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 

Introduction to Control Program Logic 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360S-CI-505 

360S-DM-508 
"See plm Note." (32 pages) 

This publication discusses the components of the 
primary control program of ibm System/360 Operating 
System and indicates the program logic manuals that 
describe these components. 



Y28-6606 IBM System/360 Operating System 30 

Catalog Management — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360S-DM-508 
"See plm Note." (20 pages) 

This manual provides detailed information on cata- 
log management routines. These routines record iden- 
tification of volumes used by data sets by maintaining 
information in logical records called indexes. The func- 
tions and structures of the routines are described, as 
are their relationships to other portions of ibm System/ 
360 Operating System. This manual also describes the 
structure of catalog data sets that contain the indexes 
processed by catalog management routines. 



Y28-6607 IBM System/360 Operating System 30 

Direct Access Device Space Management 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-DM-508 
"See plm Note." ( 36 pages ) 

This manual provides detailed information on direct- 
access device space management (dadsm) routines. 
These routines control the use of external direct-access 
storage by maintaining the information in data set con- 
trol blocks. The functions and structures of the routines 
are described, as are their relationships to other por- 
tions of ibm System/360 Operating System. This man- 
ual also describes the structure of volume tables of 
contents which are processed by dadsm routines. 



Y28-6609 IBM System/360 Operating System 30 

Input/Output Support (OPEN/CLOSE/EOV) 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-DMS08 

"See plm Note." ( 44 pages ) 

This manual discusses the relation of i/o support 
routines to other portions of die control program. De- 
tailed descriptions of the open, close, and eov routines 
provide the basis for the discussions of the other i/o 
support routines openj, bdjfcb, Tclose, and feov. 



Y28-6610 IBM System/360 Operating System 31 

Linkage Editor — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: S36O-ED-510 (Level E) 
"See plm Note." ( 148 pages) 

This publication describes the internal logic of the 
15K, 18K, and 44K versions of the level E linkage edi- 
tor. The linkage editor combines and edits modules to 
produce a single load module that can be loaded into 
main storage by the control program. The linkage edi- 
tor operates as a processing program rather than as a 
part of the control program. 



Y28-661 1 IBM System/360 Operating System 37 

TESTRAN — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-PT-S16 
"See plm Note." ( 126 pages) 

testran is divided into three parts: the testran 
macro-instructions, the testran interpreter, and the 
testran editor. The operation of each of these parts 
is discussed in detail. 



Y28-6612 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 

Fixed-Task Supervisor — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360S-CI-505 
"See plm Note." ( 77 pages ) 

This publication describes the fixed-task supervisor, 
which performs task management as a major part of 
the primary control program of D3M System/360 Oper- 
ating System. In addition, this manual describes the 
initial program loader (ipl) and the nucleus initializa- 
tion program ( nip ) . 



Y28-6613 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 

Job Management — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360S-Ct-50S 

"See plm Note." ( 128 pages) 

Job management prepares jobs for execution, and 
directs the disposition of data sets created during job 
execution. It also handles all communication between 
the operator and the primary control program. In- 
cluded in the publication are descriptions of tables and 
work areas used by the Job management routines and 
a directory of names and purposes of control sections, 
assembly modules, and load modules. The information 
contained in this publication applies only to the pri- 
mary control program. 



Y28-6614 IBM System/360 Operating System 32 

Utilities — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-UTS06 
"See plm Note." ( 83 pages ) 

System, data set, and independent utility programs 
are included in this publication. 



Y28-6616 IBM System/360 Operating System 30 

Input/Output Supervisor — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-CI-S05 
"See plm Note." ( 110 pages) 

The i/o supervisors components, the excp supervi- 
sor, and the i/o interruption supervisor are discussed 
in detail to show the internal structure and logic in- 
volved in the control of i/o devices and channels. 



Y28-6617 IBM System/360 Operating System 30 
Basic Direct Access Method — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-DM-509 
"See plm Note." ( 72 pages ) 

The functions and structures of the routines are de- 
scribed, as are their relationships to other portions of 
the operating system. 



62 



PLM Note 

Program Logic Manuals describe the internal 
design or logic of the subject programs. These 
manuals are intended for persons involved in 
program maintenance and system programmers 
who are altering the program design. Program 
logic information is not necessary for the opera- 
tion of the program; therefore, distribution of 
these publications is limited to persons with 
maintenance and alteration requirements. 



Y2 8-66 18 IBM System/360 Operating System 30 

Indexed Sequential Access Methods 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-IOS26 
"See plm Note." (88 pages) 

This publication describes the program logic of the 
two indexed sequential access methods: the queued 
indexed sequential access method (qisam) and the 
basic indexed sequential access method (bisam). It 
also discusses the relationship of indexed sequential 
access method routines to other parts of the control 
program. 



Y28-6638 IBM System/360 Operating System 25 

FORTRAN IV (G) Compiler— Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-FO-S20 
"See plm Note." ( 248 pages ) 

The fohtran rv (G) compiler is a processing pro- 
gram of the bbm System/360 Operating System. It 
translates one or more source modules written in the 
Fortran language into an object module that can be 
processed into an executable load module by the Link- 
age Editor. 



Y28-6642 IBM System/360 Operating System 25 

FORTRAN IV (H) Compiler— Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-FOS00 
"See plm Note." ( 232 pages ) 

The Fortran rv (h) compiler program transforms 
source modules written in die Fortran rv language 
into object modules mat are suitable for input to the 
linkage editor for subsequent execution on System/ 
360. At me user's option, the compiler produces opti- 
mized object modules (modules that can be executed 
with improved efficiency ) . 

This revision reflects the 5.1 version of the Fortran 
rv (h) compiler program. A number of table formats 
and intermediate text formats have been changed. The 
overall operation of the compiler has not changed sig- 
nificantly, but some routines within the program have 
been changed, new routines have been added, and 
some routines have been deleted or combined with 
other routines. 



Y28-6651 IBM System/360 Operating System 37 
On-Line Test Executive Program — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-DNS33 
"See plm Note." ( 68 pages ) 

The On-Line Test Executive Program handles on- 
line testing of input/output devices under control of 
the ibm System/ 360 Operating System. 



Y28-6658 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 

MVT Control Program Logic Summary 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360S-CIS35 

360S-DMS08 
"See plm Note." (56 pages) 

This publication introduces the internal logic of the 
mvt control program of System/360 Operating System. 
It contains general descriptions of the operating en- 
vironment of the control program, the initial program 
loading procedure, die job management, task manage- 
ment, and data management functions, and the op- 
tional recovery management function. Detailed de- 
scriptions of the implementation of these functions are 
in die program logic manuals listed in Appendix B. 

The mvt configuration of the control program is 
designed for use with System/360 Models 40, 50, 65, 
and 75 having 262,144 (256K) bytes or more main 
storage. 

Information on rje (remote job entry) contained 
herein is for planning purposes. 



Y28-6659 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 

MVT Supervisor — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360S-CI-535 
"See plm Note." (308 pages) 

The mvt supervisor is one part of the control pro- 
gram of the ibm System/360 Operating System. The 
supervisor controls the basic computing system and 
programming resources needed to perform several data 
processing tasks concurrendy. Specifically, it was de- 
signed to: 

1. Handle interruptions. 

2. Supervise tasks. 

3. Control programs in main storage. 

4. Control main storage itself. 

5. Supervise the timer. 

6. Supervise console communications and the sys- 
tem log. 

7. Supervise exiting procedures. 

8. Supervise termination procedures. 

The information in this publication applies only to 
systems capable of multiprogramming with a variable 
number of tasks (mvt). It reflects the status of the 
system at Release 12. 



Y28-6660 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 

MVT Job Management — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-CIS35 
"See plm Note." ( 188 pages ) 

This publication describes the internal logic of the 
job management routines for the mvt control program 
of the ibm System/360 Operating System. Included 
are discussions of input stream processing, work queue 
management, job initiation and termination, i/o device 
allocation, system output processing, and the schedul- 
ing and execution of operator commands. 



Y28-6661 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 

Initial Program Loader and Nucleus 
Initialization Program — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360S-CIS35 
"See plm Note." ( 32 pages ) 

The Initial Program Loader prepares main storage 
to receive the nucleus and then loads the nucleus. The 
Nucleus Initialization Program initializes die resident 



part of the control program and prepares main storage 
for control program operation. The information in this 
publication applies only to systems capable of multi- 
programming with a variable number of tasks, (mvt). 



Y28-6665 IBM System/360 Operating System 32 
Guide to Model 91 Support — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 
360S-DM-508 
360S-CI-535 

"See plm Note." ( 84 pages ) 

This publication provides information concerning 
the ways in which the internal logic of certain routines 
have been expanded or modified to support the ibm 
System/360 Model 91. 



Y28-6667 IBM System/360 Operating System 31 

Linkage Editor (F) — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: S360-ED-521 
"See plm Note." (184 pages) 

This publication describes the internal logic of the 
bbm System/360 Operating System Linkage Editor 
(F), Version 2, with design points of 44K, 88K, and 
128K. It identifies areas of the program that perform 
specific functions and relates those areas to die pro- 
gram listing. 

The linkage editor, a processing program, combines 
and edits modules to produce a load module that can 
be loaded into main storage by the control program. 
The linkage editor: 

1. Allocates storage, analyzes attributes and options, 
and initializes tables and buffers. (Initialization) 

2. Transforms input into an internal format for sub- 
sequent processing. (Input Processing) 

3. Assigns relative storage addresses to external 
symbols, writes records on the output data set, and 
produces an optional module map and/or cross-refer- 
ence table. (Intermediate Processing) 

4. Relocates address constants found in the input 
text, and writes the remaining records on the output 
data set. (Second Pass Processing) 

5. Completes the partitioned data set directory for 
the output data set, produces an error diagnostic di- 
rectory, and releases storage allocated to the linkage 
editor. (Final Processing) 



Y28-6672 IBM System/360 Operating System 31 
Checkpoint/Restart — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-CI-505 
"See plm Note." ( 28 pages ) 

This publication includes the theory and organization 
of the checkpoint/restart facility of the km System/ 
360 Operating System. The checkpoint-restart facility 
saves job step information at specific checkpoints in a 
program so that, in the event of error, it can restart the 
job step from one of the checkpoints. 



Y28-6681 IBM System/360 Operating System 36 

Release 15/16 

"See plm Note." (340 pages) 

This document outlines the current status, new fea- 
tures/functions, and incremental improvements to 
System/360 Operating System. A list of all modules 
added, deleted, or altered for this release is also in- 
cluded. System Prose and Maintenance Prose in the 
form apars, psi entries, and ptfs inform the user of the 
current maintenance status of the system. 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 63 



PLM Note 

Program Logic Manuals describe the internal 
design or logic of the subject programs. These 
manuals are intended for persons involved in 
program maintenance and system programmers 
who are altering the program design. Program 
logic information is not necessary for the opera- 
tion of the program; therefore, distribution of 
these publications is limited to persons with 
maintenance and alteration requirements. 



Y28-6800 IBM System/360 Operating System 29 

PL/I (F) Compiler — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360S-NL-511 
"See plm Note." ( 238 pages ) 

This manual is aimed at personnel responsible for 
analyzing program operations, diagnosing malfunction, 
and changing the program format for special or na- 
tional language usage. The information provides a 
guide for effective use of the program listings. 



Y28-6801 IBM System/360 Operatng System 29 

PL/I Subroutine Library — Program Logic 
Manual 

Program Number: 360S-LM-512 

"See plm Note." ( 117 pages) 

This publication describes the internal specifications 
of the pl/i Subroutine Library as a system component 
of ibm Operating- System/ 360. The relationships be- 
tween the code produced by the pl/i (f) compiler, 
the pl/i Library modules and the control program are 
described, and summaries of the properties of indi- 
vidual modules are provided. 



Y28-68 11 IBM System/360 Model 44 21 

Programming System Assembler 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360F-AS-616 
"See plm Note." ( 139 pages ) 



Y28-6812 IBM System/360 Model 44 36 

Programming System Supervisor and 
Job Control — Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360F-IO-613 

360F-CL-614 
"See plm Note." (228 pages) 



Y28-6813 IBM System/360 Model 44 31 

Programming System Linkage Editor 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360F-ED-615 
"See plm Note." (131 pages) 

The linkage editor combines and edits modules to 
produce a single load phase that can be loaded into 
main storage by the control program. The linkage edi- 
tor operates as a processing program rather than as a 
part of the control program. 



Y28-68 14 IBM System/360 Model 44 32 

Programming System Utilities and 
Stand-alone Programs — Program 
Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360F-UT-606 

360F-UT-607 

360F-UT-608 

360F-UT-609 

360F-UT-610 

360F-UT-611 

360F-UT-612 

360F-UT-617 

360F-UT-620 
"See plm Note." (172 pages) 



Y28-68 1 5— IBM System/360 Model 44 25 

Programming System FORTRAN IV 
Compiler — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360F-FO-618 
"See plm Note." (231 pages) 

The fobtran rv compiler is a processing program of 
the ibm System/360 Model 44 Programming System. 
It translates a source module written in the Fortran rv 
language into an object module that can be processed 
into an executable load module by the Model 44 link- 
age editor. 



Y28-6816 IBM System/360 Conversion Aids: 35 
1620 Simulator for IBM System/360 
Model 44 — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360C-SI-7SS 
"See plm Note." ( 112 pages ) 

The 1620 simulator is a conversion aid that executes 
object programs written for an ibm 1620 Model 1 or 
Model 2 Data Processing System on an ibm System/ 
360 Model 44. The purpose of the simulator is to aid 
the user during the period of transition from a 1620 
installation to a System/360 Model 44. 



Y28-7106 IBM System/360 Operating System 32 

Update Analysis Program — Program 
Logic Manual 

"See plm Note." (24 pages) 



Y30-2001 IBM System/360 Operating System 30 

Basic Telecommunications Access 
Method — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-CQS13 
"See plm Note." ( 184 pages ) 



Y30-2002 IBM System/360 Operating System 30 

Queued Telecommunications Access Method 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-CQ-519 

"See plm Note." ( For Option 2) ( 188 pages ) 



Y30-2005 IBM System/360 Operating System 
Remote Job Entry — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360S-RC-536 
"See plm Note." (236 pages) 



36 



Y30-2006 IBM System/360 Basic Operating 36 

System, Basic Programming Support 
Remote Job Entry Work Station Program 
Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360B-CQ-311 (BOS) 

360P-CQ-218 (BPS) 
"See plm Note." ( 44 pages ) 



Y30-5001 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 30 

System — Basic Telecommunications Access 
Method — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360N-CQ-469 
"See plm Note." ( 296 pages ) 



Y30-5002 IBM System/360 Disk Operating 30 

System Queued Telecommunications Access 
Method — Program Logic Manual 

Program Number: 360N-CQ-470 
"See plm Note." ( 200 pages ) 



Y33-6003 IBM System/360 PL/I Language 99 

Specifications 

This publication is a description of the pl/i language. 
It does not describe any implementation; nor can it be 
construed that the publication implies any commitment 
that the features are implemented or will be imple- 
mented by ibm. The publication is intended for the use 
of implementers and programming language designers 
concerned with language development and the study 
of languages. ( 216 pages ) 



Y33-8000 IBM System/360 Operating System 26 
ALGOL (F) Compiler — Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360S-ALS31 (ALGOL Compiler) 

360S-LM-532 (ALGOL Library) 
"See plm Note." (318 pages) 

The Algol (F) Compiler is a processing program of 
the ibm System/360 Operating System. It translates a 
source module written in the algol language into an 
executable load module by the Linkage Editor. 



Y33-9010 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 29 

Operating Systems PL/I Subset Language 
(Volume 1 of 3) — Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360N-PL-464(DOS) 

360N-PL-410(TOS) 
"See plm Note." ( 422 pages ) 

This publication is divided into three volumes. Vol- 
ume 1 contains the description of the compiler phases; 
volumes 2 and 3 contain the corresponding flow charts. 
The form numbers of the three volumes are: 
Volume 1: Y33-9010 
Volume 2: Y33-9011 
Volume 3: Y33-9012 

All information regarding the library subroutines of 
die dos/tos pl/i compiler is contained in the publica- 
tion IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Sys- 
tems, PL/I Subset-Library Routines, Program Logic 
M anual, Form Y33-9013. 

The reader must be thoroughly familiar with the 
ibm System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems and 
with the pl/i Subset language. A list of all publications 
that provide pertinent information is contained in the 
introduction to volume 1 of this plm. 



64 



Y33-901 1 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 29 

Operating Systems PL/I Subset Language 
(Volume 2 of 3)— Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360N-PL-464(DOS) 

360N-PL-410(TOS) 
"See plm Note." (516 pages) 

The publication is divided into three volumes. Vol- 
ume 1 contains the description of the compiler phases; 
volumes 2 and 3 contain die corresponding flow charts. 
The form numbers of the three volumes are: 
Volume 1: Y33-9010 
Volume 2: Y33-9011 
Volume 3: Y33-9012 

All information regarding the library subroutines of 
the dos/tos pl/i compiler is contained in the publica- 
tion IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Sys- 
tems, PL/I Subset-Library Routines, Program Logic 
Manual, Form Y33-9013. 

The reader must be thoroughly familiar with the 
ibm System/ 360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems and 
with die pl/i Subset language. A list of all publications 
that provide pertinent information is contained in the 
introduction to volume 1 of this plm. 



Y33-901 2 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 29 

Operating Systems PL/I Subset Language 
(Volume 3 of 3) — Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360N-PL-464(DOS) 

360N-PL-410(TOS) 
"See plm Note." ( 448 pages ) 

The publication is divided into three volumes. Vol- 
ume 1 contains the description of the compiler phases; 
volumes 2 and 3 contain the corresponding flow charts. 
The form numbers of the three volumes are: 
Volume 1:Y33-9010 
Volume 2: Y33-9011 
Volume 3: Y33-9012 

All information regarding the library subroutines of 
the dos/tos pl/i compiler is contained in the publica- 
tion IBM System/380 Disk and Tape Operating Sys- 
tems, PL/I Subset-Library Routines, Program Logic 
Manual, Form Y33-9013. 

The reader must be thoroughly familiar with the 
ibm System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems and 
with the pl/i Subset language. A list of all publications 
that provide pertinent information is contained in the 
introduction to volume 1 of this plm. 



Y33-901 3 IBM System/360 Disk and Tape 29 

Operating Systems — PI/I Subset-Library 
(taurines — Program Logic Manual 

Program Numbers: 

360N-PL-464(DOS) 

360N-PL-410(TOS) 
"See plm Note." ( 168 pages) 

This publication contains information on (1) the 
characteristics of the library and the calling conven- 
tions used and (2) the structure and functions of the 
various routines. 

The reader of this publication should be familiar 
with the sbl publications: 

IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems, 
PL/I Subset Language Specifications, Form C28- 
6809 

IBM System/360 Disk and Tape Operating Systems, 
Assembler Specifications, Form C24-3414 

For a list of further related publications, refer to 
IBM System/ 360 Bibliography, Form A22-6822. 



IBM System/ 360 Bibliography 65 



A22-6822-12 



International Business Machines Corporation 
Data Processing Division 
112 East Post Road, White Plains, NY. 10601 
[USA Only] 

IBM World Trade Corporation 

821 United Nations Plaza, New York, New York 10017 

[International]